KASCO SAFETY MANUAL - kascoinc.com

KASCO SA

FETY M

ANUAL

KASCO SAFETY MANUAL

MiOSHA Construction Safety Standards 1. Masonry Wall Bracing 2. Personal Protective Equipment 3. Welding and Cutting 4. Excavating and shoring 5. Ladders 6. Scaffold 7. Fire Protection 8. Guarding of Walks and Worksite 9. Fall Protection 10. KASCO Safety Checklists

©This material is copyright protected

No use without the expressed written consent from Kasco

MASONRY WALL BRACING

1

MIOSHA-STD-1302 (08/05) 3 Pages

DEPARTMENT OF LABOR & ECONOMIC GROWTH DIRECTOR'S OFFICE

CONSTRUCTION SAFETY STANDARDS Filed with the Secretary of State on November 15, 1989

These rules take effect 15 days after filing with the Secretary of State

(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 19 and 21 of Act No. 154 of the Public Acts of 1974, as amended, and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, being §§408.1019, 408.1021 and 445.2001 of the

Michigan Compiled Laws)

Visit our website at: www.Michigan.gov/mioshastandards

PART 2. MASONRY WALL BRACING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

R 408.40201 Scope. ................................................................1 R 408.40202 Applicability.........................................................1 R 408.40203 Definitions; C to U...............................................1 R 408.40204 Maximum unsupported height tables. .................1 R 408.40205 Wind velocity; determination by qualified person.2 R 408.40206 Wall bracing design. ...........................................2

R 408.40207 Typical wall bracing system................................ 2 R 408.40208 Signing. .............................................................. 3 R 408.40209 Inspection........................................................... 3 R 408.40210 Wall bracing system; responsibility for installation; responsibility for replacing system and danger signs.............. 3

GENERAL PROVISIONS

R 408.40201 Scope.

Rule 201. This part pertains to the temporary bracing of unsupported masonry walls during construction which are exposed to wind forces.

R 408.40202 Applicability.

Rule 202. This part is designed to ensure a safe work environment for all personnel on the construction site through the use of temporary bracing of unsupported masonry walls. The requirements of this part are as follows:

(a) Identifying masonry walls requiring temporary bracing (R 408.40204(1)).

(b) Proposing an acceptable temporary bracing system (R 408.40207).

(c) Vacating the collapse area during winds of 35 mph or more (R 408.40204(9) and R 408.40205).

(d) Standard sign requirements for collapse areas (R 408.40208), which are all designed to prevent onsite injury. While winds of more than 35 mph may cause collapse of walls braced in accordance with this part, compliance with all of the other provisions of this same part will ensure that no one will be within the collapse area.

R 408.40203 Definitions; C to U.

Rule 203. (1) “Cavity wall” means a masonry wall with a continuous insulated or uninsulated air space of 2 to 4 1/2 inches between wythes that are connected with rigid metal ties.

(2) “Collapse area” means that area which is within the height of the wall, plus 4 feet, measured at right angles to the wall on both sides.

(3) “Composite wall” means a bonded masonry wall with 2 or more wythes of different masonry units.

(4) “Qualified person” means a person who, by knowledge, training, or experience, has the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter or the work.

(5) “Single wythe hollow masonry” means a masonry wall 1 unit in thickness made up of units with bearing surfaces that are less than 75% solid.

(6) “Solid masonry unit” means a masonry unit with bearing surfaces that are 75% or more solid.

(7) “Unsupported masonry wall” means a masonry wall that has not obtained its final lateral stability from design features when required, such as roofs, floors, buttresses, crosswalls, and piers. R 408.40204 Maximum unsupported height tables.

Rule 204. (1) The maximum unsupported height of a masonry wall shall not be more than the height shown in tables 2 to 5 of this rule. Unbraced walls exceeding the heights specified in these tables are in imminent danger of collapse.

(2) The exposure to which a wall is subjected for use in tables 2 to 5 shall be determined from table 1, which reads as follows:

TABLE 1 Exposure Selection

Exposure Example

A Center of large cities and very rough hilly terrain.

B Suburban areas, towns, city outskirts, wooded areas, and rolling terrain.

C Flat, open country, open flat coastal belts, and grasslands.

(3) Exposure A shall not be used in Michigan. (4) Table 2 reads as follows:

www.Michigan.gov/mioshastandards

2TABLE 2

Single Wythe Hollow Masonry Maximum Unsupported Height

Width of Wall

Minimum Weight psf

Exposure B Exposure C

(1) (2) (1) (2) 4 in. 25 6 ft. (2 ft.)* 6 ft. (1 ft.)* 6 in. 34 6 ft. (5 ft.)* 6 ft. (2.5 ft.)* 8 in. 40 7 ft. (7 ft.)* 6 ft. (4 ft.)*

10 in. 48 10 ft. (10 ft.)* 6 ft. (6 ft.)* 12 in. 56 14 ft. (14 ft.)* 9 ft. (9 ft.)* 16 in. 75 24 ft. (24 ft.)* 16 ft. (16 ft.)*

*See subrule (8) of this rule.

(5) Table 3 reads as follows:

TABLE 3 Solid Brick Walls

Maximum Unsupported Height

Width of Wall Minimum Weight psf


(1) (2) (1) (2) 4 in. 40 6 ft. (3 ft.)* 6 ft. (2 ft.)* 8 in. 80 12 ft. (12 ft.)* 8 ft. (8 ft.)*

12 in. 120 20 ft. (20 ft.)* 19 ft. (19 ft.)* 16 in. 160 26 ft. (26 ft.)* 26 ft. (26 ft.)*



TABLE 4 Composite Walls — 4-inch Brick and Hollow Block Units

(Various Widths)

Maximum Unsupported Height

Width of Wall Total

Brick Block Min. Weight

psf


(1) (2) (1) (2) 8 in. 4 in. 4 in. 65 9 ft. (9 ft.)* 6 ft. (5 ft.)*

10 in. 4 in. 6 in. 74 13 ft. (13 ft.)* 9 ft. (9 ft.)* 12 in. 4 in. 8 in. 80 16 ft. (16 ft.)* 11 ft. (11 ft.)* 14 in. 4 in. 10 in. 88 19 ft. (19 ft.)* 14 ft. (14 ft.)* 16 in. 4 in. 12 in. 96 26 ft. (26 ft.) 17 ft. (17 ft.)*



TABLE 5

Cavity Walls — 4-inch Brick and Hollow Block Units (Various Widths)

Wall Section Maximum Unsupported Height

Brick + Block Minimum Weight psf


(1) (2) (1) (2) 4 in. 4 in. 65 6 ft. (2.5 ft.)* 6 ft. (1.5 ft.)* 4 in. 6 in. 74 6 ft. (5 ft.)* 6 ft. (2.5 ft.)* 4 in. 8 in. 80 8 ft. (8 ft.)* 6 ft. (4.5 ft.)* 4 in. 10 in. 88 11 ft. (11 ft.)* 7 ft. (7 ft.)* 4 in. 12 in. 96 27 ft. (27 ft.)* 18 ft. (18 ft.)*


(8) If employees within the collapse area are working from elevations that are lower than the bottom elevator of the wall, the maximum unsupported height of a masonry wall shall be determined from values given in column (2) of tables 2 to 5.

(9) No one shall be permitted within the collapse area of an unbraced or braced wall subjected to winds of more than 35 miles per hour.

R 408.40205 Wind velocity; determination by qualified person.

Rule 205. For the purpose of this part, the wind velocity shall be determined by a qualified person. R 408.40206 Wall bracing design.

Rule 206. (1) When the height of a masonry wall exceeds the maximum unsupported height as shown in tables 2 to 5 of R 408.40204, the masonry wall shall be braced on both sides upon completion. Crosswalls are acceptable instead of bracing an interior wall if the crosswalls are not spaced more than 20 feet apart. If crosswalls are spaced more than 20 feet apart, wall bracing in accordance with the requirements shall be provided.

(2) On masonry projects that require temporary bracing, the wall bracing system shall be determined before a masonry wall exceeds the maximum unsupported height limits specified in tables 2 to 5 of R 408.40204.

(3) The wall bracing system for a masonry wall shall be designed by a qualified person in accordance with acceptable engineering practices or as prescribed in this part and shall be capable of providing stability to the wall for a wind with a velocity of 35 miles per hour.

(4) If pilasters, buttresses, or other reinforcing is part of the wall design, the unsupported height of walls according to tables 2 to 5 of R 408.40204 may be exceeded by complying with accepted engineering practices. Calculations or plans and specifications shall be available at the jobsite.

(5) If scaffolding, because of work operations, remains erected on 1 side of the completed wall, the collapse area shall be identified and marked. No one shall be permitted within the collapse area when the wind velocity is more than 35 miles per hour.

(6) The height of a masonry wall above the intersection of the diagonal support with the vertical plane of the wall shall not be more than the maximum unsupported height as shown in tables 2 thru 5 of R 408.40204. R 408.40207 Typical wall bracing system.

Rule 207. (1) A typical wall brace may consist of 4 essential parts as follows:

(a) A 16-foot, 2-inch by 10-inch vertical upright. (b) A 16-foot, 2-inch by 10-inch diagonal strut. (c) A 2-inch by 4-inch stiffner. (d) A deadman. (2) The angle of intersection of the 16-foot, 2-inch by 10-

inch diagonal strut and the ground should be between 35 degrees and 45 degrees and the diagonal strut should not intersect the vertical brace below the midpoint of the masonry wall.

(3) When using this typical wall brace, the total wall bracing system shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of this rule and R 408.40206.

(4) Other materials and designs may be used in the construction of a wall bracing system if the design requirements of this rule and R 408.40206 are met.

(5) The following figure is an example of a typical wall brace.

3

FIGURE 1 Typical Wall Brace for Masonry Wall

(6) The maximum spacing for typical exterior wall bracing

shall not be more than 20 feet. Table 6 specifies typical exterior wall bracing requirements and reads as follows:

TABLE 6 Typical Exterior Wall

8 inch wall .............…………................ 18 feet maximum height 12 inch wall .............………................. 22 feet maximum height R 408.40208 Signing.

Rule 208. (1) Each unsupported masonry wall that is more than 6 feet in height, braced or unbraced, and 50 feet or less in length shall be posted with a danger sign on each side of the wall.

(2) Each unsupported masonry wall that is more than 6 feet in height, braced or unbraced, and more than 50 feet in length, shall be posted with danger signs at each end of the wall and at intervals of not more than 100 feet along each side of the wall.

(3) When scaffolding is in place along an unsupported masonry wall, the posting requirements of subrule (1) or (2) of

this rule are only required for the unscaffolded portions of the wall.

(4) The danger sign shall be placed in a conspicuous location either on the wall or anywhere within the collapse area.

(5) The danger signs shall be maintained in place and in a legible condition until the masonry wall is permanently supported.

(6) A danger sign as required by subrule (1) or (2) of this rule shall comply with all of the following requirements:

(a) Be 10 inches in height by 14 inches wide. (b) Have the word “DANGER” in white characters which

are, 2 1/6 inches high and which appear within a red oval which is 4 1/8 inches high by 11 7/8 inches long and which is in the top 1/2 of the sign.

(c) Have the lower 1/2 of the sign state, “This Unsupported Wall is Unstable in Windy Conditions.”

(7) An illustration of a danger sign which compiles with the requirements of subrule (6) of this rule is shown in the following figure:

FIGURE 2

R 408.40209 Inspection.

Rule 209. An unsupported masonry wall, including the wall bracing system, shall be inspected for damage by a qualified person after each windstorm if the wind velocity was more than 35 miles per hour. If any movement of the wall or other physical damage, including damage to the wall bracing system, is found, only those persons repairing the wall or wall bracing system shall be permitted to work within the collapse area until repairs have been made. R 408.40210 Wall bracing system; responsibility for

installation; responsibility for replacing system and danger signs.

Rule 210. The masonry contractor shall be responsible for the initial installation of the wall bracing system. After a wall bracing system and danger signs have been installed in accordance with the provisions of this part, any party, including a subcontractor, general contractor, or owner, who alters or removes the bracing system or danger signs shall be responsible for replacing the bracing system and danger signs in accordance with the provisions of this part.

Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Administration PO Box 30643

Lansing, Michigan 48909-8143 Ph: 517.322.1814 Fax: 517.322.1775

The Department of Labor & Economic Growth will not discriminate against any individual or group because of race, sex, religion, age, national origin, color, marital status, disability, or political beliefs. If you need assistance with reading, writing, hearing, etc., under the Americans with Disabilities

Act, you may make your needs known to this agency.

Total Units Printed: Total Printing Cost: Cost Per Unit:

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE

EQUIPMENT

2



GENERAL INDUSTRY SAFETY STANDARDS

Filed with the Secretary of State on March 2, 1983 (as amended November 15, 1989) (as amended May 31, 1995) (as amended May 14, 1997)

These rules take effect 15 days after filing with the Secretary of State.

(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 16 and 21 of

Act No. 154 of the Public Acts of 1974, as amended, and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, being §§408.1016, 408.1021, and 445.2001 of the Michigan Compiled Laws)

R 408.13311, R 408.13312, R 408.13350, R 408.13370, R 408.13372, R 408.13383, R 408.13385, R 408.13387, R 408.13390 and R 408.13394, of the Michigan Administrative Code, appearing on pages 359 and 360 of the 1983 Annual Supplement to the 1979 Michigan Administrative Code and pages 839 to 853 of the 1995 Annual Supplement to the Code, are amended to

read as follows:

Visit our website at: www.michigan.gov/mioshastandards

PART 33. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS R 408.13301. Scope. ............................................................ 1 R 408.13302. Definitions; A to E........................................... 1 R 408.13303. Definitions; F, G.............................................. 2 R 408.13304. Definitions; H, I. .............................................. 2 R 408.13305. Definitions; L to R. .......................................... 2 R 408.13306. Definitions; S to W.......................................... 2 R 408.13308. Hazard assessment and

equipment selection....................................................... 3 R 408.13309. Training. ......................................................... 3 R 408.13310. Employer’s and employee’s responsibilities. .. 3R 408.13311. Certification. ................................................... 3 R 408.13312. Face and eye protection generally. ................ 3 R 408.13313. Maintenance and cleanliness of protectors. ... 6R 408.13320. Purposes, types, styles, and marking. ............ 6 R 408.13321. Rigid helmet bodies........................................ 6 R 408.13322. Rigid helmet headgear or cradles................... 7 R 408.13323. Rigid helmet headgear substitutes. ................ 7 R 408.13324. Rigid helmet filter plates. ................................ 7 R 408.13325. Nonrigid helmets. ........................................... 7 R 408.13327. Hand shield. ................................................... 7 R 408.13329. Helmet and hand shield lift fronts

and chin rests. ............................................................... 7 R 408.13330. Helmet snoods, neck protectors, and aprons. 7R 408.13332. Effect of head protection standards. ............... 7 R 408.13340. Purposes and uses......................................... 7 R 408.13342. Types and materials. ...................................... 8 R 408.13343. Components. .................................................. 8 R 408.13344. Windows......................................................... 8 R 408.13345. Headgear........................................................ 8 R 408.13346. Crown and chin protectors.............................. 8 R 408.13347. Marking; special operating conditions. ........... 8 R 408.13350. Prescription lenses. ........................................ 8 R 408.13352. Materials......................................................... 9

R 408.13353. Lenses. ...........................................................9 R 408.13355. Eyecup goggles; components. ........................9 R 408.13356. Eyecup goggles; types and models. ...............9 R 408.13357. Eyecup goggles; fit..........................................9 R 408.13359. Eyecup ventilation...........................................9 R 408.13360. Eyecup lenses and retaining rings. .................9 R 408.13362. Flexible and cushioned fitting

goggles; construction. ....................................................9 R 408.13363. Flexible and cushioned fitting goggles;

protection. ......................................................................9 R 408.13364. Flexible and cushioned fitting goggles;

marking. .........................................................................9 R 408.13366. Foundrymen’s goggles; construction. ...........10 R 408.13367 Foundrymen’s goggles; protection. ................10 R 408.13369. Metal, plastic, and combination

metal and plastic spectacles. .......................................10 R 408.13370. Head protection generally. ............................10 R 408.13372. Head protection; adoption of

standards by reference.................................................10 R 408.13375. Protective helmets. .......................................10 R 408.13376. Hoods. ..........................................................11 R 408.13378. Hair enclosures. ............................................11 R 408.13383. Certification. ..................................................11 R 408.13384. Toe protection. ..............................................11 R 408.13385. Foot protection generally. .............................11 R 408.13386. Foot protection; specific requirements. .........11 R 408.13387. Electrical protective equipment; design;

certification; use; storage. ............................................11 R 408.13390. General requirements; safety belts, safety

harnesses, lifelines, and lanyards generally. ................14 R 408.13392. Hand protection generally. ............................15 R 408.13394. Body protection. ............................................15 R 408.13398. Rescission.....................................................15

GENERAL PROVISIONS R 408.13301. Scope.

Rule 3301. This standard shall apply to all places of employment in this state and includes requirements by the employer and use by the employee of personal protective equipment and provides reasonable and adequate means,

ways, and methods for the proper selection and safe use of this equipment. R 408.13302. Definitions; A to E.

Rule 3302. (1) “Absorptive lens” means a filter lens whose physical properties are designed to attenuate the effect of glare, reflective, and stray light.

http://www.michigan.gov/mioshastandards

2(2) “Apparatus” means electrical equipment. (3) “Bare hand technique” means a method of working on

energized conductors by isolating the employee from any ground potential and by placing the employee in continuous firm contact with the energized electric field.

(4) “Bump hat or cap” means a device worn on the head to protect the wearer from bumps or blows but which does not meet the requirements of class A, B, C, and D protective helmets.

(5) “Conductor” means a material, such as a bus bar, wire, or cable, suitable for carrying an electric current.

(6) “Corrective lens” means a lens ground to the wearer’s individual prescription.

(7) “Cover lens” means a removable disc or colorless glass, plastic-coated glass, or plastic that covers a filter lens and protects it from weld spatter, pitting, or scratching when used in a goggle.

(8) “Cover plate” means a removable pane of colorless glass, plastic-coated glass, or plastic that covers a filter plate and protects it from weld spatter, pitting, or scratching when used in a helmet, hood, or goggle.

(9) “Electrical worker” means an operational or maintenance employee working on electrical conductors or equipment, except mining and construction operations.

(10) “Energized,” sometimes known as “live,” means to be electrically charged, or that to which voltage is being applied.

(11) “Eye size” means a measurement expressed in millimeters and denoting the size of the lens-holding section of an eye frame.

R 408.13303. Definitions; F, G.

Rule 3303. (1) “Face shield” means a device worn in front of the eyes and a portion or all of the face, whose predominant function is protection of the eyes and face.

(2) “Filter lens” means removable disc in the eyecup of a goggle that absorbs varying proportions of the ultraviolet, visible, and infrared rays according to the composition and density of the lens.

(3) “Filter plate” means a removable pane in the window of a helmet, hood, or goggle that absorbs varying proportions of the ultraviolet, visible, and infrared rays according to the composition and density of the plate.

(4) “Foot or toe protection” means a device or equipment, such as, but not limited to, safety toe footwear, toe protectors, or foot guards, that protects an employee’s foot or toes against injury.

(5) “Goggle” means a device with contour-shaped eyecups or facial contact with glass or plastic lenses, worn over the eyes and held in place by a headband or other suitable means for the protection of the eyes and eye sockets. R 408.13304. Definitions; H, I.

Rule 3304. (1) “Hair enclosure” means a hat, cap, or hair net specifically designed to protect the wearer from hair entanglement in moving machinery.

(2) “Headband” means that part of a goggle, helmet, or hood suspension consisting of a supporting band that encircles the head.

(3) “Headgear” means that part of a protective helmet, hood, or face shield that supports the device on the wearer’s head, usually consisting of a headband and crown strap.

(4) “Hood” means a device that is worn to provide protection against acids, chemicals, abrasives, and temperature extremes and entirely encloses the whole head including face, neck, and shoulders. Air line hoods and hoods used to protect wearers from inhalation or harmful atmospheres are not included in this part.

(5) “Interpupillary distance” means the distance in millimeters between the centers of the pupils of the eyes.

(6) “Inservice load” means an imposed physical load on a safety belt or harness from a free fall of more than 3 feet.

(7) “Insulated barrier” means a separation from another conducting surface by a dielectric substance or air space.

(8) “Isolated” means that all energized conductors or the exposed energized parts of equipment are isolated from the work area by an insulated barrier. Conductors may be isolated by moving them out of reaching distance by use of hot line tools.

R 408.13305. Definitions; L to R.

Rule 3305. (1) “Lanyard” means a tether attached to a safety belt or harness at one end and to a lifeline or a fixed object at the other.

(2) “Lens” means the transparent glass or plastic device through which a wearer of protective goggles or spectacles sees.

(3) “Lifeline” means a rope line, except where used in tree trimming, attached at one end to a fixed object or attended by a person and to which a safety belt or lanyard is secured.

(4) “Lift front” means a type of mounting frame for a welding helmet, hood, or goggles which is made of 2 connected parts: the front part, which may be removed from the line of vision, contains the high density filter plate with its cover plate, and the back part, which is fixed to the helmet, contains a low density or clear impact resistant plate.

(5) “Plano lens” means a lens which does not incorporate correction.

(6) “Protective helmet” “protective hat or cap”, or “safety hat or cap” means a rigid device, often referred to as a safety cap or hat, that is worn to provide protection for the head or portions thereof against impact, flying particles, or electric shock, or any combination thereof, and which is held in place by a suitable suspension.

(7) “Protector” means a device that provides eye or face protection against the hazards of processes encountered in employment.

(8) “Radiant energy or radiation” means the 3 kinds of radiant energy which are pertinent to this standard:

(a) Ultraviolet. (b) Visible light. (c) Infrared. (9) “Reaching distance” means the employee’s reach as

extended by a conductive material or equipment. R 408.13306. Definitions; S to W.

Rule 3306. (1) “Safety belt” means a belt worn around the waist and capable of restraining a pull or fall of an employee.

(2) “Safety harness” means a belt with a shoulder strap worn around the waist and shoulder and capable of restraining a pull or fall of an employee.

(3) “Safety strap” means a restraining line secured at both ends to a safety belt or harness to hold an employee to a fixed object.

(4) “Safety toe footwear” means footwear containing a safety toe box of steel or equivalent material capable of meeting the requirements of this part.

(5) “Sanitizing” means an act or process of destroying organisms that may cause disease.

(6) “Shield” means a device to be held in the hand, or supported without the aid of the operator, whose predominant function is protection of the eyes and face.

(7) “Side shield” means a device of metal, plastic, or other material fixed to a spectacle lens frame to protect an eye from side exposure.

3(8) “Snood” means a flexible attachment to the back of a

hood or helmet for protection against injury to the back of the head and neck.

(9) “Spectacle” means a device patterned after conventional-type spectacle eyewear, but of more substantial construction, with or without side shields, and with plano or corrective impact resistant lenses of clear or absorptive filter glass or plastic.

(10) “Supplier” means a manufacturer or an authorized dealer representative.

(11) “Temple” means that part of a spectacle or other protector extending to and dropping behind the ear of the wearer and intended to position the device before the eyes.

(12) “Temple length” means the measured length of a temple designated in inches.

(13) “Working gloves” means gloves used as personal protective equipment to protect an employee from injuries on the job.

R 408.13308. Hazard assessment and equipment

selection. Rule 3308. (1) An employer shall assess the workplace

to determine if hazards that necessitate the use of personal protective equipment are present, or are likely to be present. If the hazards are present or are likely to be present then the employer shall do all of the following:

(a) Select, and have each affected employee use, the types of personal protective equipment that will protect the affected employee from the hazards identified in the hazard assessment.

(b) Communicate selection decisions to each affected employee.

(c) Select the personal protective equipment that properly fits each affected employee.

(2) An employer shall verify that the required workplace hazard assessment has been performed through a written certification which identifies the document as a certification of hazard assessment and which specifies all of the following information:

(a) The workplace evaluated. (b) The person who certifies that the evaluation has

been performed. (c) The date of the hazard assessment. (3) Defective or damaged personal protective equipment

shall not be used. R 408.13309. Training.

Rule 3309. (1) An employer shall provide training to each employee who is required by this part to use personal protective equipment. Each employee who is required by this part to use personal protective equipment shall be trained in all of the following areas:

(a) When personal protective equipment is necessary. (b) What personal protective equipment is necessary. (c) How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear the

personal protective equipment. (d) The limitations of the equipment. (e) The useful life of the equipment and the proper

care, maintenance, and disposal of the equipment. (2) Each affected employee shall demonstrate an

understanding of the training specified in subrule (1) of this rule and the ability to use the equipment properly before being allowed to perform work requiring the use of personal protective equipment.

(3) When an employer has reason to believe that any affected employee who has already been trained does not have the understanding and skill required by subrule (2) of this rule, the employer shall retrain the employee. The existence of any of the following circumstances requires retraining:

(a) Changes in the workplace that render previous training obsolete.

(b) Changes in the types of personal protective equipment to be used that render previous training obsolete.

(c) Inadequacies in an affected employee’s knowledge or use of assigned personal protective equipment which indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill.

(4) An employer shall verify that each affected employee has received and understood the required training through a written certification that contains the name of each employee trained and the date of training and that identifies the subject of the certification. R 408.13310. Employer’s and employee’s

responsibilities. Rule 3310. (1) An employer shall provide to an

employee, at no expense to the employee, the initial issue of the type of personal protective equipment which is suitable for the work to be performed as required by this standard or any other general industry safety standard, unless specifically indicated otherwise in this standard or any other general industry safety standard. The employer shall also provide replacement equipment if necessary due to wear and tear on the previous equipment or if the equipment is lost due to the work environment, unless covered by a collective bargaining agreement.

(2) An employee shall use all of the personal protective equipment provided by the employer.

FACE AND EYE PROTECTION R 408.13311. Certification.

Rule 3311. (1) All eye and face protection devices purchased after July 5, 1994, shall be in compliance with occupational and educational eye and face protection of the American national standards institute standard Z87.1-1989 or the devices shall be demonstrated by the employer to be equally effective. The standard is adopted by reference in these rules and may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42 Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Safety Standards Division, Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these rules of $18.00.

(2) If it is impractical for eye and face protection devices to be marked in compliance with ANSI standard Z87.1-1989, then the containers for eye and face protection shall be in compliance with the standard.

(3) Eye and face protection devices purchased before July 5, 1994, shall be in compliance with the ANSI standard entitled “Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection,” Z87.1-1968, or the devices shall be demonstrated by the employer to be equally effective. The standard is adopted by reference in these rules and may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Safety Standards Division, Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these rules of $18.00.

R 408.13312. Face and eye protection generally.

Rule 3312. (1) An employer shall ensure that each affected employee shall use appropriate eye or face protection as prescribed in R 408.13311 if a hazard exists due to any of the following:

(a) Flying objects or particles. (b) Harmful contacts.

4(c) Exposures. (d) Molten metal. (e) Liquid chemicals. (f) Acids or caustic liquids. (g) Chemical gases or vapors. (h) Glare. (i) Injurious radiation. (j) Electrical flash. (k) A combination of the hazards specified in this

subrule. (2) Table 1 shall be used as a guide to select the proper

eye and face protection. Each affected employee shall use eye protection that provides side protection when there is a hazard from flying objects. Detachable side protectors, such as clip-on or slide-on side shields, that are in compliance with the pertinent requirements of this rule are acceptable.

(3) Contact lenses or federal drug administration (FDA) standard hardened or plastic lenses are not eye protection as required by these rules.

(4) A face or eye protector shall be in compliance with all of the following minimum requirements:

(a) It shall protect against the particular hazards for which it is designed.

(b) It shall fit snugly and shall not unduly interfere with movements of the wearer.

(c) It shall be capable of withstanding sanitizing. (5) A protector shall be distinctly marked to identify the

manufacturer. (6) Limitations or precautions indicated by the

manufacturer shall be transmitted to the user and care taken to see that the limitations or precautions are observed.


NOTES: (1) Care shall be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposure to a variety of hazards. Adequate

protection against the highest level of each of the hazards must be provided. (2) Operations involving heat may also involve optical radiation. Protection from both hazards shall be provided. (3) Faceshields shall only be worn over primary eye protection. (4) Filter lenses shall meet the requirements for shade designations in Table 2. (5) Persons whose vision requires the use of prescription (Rx) lenses shall wear either protective devices fitted with prescription

(Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be worn over regular prescription (Rx) eyewear. (6) Wearers of contact lenses shall also be required to wear appropriate covering eye and face protection devices in a

hazardous environment. It should be recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional hazard to contact lens wearers.

(7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protection devices in electrical hazard areas. (8) Refer to Section 6.5, Special Purpose Lenses. (ANSI Z87.1-1989) (9) Welding helmets or handshields shall be used only over primary eye protection. (10) Non-sideshield spectacles are available for frontal protection only.

5

ASSESSMENT SEE NOTE (1)

PROTECTOR TYPE

PROTECTORS LIMITATIONS NOT RECOMMENDED

I M P A C T

Chipping, grinding, machining, masonry, work, riveting, and sanding.

Flying fragments, objects, large chips, particles, sand, dirt, etc.

B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, N

Spectacles, goggles, face shields. SEE NOTES (1) (3) (5) (6) (10) For severe exposure add N

Protective devices do not provide unlimited protection. SEE NOTE (7)

Protectors that do not provide protection from side exposure. SEE NOTE (10) Filter or tinted lenses that restrict light transmittance, unless it is determined that a glare hazard exists. Refer to OPTICAL RADIATION.

Hot sparks

Splash from molten metals

H E A T

Furnace operations, pouring, casting, hot dipping, gas cutting, and welding.

High temperature exposure

B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, N,

*N

N

Face shields, goggles, spectacles *For severe exposure Add N SEE NOTE (2) (3) *Face shields worn over goggles H, K Screen face shields, Reflective face shields. SEE NOTE (2) (3)

Spectacles, cup and cover type goggles not provide unlimited protection. SEE NOTE (2) SEE NOTE (3)

Protectors that do not provide protection from side exposure.

Splash G, H, K,

*N

Goggles, eyecup, and cover types. *For severe exposure Add N.

Ventilation should be adequate but well protected from splash entry.

C H E M I C A L

Acid and chemicals handling, degreasing, plating.

Irritating mists G

Special purpose goggles. SEE NOTE (3)

D U S T

Woodworking, buffing, general dusty conditions.

Nuisance dust G, H, K Goggles, eyecup and cover types

Atmospheric conditions and the restricted ventilation of the protector can cause lenses to fog. Frequent cleaning may be required.

WELDING: Electric Arc

O, P, Q

TYPICAL FILTER LENS PRO- SHADE TECTORS

SEE NOTE (9) 10-14

Welding Helmets

Or Welding

Shields

Protection from optical radiation is directly related to filter lens density. SEE NOTE (4). Select the darkest shade that allows adequate task performance.

Protectors that do not provide protection from optical radiation. SEE NOTE (4)

WELDING: Gas CUTTING TORCH BRAZING

J, K, L, M, N, O,

P, Q

SEE NOTE (9)

4-8 Welding Goggles

Or Welding

Faceshields 3-6 3-4

TORCH SOLDERING B, C, D, E, F, N

1.5-3 Spectacles Or

Welding Faceshield

SEE NOTE (3)

O P T I C A L

R A D I A T I O N

GLARE

A, B

Spectacle

SEE NOTE (9) (10)

Shaded or special Purpose lenses as suitable SEE NOTE (8)

6 (8) Each affected employee shall use equipment that has

filter lenses which have shade numbers appropriate for the work being performed for protection from injurious light

radiation. Table 2 is a listing of appropriate shade numbers for various operations.

(9) Table 2 reads as follows: TABLE 2

FILTER LENSES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY

OPERATIONS ELECTRODE SIZE 1/32 INCH ARC CURRENT MINUMUM* PROTECTIVE

SHADE Shield metal arc welding Less than 3 Less than 60 7 3-5 60-160 8 More than 5-8 161-250 10 More than 8 251-550 11 Gas metal arc welding and flux cored arc welding Less than 60 7 60-160 10 161-250 10 251-500 10 Gas tungsten arc welding Less than 50 8 50-150 8 150-500 10 Air carbon (Light) Less than 500 10 Air cutting (Heavy) 500-1,000 11 Plasma arc welding Less than 20 6 20-100 8 101-400 10 401-800 11 Plasma arc cutting (Light)** Less than 300 8 (Medium)** 300-400 9 (Heavy)** 401-800 10 Torch brazing 3 Torch soldering 2 Carbon arc welding 14

OPERATIONS PLATE THICKNESS (INCHES) (MM) MINIMUM*PROTECTIVE

SHADE Gas welding:

Light Under 1/8 Under 3.2 4 Medium 1/8 to 1/2 3.2 to 12.7 5 Heavy Over 1/2 Over 12.7 6

Oxygen cutting: Light Under 1 Under 25 3 Medium 1 to 6 25 to 150 4 Heavy Over 6 Over 151 5

* As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a lighter shade that gives a sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation. ** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the workpiece. R 408.13313. Maintenance and cleanliness of protectors.

Rule 3313. (1) A face or eye protector shall be kept clean and in good repair.

(2) Cleaning facilities for protectors shall be provided away from the hazard, but readily accessible to the wearer.

(3) A slack, worn out, sweat-soaked, knotted, or twisted headband shall be replaced.

(4) A face or eye protector is a personal item and shall be for the individual and exclusive use of the person to whom it is issued. If circumstances require reissue, the protector shall be thoroughly cleaned, sanitized, and in good condition.

WELDING HELMETS AND HAND SHIELDS R 408.13320. Purposes, types, styles, and marking.

Rule 3320. (1) The devices described in R 408.13320 to R 408.13330 are designed to provide protection for the face, eyes, ears, and neck against intense radiant energy and spatter resulting from arc welding.

(2) A helmet and a hand shield are the only permissible types.

(3) A helmet and a hand shield shall be made with the same basic design and of the same basic materials: an opaque, bowl-shaped or modified bowl-shaped device containing a window with filter plate which allows the wearer to see the radiant object, yet prevents harmful intensities or radiation from reaching his eyes. A helmet shall be supported on the head by an adjustable headgear. A hand shield shall have a handle attached to the bottom by which it is held in the hand. The basic designs may be modified to provide protection against special hazards, but modified equipment shall meet the same requirements as the basic design.

(4) A helmet and a hand shield shall bear a permanent and legible marking by which the manufacturer may be readily identified.

R 408.13321. Rigid helmet bodies.

Rule 3321. A helmet body of a rigid helmet shall be of such size and shape as to protect the face, forehead, ears, and neck to a vertical line back of the ears. It shall have 1 or more openings in the front for filter plates or filter lenses. The helmet body shall be attached to the headgear so that it will

7not come in contact with any part of the head and so that it can be lifted up from in front of the face and hold its position in front of the head. The helmet body shall be made of vulcanized fiber, reinforced plastic, or other suitable material which shall be thermally insulating, noncombustible or slow burning, opaque to visible, ultraviolet, and infrared radiations, and capable of withstanding sanitizing. The inside of the helmet body shall have a low light reflecting finish. Rivets or other metal parts, if terminating on the inside surface, shall be adequately separated from the wearer’s head.

R 408.13322. Rigid helmet headgear or cradles.

Rule 3322. A rigid helmet shall have a headgear or cradle that shall hold the helmet body comfortably and firmly on the wearer’s head, but shall permit the helmet body to be tilted back over the head. The headgear shall be readily adjustable for all head sizes from 6 1/2 to 7 5/8, without the use of tools. The headgear shall be made of materials which are thermally insulating, noncombustible or slow burning, resistant to heat, and capable of withstanding sanitizing. Where required, the headgear shall be fitted with a removable and replaceable sweatband covering at least the forehead portion of the headband. The sweatband shall be made of leather or other suitable material which is slow-burning and nonirritating.

R 408.13323. Rigid helmet headgear substitutes.

Rule 3323. A headgear for a rigid helmet may be replaced by an impact resistant hat or cap that meets the requirements of R 408.13370 to R 408.13378 of this part, or other suitable device to which the helmet body is connected, if the helmet body may be lifted and adjusted to permit unobstructed vision or lowered to furnish complete protection, as required. The alternative device shall meet the requirements for sanitizing and resistance to heat and, in addition, shall meet the applicable requirements of any additional functions, such as protection against falling objects.

R 408.13324. Rigid helmet filter plates.

Rule 3324. (1) A filter plate on a rigid helmet shall fit into the frame and cover the window.

(2) Both surfaces of a filter plate shall be well polished and shall be free from striae, waves, or other defects that would impair the optical quality of the surfaces. Filter plate surfaces shall be flat and substantially parallel.

(3) Table 2 of R 408.13312 shall be used to select the proper shade number of filter lenses or plates during welding operations.

(4) When specified, a filter plate shall be impactresistant, unless impact-resistant eye protection is worn in conjunction with a welding helmet.

(5) A filter plate shall be marked with the shade designation and a permanent and legible marking by which the manufacturer may be readily identified. In addition, a glass filter plate, when treated for impact resistance, shall be marked with the letter “H.”

(6) A cover plate made of plain glass, of glass coated on 1 or on both sides with plastic, or of a slow-burning solid plastic sheet shall be used to protect a filter plate from damage. A cover plate shall be the same peripheral size and shape as the filter plate, and the thickness of a cover plate shall not be less than 0.050 inches. A cover plate shall transmit not less than 75% of the luminous radiation and shall be substantially free from optical imperfections.

R 408.13325. Nonrigid helmets.

Rule 3325. A helmet may be made of nonrigid materials where it is to be used in confined spaces, or may be collapsible for convenience in carrying or storing. The helmet

may be of the same general shape as a rigid helmet, except that a more complete covering of the top of the head is necessary in order to maintain the face, side, and windows in proper position. The requirements for the filter plates, cover plates, and lens mounting frame are the same as for a rigid helmet. A headgear may be used. The material shall be nonconducting and opaque to ultraviolet, visible, and infrared radiations. Stitched seams shall be welded. No stitching shall be exposed.

R 408.13327. Hand shield.

Rule 3327. A hand shield shall be constructed of materials similar to those used for a helmet and in like manner. The materials, lens mounting arrangement, and filter and cover plates shall conform to the requirements for the corresponding parts of the helmet body with headgear. The handle shall be made of a material that is a nonconductor of electricity and is noncombustible or slow burning. It shall be of such size and shape as to be held easily by 1 hand and shall be firmly attached to the lower portion of the shield. A hand shield intended for use by other than a welding operator shall have filter and cover plates suitable for the intended use.

R 408.13329. Helmet and hand shield lift fronts and chin

rests. Rule 3329. (1) The lift front of the helmet shall be

fabricated from metal, plastic, or other suitable material. A snap hinge shall be provided so that the front part will stay up or down but will not remain in a partially opened position. The lift front seal against the helmet shall be light tight. The lift front shall be designed to accommodate 3 plates: a clear impact-resisting plate in the back or fixed part; a filter plate, impact-resisting, when specified; and a cover plate in the front part. The back or fixed part plate shall be clear heat treated glass or plastic not more than 3/16 inch thick or less than 1/8 inch and capable of withstanding the impact test.

(2) To avoid contact of a helmet or hand shield with the face of the wearer, a chin rest or adjustable position stop shall be provided. They shall be constructed of suitable rigid material and shall be detachable from the body of the hand shield.

R 408.13330. Helmet snoods, neck protectors, and

aprons. Rule 3330. (1) A snood or back-of-head-and-neck

protector where required shall be of material that is flame resistant, that is a good insulator of heat and electricity, and that is capable of withstanding sanitizing. They shall be designed for easy attachment to the helmet, helmet headgear, or cradle.

(2) An apron or bib, where required for a helmet, shall be of nonflammable, nonconducting material that is flexible and capable of withstanding sanitizing.

R 408.13332. Effect of head protection standards.

Rule 3332. The characteristics and performance requirements of these rules for welding helmets shall in no way be altered through their attachment to protective hats and caps, as required by R 408.13370 to R 408.13378 of this part.

FACE SHIELDS

R 408.13340. Purposes and uses. Rule 3340. (1) The devices described in R 408.13340 to

R 408.13347 of this part are designed to provide protection to the front part of the head, including forehead, cheeks, nose, mouth, and chin, and to the neck, where required, from flying particles and sprays of hazardous liquids, and to provide filter

8protection where required. Such devices shall be worn over suitable basic eye protection devices.

(2) Typical uses for face shields include, but are not limited to, the following situations:

(a) Woodworking operations where chips and particles fly.

(b) Metal machining causing flying particles. (c) Buffing, polishing, wire brushing, and grinding

operations causing flying particles or objects. (d) Spot welding. (e) Handling of hot or corrosive materials.

R 408.13342. Types and materials. Rule 3342. (1) Face shields are of 3 basic styles:

headgear without crown protector; headgear with crown protector; and headgear with crown protector and chin protector. Each of these styles shall accommodate any of the following styles of windows:

(a) Clear transparent. (b) Colored transparent. (c) Wire screen. (d) Combination of plastic and wire screen. (e) Fiber window with filter plate mounting. (2) Materials used in the manufacture of a face shield

shall be nonirritating to the skin when subjected to perspiration and shall be capable of withstanding frequent sanitizing. Metals, when used, shall be resistant to corrosion. Plastic materials shall be slow burning. Clear or colored plastic materials used in windows shall be of an optical grade. Plastic windows shall not be used in connection with welding operations unless they meet the requirements of table 1 of this part.

R 408.13343. Components.

Rule 3343. A face shield shall consist of a detachable transparent plastic window, wire screen window, or opaque frame with window; a tilting support, an adjustable headgear; and, as required, a crown protector and chin protector.

R 408.13344. Windows.

Rule 3344. (1) A window shall be designed to fit the contour of the window support.

(2) A window supporting or window holding member, which shall be a band or crown protector, shall be attached to the headgear. The window support shall position the window in front of the face to provide clearance for the nose and eyeglasses of the wearer.

(3) The attachment of the window to the window support shall be secure and shall permit easy removal and replacement. The several sizes and types of windows for a face shield shall be interchangeable for attachment to the window support.

(4) A plastic or wire screen window without frame shall be not less than 9 1/2 inches wide at the top and 8 ½ inches wide at the bottom, measured over its curved surfaces when attached and in position on the window support, and not less than 6 inches high. A window, when used in a frame, shall not be less than 4 inches wide and 2 inches high, and the frame shall conform to the dimensions specified for a window without a frame. A plastic window shall be not less than 0.040 inch nominal thickness.

(5) The exposed borders of a wire screen window shall be suitably bound or otherwise finished to eliminate sharp, rough, or unfinished edges. A wire screen window shall not be less than 20-mesh screen.

(6) A window support shall be pivotally attached to the sides of the headgear to permit easy tilting, either upward or downward, of the supporting member and of the window attached thereto. The window shall be capable of being tilted sufficiently upward so that the center of its bottom edge shall

be out of the line of horizontal vision. The tension of the tilting mechanism shall be sufficient to hold the window without slippage in either the up or down position.

R 408.13345. Headgear.

Rule 3345. (1) A headgear shall consist of at least a headband and a crown strap. The headgear shall be made from materials having a low heat conductivity. The design shall hold the window and window support comfortably and firmly in place on the wearer’s head and shall provide for tilting the window away from the face.

(2) A headgear shall be readily adjustable to head sizes from 6 1/2 to 7 5/8 without the use of tools. The crown strap or band shall be attached to and extend between the front and rear centers or from the middle sides of the headband. It shall form an arc over the head to assist in positioning and holding the headgear in place. An adjusting device shall be positive and hold firmly in place after being adjusted. Its mechanisms and movements shall be protected so that the wearer’s hair cannot catch in the device.

(3) For greater protection, headgear may be replaced by an impact resistant hat or cap to which the window support is connected. The attachment may be either rigid or swiveled. If swiveled, the design shall permit lifting and adjusting of the window to permit unobstructed vision or lowering to furnish protection. R 408.13346. Crown and chin protectors.

Rule 3346. (1) A crown protector and chin protector shall be made of material having an impact resistance not less than that of the plastic window. When the crown protector is used in conjunction with the chin protector for protection against sprays of hazardous liquids, the assembly of the crown protector and window support and the assembly of the chin protector and window shall not allow liquids to pass through any opening in the assembly and reach the face, forehead, or chin of the wearer.

(2) A crown protector shall be shaped to cover at least the frontal portion of the head and shall extend around each side at least to a vertical line at the front of the ears. It may be an integral part of the window support or a separate assembly. The design shall provide a comfortable clearance over the forehead and the head of the wearer.

(3) A chin protector shall be shaped to cover at least the chin and upper part of the neck. The design shall provide a comfortable clearance under the chin of the wearer.

R 408.13347. Marking; special operating conditions.

Rule 3347. (1) When a face shield is used in atmospheres or working areas requiring special conditions of nonconductivity or nonsparking, materials used shall meet these requirements. A face shield shall be plainly and permanently labeled, identifying it as a “nonconductive face shield” or “nonsparking face shield.”

(2) A headgear and a plastic window shall bear a permanent and legible marking by which the manufacturer may be readily identified. A window offered for protection against glare shall also bear its shade designation.

EYE PROTECTORS R 408.13350. Prescription lenses.

Rule 3350. An employer shall assure that each affected employee who wears prescription lenses while engaged in operations that involve eye hazards shall wear eye protection which incorporates that prescription in its design or shall wear eye protection which can be worn over the prescription lenses without disturbing the proper position for the prescription lenses or protective lenses.

9R 408.13352. Materials.

Rule 3352. Materials used in the manufacturing of eye protectors shall combine mechanical strength and lightness of weight to a high degree, shall be nonirritating to the skin when subjected to perspiration, and shall withstand frequent sanitizing. Metals, where used, shall be corrosion resistant. Plastic materials, when used, shall be noncombustible or slow burning. Cellulose nitrate, or materials having flammability characteristics approximately those of cellulose nitrate, shall not be used.

R 408.13353. Lenses.

Rule 3353. (1) Lenses intended for use in eye protectors are of 4 basic types, as follows:

(a) Clear lenses which are impact-resisting and provide protection against flying objects.

(b) Absorptive lenses of shades 1.7 through 3.0 which are impact-resisting and provide protection against flying objects and glare or which are impact-resisting and provide protection against flying objects, and narrowband spectral transmittance of injurious radiation.

(c) Protective-corrective lenses which are impact-resisting and either clear or absorptive, as specified for persons requiring visual correction.

(d) Filter lenses which are impact-resisting and provide protection against flying objects and narrow-band spectral transmittance of injurious radiation.

(2) Glass filter lenses intended for use in eyecup goggles shall be heat treated.

(3) The height of the safety lens shall not be less than 30 millimeters.

R 408.13355. Eyecup goggles; components.

Rule 3355. Eyecup goggles shall consist of 2 eyecups with lenses and lens retainers, connected by an adjustable bridge, and a replaceable and adjustable headband or other means for retaining the eyecups comfortably in front of the eyes. Recommended applications for the use of eyecup goggles are shown in table 1 of R 408.13312(7). R 408.13356. Eyecup goggles; types and models.

Rule 3356. (1) Eyecup goggles shall be of 2 types as follows:

(a) Cup-type goggles designed to be worn by individuals who do not wear corrective spectacles.

(b) Cover cup-type goggles designed to fit over corrective spectacles.

(2) The 2 types of eyecup goggles are subdivided into the following classes:

(a) Chipper’s models providing impact protection against flying objects.

(b) Dust and splash models providing protection against fine dust particles or liquid splashes and impact.

(c) Welder’s and cutter’s models providing protection against glare, injurious radiations, and impact.

(3) The basic designs may be modified to provide more protection against special hazards, but the modified equipment shall meet the same requirements as the basic design. R 408.13357. Eyecup goggles; fit.

Rule 3357. (1) The edge of the eyecup of eyecup goggles which bears against the face shall have a smooth surface free from roughness or irregularities which might exert undue pressure or cause discomfort to the wearer. The eyecups shall be of such shape and size as to protect the entire eye sockets.

(2) Cover cup-type goggles shall provide ample clearance and not interfere with the spectacles of the wearer. The edge

of the goggles which bears against the face shall have a smooth surface free from roughness or irregularities which might exert undue pressure or cause discomfort to the wearer.

R 408.13359. Eyecup ventilation.

Rule 3359. (1) Eyecups of chipper’s models shall be ventilated in a manner to permit circulation of air.

(2) Eyecups of dust and splash models shall be ventilated in a manner to permit circulation of air. The ventilation openings shall be baffled or screened to prevent direct passage of dust or liquids into the interior of the eyecups.

(3) Eyecups of welder’s and cutter’s models shall be ventilated in a manner to permit circulation of air and shall be opaque. The ventilation openings shall be baffled to prevent passage of light rays into the interior of the eyecup.

R 408.13360. Eyecup lenses and retaining rings.

Rule 3360. (1) An eyecup shall be provided with a rigidly constructed lens retaining ring of metal or of plastic designed to accommodate lenses and to permit their ready removal and replacement without damage to the eyecup or to the lenses and without the use of tools. The ring shall provide a complete clamping action against the lens. Lens retainers for welder’s and cutter’s models shall accommodate a filter lens, fiber gasket, and cover lens.

(2) A filter lens shall be marked with the shade designation and a permanent and legible marking by which the manufacturer may be readily identified. A glass filter lens, when treated for impact resistance, shall also be marked with the letter “H”.

R 408.13362. Flexible and cushioned fitting goggles;

construction. Rule 3362. Flexible and cushioned fitting goggles shall

consist of a wholly flexible frame, forming a lens holder or with a separable lens holder or a rigid frame with integral lens or lenses, having a separate cushioned fitting surface on the full periphery of the facial contact area. Materials used shall be chemical-resistant, nontoxic, nonirritating, and slow burning. There shall be a positive means of support on the face, such as an adjustable headband of suitable material or other suitable means of support to retain the frame comfortable and snugly in place in front of the eyes. A frame which is a lens holder or has a separable lens holder shall hold the lenses firmly and tightly and be removable or replaceable without the use of tools. The goggles may be ventilated or not, as required by their intended use. Where chemical goggles are ventilated, the openings shall be such as to render the goggles splashproof.

R 408.13363. Flexible and cushioned fitting goggles;

protection. Rule 3363. (1) Chipper’s models of flexible and

cushioned fitting goggles shall provide protection against impact.

(2) Dust and splash models shall provide protection from fine dusts, fumes, liquids, splashes, mists, and spray, alone or with reflected light or glare, wind, and impact.

(3) Gas welder’s and cutter’s models shall provide protection against glare, injurious radiations, and impact. R 408.13364. Flexible and cushioned fitting goggles;

marking. Rule 3364. (1) The frame of flexible and cushioned fitting

goggles shall bear a trademark or name identifying the manufacturer.

(2) Each separate lens shall be distinctly marked in a manner by which the manufacturer may be identified.

10(3) A heat-treated glass filter plate or lens shall also be

marked with the shade designation and the letter “H”. (4) The marking shall be clear cut and permanent and so

placed as not to interfere with the vision of the wearer.

R 408.13366. Foundrymen’s goggles; construction. Rule 3366. (1) A foundryman’s goggles shall consist of a

mask made of a flexible, nonirritating, and noncombustible or slow-burning material, such as a leather or flexible plastic, suitable ends holders attached thereto, lenses, and a positive means of support on the face, such as an adjustable headband, to retain the mask comfortably and snugly in place in front of the eyes. The edge of the mask on contact with the face shall be provided with a binding of corduroy or other suitable material. The lens holders shall hold the lenses firmly and tightly and may be readily removable or replaceable. The lens holders shall be ventilated to permit circulation of air. R 408.13367 Foundrymen’s goggles; protection.

Rule 3367. (1) A foundryman’s goggles shall provide protection against impact and hot-metal splash hazards encountered in foundry operations such as melting, pouring, chipping, babbitting, grinding, and riveting. Where required, they shall also provide protection against dusts.

(2) Applications for use of foundryman’s goggles are shown in Table 1 or R 408.13312(7).

(3) Materials shall resist flame, corrosion, water, and sanitizing.

R 408.13369. Metal, plastic, and combination metal and

plastic spectacles. Rule 3369. (1) Spectacles of metal, plastic, or a

combination thereof, shall consist of 2 lenses in a frame which supports the lenses around their entire periphery of suitable size and shape for the purpose intended connected by a nose bridge, and retained on the face by temples or other suitable means. The spectacles shall be furnished with or without sideshields depending upon their intended use. The frames, temples, and sideshields may be metal or plastic and when made of plastic shall be of the slow-burning type.

(2) Spectacles shall provide protection to the eye from flying objects, and, when required, from glare and injurious radiations. Spectacles without sideshields are intended to provide frontal protection. Where side as well as frontal protection is required, the spectacles shall be provided with sideshields. See Table 1 of R 408.13312(7).

(3) Frames shall be designed for industrial exposure and shall bear a trademark identifying the manufacturer on both fronts and temples. The frame front shall carry a designation of the eye size and bridge size, where applicable. Temples shall be marked as to the overall length or fitting value.

(4) Temples may be of the cable or spatula type, as specified, and shall be of such design as to permit adjustment and fit comfortably and securely on the wearer. The size of the temples shall be clearly marked.

(5) Safety lens in frames which do not comply with this part shall not be worn.

HEAD PROTECTION EQUIPMENT R 408.13370. Head protection generally.

Rule 3370. (1) An employer shall ensure that each affected employee shall be provided with, and shall wear, head protection equipment and accessories when the employee is required to be present in areas where a hazard exists from falling or flying objects or from other harmful contacts or exposures or where there is a risk of injury from electric shock, hair entanglement, chemicals, or temperature extremes.

(2) Service facilities shall be provided for the sanitizing and replacement of needed parts when necessary and before head protection equipment is reissued.

(3) Head protection equipment that has been physically altered or damaged shall not be worn or reissued to an employee.

(4) An employee shall not physically alter, and shall guard against damage to, the head protection equipment provided.

(5) An employee shall use the provided head protection equipment in accordance with the instructions and training received.

R 408.13372. Head protection; adoption of standards by

reference. Rule 3372. (1) Protective helmets purchased after July 5,

1994, shall be in compliance with American national standards institute standard Z89.1-1986, entitled “Requirements for Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers,” or shall be demonstrated to be equally effective. The standard is adopted by reference in these rules and may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Safety Standards Division, Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these rules of $12.00.

(2) Protective helmets purchased before July 5, 1994, shall be in compliance with American national standards institute standard Z89.1-1969, entitled “Requirements for Industrial Head Protection,” or shall be demonstrated by the employer to be equally effective. The standard is adopted by reference in these rules and may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Safety Standards Division, Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these rules of $12.00.

R 408.13375. Protective helmets.

Rule 3375. (1) Protective helmets or safety hats and caps shall be of the following types:

(a) Class - A - Limited voltage protection. (b) Class - B - High voltage protection. (c) Class - C - No voltage protection. (d) Class - D - Limited voltage protection – fire fighters

service helmets with full brim. (2) A class C helmet or any metallic head device shall not

be furnished by an employer or used by an employee for head protection, except where it has been determined that the use of other types of protective helmets or safety hats or caps is impractical, such as where chemical reaction will cause the deterioration of other types of head protection.

(3) A protective helmet furnished by an employer shall be identified on the inside of the shell with the name of the manufacturer.

(4) When used in conjunction with protective helmets, face shields, welding helmets, and goggles shall be in compliance with the requirements set forth in R 408.13311 to R 408.13369 and Michigan department of consumer and industry services, division of occupational health standards for hearing protection being R 325.60101.

(5) Winter liners and chin straps used in conjunction with class B helmets for high-voltage protection shall not contain any metallic parts or other conductive materials. Winter liners and chin straps used in areas where there is a danger of ignition from heat, flame, or chemical reaction shall be made of materials that are nonburning or flame retardant.

(6) Bump hats or caps or other limited-protection devices shall not be used as a substitute for protective helmets for the hazards described in R 408.13370.

11(7) Protective helmets designed to reduce electrical

shock hazard shall be worn by an employee who is near exposed electrical conductors that could come in contact with the employee’s head.

R 408.13376. Hoods.

Rule 3376. (1) A hood shall be made of materials that combine mechanical strength and lightness of weight to a high degree, shall be nonirritating to the skin when subjected to perspiration and shall be capable of withstanding frequent cleaning and disinfection. Materials used in the manufacture of hoods shall also be suitable to withstand the hazards to which the user may be exposed.

(2) A hood shall bear a permanent and legible marking by which the manufacturer may be readily identified.

(3) A hood shall be designed to provide adequate ventilation for the wearer. Where air lines are used they shall be installed and used in accordance with Michigan department of consumer and industry services, division of occupational health standards.

(4) A protective helmet shall be used in conjunction with a hood where there is a head injury hazard and the hood shall be designed to accommodate such helmet. R 408.13378. Hair enclosures.

Rule 3378. A hat, cap, or net shall be used by a person where there is a danger of hair entanglement in moving machinery or equipment, or where there is exposure to means of ignition. It shall be designed to be reasonably comfortable to the wearer, completely enclose all loose hair, and be adjustable to accommodate all head sizes. Material used for a hair enclosure shall be fast dyed, nonirritating to the skin when subjected to perspiration, and capable of withstanding frequent cleaning. It shall not be reissued from one employee to another unless it has been thoroughly sanitized.

FOOT PROTECTION R 408.13383. Certification.

Rule 3383. (1) All protective footwear purchased after July 5, 1994, shall bear a permanent mark to show the manufacturer’s name or trademark and certification of compliance with the provisions of ANSI standard Z41-1991, entitled “Personal Protective Footwear,” which is adopted by reference in these rules and which may be inspected at the Lansing office of the Michigan department of consumer and industry services. The standard may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, Safety Standards Division, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these rules of $7.00.

(2) Protective footwear purchased before July 5, 1994, shall bear a permanent mark to show the manufacturer’s name or trademark and certification of compliance with American national standards institute standard Z41.1-1967, entitled “Men’s Safety-Toe Footwear,” which is adopted by reference in these rules and which may be inspected at the Lansing office of the Michigan department of consumer and industry services. The standard may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, Safety Standards Division, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these rules of $32.00. R 408.13384. Toe protection.

Rule 3384. Where toe protection other than safety toe footwear is worn, the toe protection shall have an impact

value of not less than that required for the safety toe footwear. R 408.13385. Foot protection generally.

Rule 3385. (1) An employer shall ensure that each affected employee shall wear protective footwear when working in areas where an emloyee’s feet are exposed to electrical hazards or where there is a danger of foot injuries due to falling or rolling objects or a danger of objects piercing the sole of the shoe. The payment for protective footwear shall be determined between the employer and the employee or shall be as determined by a collective bargaining agreement.

(2) Safety shoes and boots which are not worn over shoes and which are worn by more than 1 employee shall be maintained, cleaned, and sanitized inside and out before being issued to another employee.

R 408.13386. Foot protection; specific requirements.

Rule 3386. Where a hazard is created from a process, environment, chemical, or mechanical irritant which would cause an injury or impairment to the feet by absorption or physical contact, other than from impact, footwear, such as boots, overshoes, rubbers, wooden-soled shoes, or their equivalent, shall be used.

ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT R 408.13387. Electrical protective equipment; design;

certification; use; storage. Rule 3387. (1) Insulating blankets, matting, covers, line

hose, gloves, and sleeves made of rubber shall be in compliance with all of the following requirements as applicable:

(a) Blankets, gloves, and sleeves shall be produced by a seamless process.

(b) Each item shall be clearly marked as follows: (i) Class 0 equipment shall be marked class 0. (ii) Class 1 equipment shall be marked class 1. (iii) Class 2 equipment shall be marked class 2. (iv) Class 3 equipment shall be marked class 3. (v) Class 4 equipment shall be marked class 4. (vi) Non-ozone-resistant equipment other than

matting shall be marked type 1. (vii) Ozone-resistant equipment other than matting

shall be marked type II. (viii) Other relevant markings, such as the

manufacturer’s identification and the size of the equipment, may also be provided.

(c) Markings shall be nonconducting and shall be applied in a manner that does not impair the insulating qualities of the equipment.

(d) Markings on gloves shall be confined to the cuff portion of the glove.

(2) Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the alternating current proof test voltage specified in table 4 or the direct current proof test voltage specified in table 5. The proof test shall reliably indicate that the equipment can withstand the voltage involved. The test voltage shall be applied continuously for 3 minutes for equipment other than matting and shall be applied continuously for 1 minute for matting.

(3) Gloves shall also be capable of withstanding the alternating current proof test voltage specified in table 4 after a 16-hour water soak. When the alternating current proof test is used on gloves, the 60-hertz proof test current may not be more than the values specified in table 4 at any time during the test period. If the alternating current test is made at a frequency other than 60 hertz, the permissible proof test current shall be computed from the direct ratio of the

12frequencies. For the test, gloves (right side out) shall be filled with tap water and immersed in water to a depth that is in accordance with table 6. Water shall be added to or removed from the glove, as necessary, so that the water level is the same inside and outside the glove. After the 16-hour water soak specified in this rule, the 60-hertz proof test current may exceed the values specified in table 4 by not more than 2 milliamperes.

(4) Equipment that has been subjected to a minimum breakdown voltage test may not be used for electrical protection. See subrule (3) of this rule.

(5) Material used for type II insulating equipment shall be capable of withstanding an ozone test without visible effects. The ozone test shall reliably indicate that the material will resist ozone exposure in actual use. Any visible signs of ozone deterioration of the material, such as checking, cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evidence of failure to meet the requirements for ozone-resistant material. See subrule (3) of this rule.

(6) Equipment shall be free of harmful physical irregularities that can be detected by the tests or inspections required under this rule. Surface irregularities that may be present on all rubber goods because of imperfections on

forms or molds or because of inherent difficulties in the manufacturing process and that may appear as indentations, protuberances, or imbedded foreign material are acceptable if both of the following conditions are satisfied:

(a) The indentation or protuberance blends into a smooth slope when the material is stretched.

(b) Foreign material remains in place when the insulating material is folded and stretches with the insulating material surrounding it.

(7) The standards listed in table 3 are adopted by reference in these rules and may be inspected at the Lansing office of the department of consumer and industry services. The ANSI standards may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10018, and the ASTM standards may be purchased from the American Society of Test and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428, or any of the standards may be purchased from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, Safety Standards Division, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these rules as listed in Table 3.

TABLE 3

ITEM ANSI-ASTM COST ITEM ANSI-ASTM COST Rubber insulating gloves D 120-87el $16.50

Rubber matting for use around electrical apparatus D 178-88 $16.50

Rubber insulating blankets D 1048-88Ael $16.50

Rubber insulating covers D 1049-88 $16.50

Rubber insulating line hose D 1050-90 $16.50

Rubber insulating sleeves D 1051-87 $16.50

In-service care – line hose and covers F 478-92 $15.00

In-service care insulating blankets F 479-88a $15.00

In-service care of insulating gloves and sleeves F 496-91 $12.00

These standards contain specifications for conducting the various tests required in subrules (1) to (6) of this rule.

(8) Electrical protective equipment shall be maintained in

a safe, reliable condition. (9) All of the following specific requirements apply to

insulating blankets, covers, line hose, gloves, and sleeves made of rubber as applicable:

(a) Maximum use voltages shall conform to the voltages listed in table 7.

(b) Insulating equipment shall be inspected for damage before each days use and immediately following any incident that can reasonably be suspected of having caused damage. Insulating gloves shall be given an air test in addition to being inspected.

(c) Insulating equipment that has any of the following defects shall not be used: (i) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut. (ii) Ozone cutting or ozone checking, the cutting

action produced by ozone on rubber under mechanical stress into a series of interlacing cracks.

(iii) An embedded foreign object. (iv) Any of the following texture changes:

(a) Swelling. (b) Softening. (c) Hardening. (d) Becoming sticky or inelastic.

(v) Any other defect that damages the insulating properties.

(d) Insulating equipment found to have other defects that might affect its insulating properties shall be removed from service and returned for testing under subdivisions (h) and (j) of this subrule.

(e) Insulating equipment shall be cleaned as needed to remove foreign substances.

(f) Insulating equipment shall be stored in a location and in a manner to protect it from all of the following: (i) Light. (ii) Temperature extremes. (iii) Excessive humidity. (iv) Ozone. (v) Other injurious substances and conditions.

(g) Protector gloves shall be worn over insulating gloves, except that protector gloves need not be used with class 0 gloves under limited-use conditions or where small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity. Any other class of glove may be used for similar work without protector gloves if the employer can demonstrate that the possibility of physical damage to the gloves is small and if the class of glove is 1 class higher than that required for the voltage involved. Insulating gloves that have been used without protector gloves shall not be used at a higher voltage until they have been tested under the provisions of subdivisions (h) and (i) of this subrule.

13Extra care shall be taken when visually examining gloves and to avoid handling sharp objects.

(h) Electrical protective equipment shall be subjected to periodic electrical tests. Test voltages and the maximum intervals between tests shall be in accordance with table 7 and table 8.

(i) The test method used in this rule shall reliably indicate whether the insulating equipment can withstand the voltages involved. The standard electrical test methods considered as meeting this requirement are listed in table 3.

(j) Only insulating equipment that passes inspection or electrical tests may be used by employees, except that rubber insulating line hose may be used in shorter lengths if the defective portion is cut off. Rubber insulating blankets may be repaired using a compatible patch that results in physical and electrical properties equal to those of the blanket. Rubber insulating blankets may be salvaged by severing the defective area from the undamaged portion of the blanket. The resulting undamaged area may not be less than 22 inches by 22 inches (560mm by 560mm) for class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blankets. Rubber insulating gloves and sleeves that have minor physical defects, such as small cuts, tears, or punctures, may be repaired by applying a compatible patch. Also, rubber insulating gloves and sleeves that have minor surface blemishes may be repaired with a compatible liquid compound. The patched area shall have electrical and physical properties equal to those of the surrounding material. Repairs to gloves are permitted only in the area between the wrist and the reinforced edge of the opening.

(k) Repaired insulating equipment shall be retested before it may be used by employees.

(l) An employer shall certify that equipment has been tested in accordance with the requirements of R 408.13387(9)(h), (l), and (k) of this subrule. The certification shall identify the equipment that passed the test and the date it was tested. The marking of equipment and entering the results of the tests and the dates of testing onto logs are acceptable means of equipment identification.

(10) Material other than rubber that offers protection equivalent to or greater than rubber may be used if the material is certified to meet the appropriate ANSI-ASTM standard tests.

(11) An insulated blanket, glove, or sleeve shall be capable of withstanding the voltage to which it may be subjected.

(12) Exposed conductors or equipment, or both, except for conductors or equipment being directly worked on, which is energized from 750 volts to 28,000 volts phase to ground and which an employee may reach into or touch shall be isolated or covered with at least 1 of the following:

(a) An insulating blanket. (b) An insulating hood. (c) An insulating line hose. (d) An insulating barrier. (13) An employee shall use insulating gloves and sleeves

capable of withstanding the imposed voltage when performing any of the following activities:

(a) Working directly on, or within reaching distance of, a conductor or equipment at a nominal 750 volts or more phase to ground, except when using barehanded techniques or a hot stick. Sleeves are not required for an employee who performs routine switching operations in a substation or powerhouse. An employee who uses gloves and sleeves and works directly on or within reaching distance of a conductor or equipment energized at more than 5,000 volts phase to ground shall do so from an insulated platform or board or an aerial device that has an insulated basket.

(b) Connecting or disconnecting primary neutrals, pole ground wires, or other conductors normally connected to static wires or energized equipment, except that gloves and sleeves need not be worn while connecting and disconnecting a service neutral or secondary neutral.

(c) Working on a de-energized conductor that extends into an area in which contact may be made with an energized conductor or exposed parts of energized equipment, unless the conductor is grounded or isolated. Insulating sleeves are optional at voltages of less than 750 volts phase to ground.

(14) An employee shall use insulating gloves capable of withstanding the imposed voltage when performing either of the following activities:

(a) When working with a powered or manual hole digger while using booms or using winch lines to install or remove poles or equipment where the hole digger may contact conductors or equipment energized at a voltage of 300 volts or more phase to ground. An employee need not use the gloves while in the enclosed cab of the equipment.

(b) When working directly on a conductor or equipment energized at a voltage of more than 240 volts phase to ground. This does not include the use of test equipment.

TABLE 4 ALTERNATING CURRENT PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS

MAXIMUM PROFF-TEST CURRENT, Ma (Globes Only)

CLASS OF EQUIPMENT

PROOF-TEST VOLTAGE RMS

V

267MM (10.5 in.)

glove

356MM (14 in.) glove



0 5,000 8 12 14 16 1 10,000 14 16 18 2 20,000 16 18 20 3 30,000 18 20 22 4 40,000 22 24

14TABLE 5

DIRECT CURRENT PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS CLASS OF EQUIPMENT PROFF-TEST VOLTAGE

0 20,000 1 40,000 2 50,000 3 60,000 4 70,000

NOTE: The direct current voltages listed in this table are not appropriate for proof-testing rubber insulating line hose or covers. For this equipment, direct current proof tests shall use a voltage high enough to indicate that the equipment can be safely used to the voltages listed in table 6. See ASTM D1050-90 and ASTM D1049-88 for further information on proof tests for rubber insulating line hose and covers.

TABLE 6 GLOVE TESTS – WATER LEVEL 1, 2

CLASS OF GLOVE ALTERNATING CURRETN PROOF TEST DIRECT CURRENT PROOF TEST

mm. Inches mm. Inches 0 38 1.5 38 1.5 1 38 1.5 51 2.0 2 64 2.5 76 3.0 3 89 3.5 102 4.0 4 127 5.0 153 6.0

1. The water level is given as the clearance from the cuff of the glove to the waterline, with a tolerance of ± 13mm. (± 0.5 inches). 2. If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances impractical, the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25mm. (1 inch).

TABLE 7

RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS

CLASS OF EQUIPMENT MAXIMUM USE VOLTAGE RETEST VOLTAGE ALTERNATING CURRENT ROOT MEAN SQUARE

RETEST VOLTAGE DIRECT CURRENT AVERAGE

0 1,000 5,000 20,000 1 7,500 10,000 40,000 2 17,000 20,000 50,000 3 26,500 30,000 60,000 4 36,000 40,000 70,000

1 The maximum use voltage is the alternating current voltage (root mean square) classification of the protective equipment that designates the maximum nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be safely worked. The nominal voltage is equal to the phase-to-phase voltage on multiphase circuits. However, the phase-to-ground potential is considered to be the nominal design voltage in either of the following situations:

(a) If there is no multiphase exposure in a system area and if the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potention. (b) If the electrical equipment and devices are insulated or isolated, or both, so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded wye circuit is

removed. 2 The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for not less than 1 minute, but not more than 3 minutes.

TABLE 8

RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT TEST INTERVALS TYPE OF EQUIPMENT WHEN TO TEST

RUBBER INSULATING LINE HOSE UPON INDICATION THAT INSULATING VALUE IS SUSPECT. RUBBER INSULATING COVERS UPON INDICATION THAT INSULATING VALUE IS SUSPECT. RUBBER INSULATING BLANKETS BEFORE FIRST ISSUE AND EVERY 12 MONTHS THEREAFTER. RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES BEFORE FIRST ISSUE AND EVERY 6 MONTHS THEREAFTER. RUBBER INSULATING SLEEVES BEFORE FIRST ISSUE AND EVERY 12 MONTHS THEREAFTER. If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested, but not issued for service, the equipment may not be placed into service unless it has been electrically tested within the previous 12 months.

SAFETY BELTS, HARNESSES, LIFELINES, AND LANYARDS

R 408.13390. General requirements; safety belts, safety harnesses, lifelines, and lanyards generally.

Rule 3390. (1) Unless a safety net is used as prescribed in construction safety standard, Part 45. Fall Protection,

being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code, or an employee is protected by a perimeter guardrail or is working on a portable ladder, the employee shall be safeguarded by a safety belt or safety harness secured to a lifeline or structure capable of sustaining the imposed load, if the employee’s work station is more than 25 feet above the ground, floor, water, or other surface. The safety belt and harness and any lifeline or lanyard shall be used only for

15safeguarding the employee. A safety belt, safety harness, lifeline, or lanyard subjected to in-service loading, rather than static loading, shall be removed from service and shall not be used again for employee safeguarding.

(2) Safety belt, safety harness, and lanyard hardware shall be made of cadmium-plated, drop forged or pressed steel or metal of equivalent strength with edges free of sharp edges. The safety belt and lanyard hardware shall withstand a tensile load of 4,000 pounds without cracking, breaking, or permanent deformation. A lineman’s body belt “D” ring and snaps shall withstand 5,000 pounds tensile test and the buckle 2,000 pounds tensile test.

(3) A lifeline shall be secured above the employee’s workplace to an anchorage or structural member capable of supporting a dead weight of not less than 5,400 pounds.

(4) A lifeline shall not be less than 3/4-inch manila rope or a material of equivalent strength, having a breaking strength of not less than 5,400 foot pounds except where the lifeline is used on rock-scaling operation or in areas where the lifeline may be subject to cutting or abrasion, the line shall be not less than 7/8-inch manila rope with a wire core.

(5) A lanyard or safety strap shall be not less than 1/2- inch nylon rope or its equivalent with a maximum length to provide a free fall of not more than 6 feet. The breaking strength of the lanyard shall be not less than 5,400 pounds.

(6) A safety belt, safety strap, safety harness, lanyard, or lifeline, including the hardware, shall be inspected before using each day.

(7) A safety belt, safety harness, lifeline, or lanyard shall be stored in a clean dry area away from excessive heat or other deteriorating conditions.

(8) A lifeline or lanyard made of synthetic fibers shall not be kinked, run over sharp corners, used when frozen, left in freezing temperatures when wet, or exposed to sources of ignition or flame.

HAND PROTECTION R 408.13392. Hand protection generally.

Rule 3392. (1) An employer shall select and require employees to use appropriate hand protection when employee’s hands are exposed to hazards that may cause any of the following:

(a) Skin absorption of harmful substances. (b) Severe cuts or lacerations. (c) Severe abrasions. (d) Punctures. (e) Chemical burns. (f) Thermal burns.

(g) Harmful temperature extremes. (2) An employer shall base the selection of the

appropriate hand protection on an evaluation of the performance characteristics of the hand protection relative to all of the following:

(a) The task to be performed. (b) Conditions present. (c) Duration of use. (d) The hazards and potential hazards identified. (3) Hand protection interiors shall be kept free of

corrosive or irritating contaminants. If more than 1 employee wears a pair of gloves, the gloves shall be sanitized before reissuance. R 408.13394. Body protection.

Rule 3394. (1) An employer shall assure that an employee who is required to work so that his or her clothing becomes wet due to a condition other than the weather or perspiration shall use such aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or other garments that will keep his or her clothing dry. The material shall be unaffected by the wetting agent. The provision of dry, clean, acid-resistant clothing, in addition to rubber shoes or short boots and an apron, shall be considered a satisfactory substitute where small parts are cleaned, plated, or acid-dipped in an open tank.

(2) When abrasive blasting is not protected by an enclosure, the operator shall use heavy canvas or leather gloves and aprons or equivalent protection to provide protection from the impact of abrasives. R 408.13398. Rescission.

Rule 3398. The following general industry safety standards promulgated by the general industry safety standards commission pursuant to Act No. 154 of the Public Acts of 1974, as amended, being §408.1001 et seq. of the Michigan Compiled Laws, are rescinded:

(a) R 408.13101 to R 408.13135 of the Michigan Administrative Code, appearing on pages 3,717 to 3,721 of the 1979 Michigan Administrative Code and pages 136 and 137 of Quarterly Supplement No. 6 to the 1979 Code.

(b) R 408.13201 to R 408.13241 of the Michigan Administrative Code, appearing on pages 3,724 to 3,738 of the 1979 Michigan Administrative Code.

(c) R 408.13501 to R 408.13569 of the Michigan Administrative Code, appearing on pages 3,724 to 3,738 of the 1979 Michigan Administrative Code.


Lansing, Michigan 48909-8143 Ph: 517.322.1814 Fx: 517.322.1775




WELDING AND CUTTING

3



CONSTRUCTION SAFETY STANDARDS

Filed with the Secretary of State on August 31, 1976 (as amended November 21, 1980) (as amended November 23, 1982) (as amended September 3, 1996) (as amended January 12, 2005)


(By authority conferred on the director of the department of labor and economic growth by sections 19 and 21

of 1974 PA 154,and Executive Reorganization Order Nos. 1996-2 and 2003-18, MCL 408.1019, 408.1021, 445.2001, and 445.2011)

R 408.40705, R 408.40707, R 408.40709, R 408.40711, R 408.40712, R 408.40713, R 408.40714, R 408.40721,

R 408.40722, R 408.40723, R 408.40729, R 408.40731, R 408.40744, R 408.40746, R 408.40751, R 408.40761, and R 408.40762 of the Michigan Administrative Code are amended as follows:

Visit our web site at: www.michigan.gov/mioshastandards

PART 7. WELDING AND CUTTING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

R 408.40701 Scope. ............................................................ 1 R 408.40705 Definitions; A to C........................................... 1 R 408.40706 Definitions; D to N. ......................................... 1 R 408.40707 Definitions; P to W.......................................... 2 R 408.40709 Adoption of standards by reference. ............... 2R 408.40711 Employer and employee responsibilities. ....... 2R 408.40712 Requirements generally.................................. 2 R 408.40713 Working in confined spaces............................ 3 R 408.40714 Warning tags and labels. ................................ 3 R 408.40715 Torches generally. .......................................... 3 R 408.40721 Cylinders manufacturing, labeling, periodic

testing, and marking....................................... 3 R 408.40722 Storage........................................................... 3 R 408.40723 Cylinders generally. ........................................ 4 R 408.40729 Manifolding. .................................................... 4

R 408.40731 Hoses and connections...................................4 R 408.40732 Regulators and protective devices. .................5R 408.40741 Arc welding machines. ....................................5 R 408.40742 Open circuit and no-load voltages of arc

welding machines. ..........................................5 R 408.40743 Design requirements for arc welding machines.

.......................................................................5R 408.40744 Installation.......................................................5 R 408.40745 Welding cables and electrode holders. ...........6R 408.40746 Operation. .......................................................6 R 408.40747 Maintenance of arc welding machines. ...........6R 408.40751 Personal protective equipment........................6 R 408.40761 Fire precautions. .............................................6 R 408.40762 Welding drums, barrels, tanks, or other

containers. ......................................................7

GENERAL PROVISIONS R 408.40701 Scope.

Rule 701. With respect to construction operations, the intent of this part is to provide reasonable safety to employees involved in welding operations and to persons exposed to welding operations, welding equipment, and the compressed gases used. R 408.40705 Definitions; A to C.

Rule 705. (1) “AC” means alternating current. (2) “Arc welding” means a process for joining metals by

melting with an electric arc with or without the use of pressure and with or without a filler material.

(3) “Brazing” means a process of joining metals, without melting them, with a filler metal melting above 800 degrees Fahrenheit (427 degrees Celsius).

(4) “Confined space” means a space that, because of its physical construction, could be subject to the accumulation of loose materials or explosive, toxic, or

flammable contaminants or could have an oxygen-deficient atmosphere. All of the following are examples of confined spaces:

(a) Storage tanks. (b) Process vessels. (c) Bins. (d) Boilers. (e) Ventilation ducts. (f) Sewers. (g) Underground utility vaults. (h) Tunnels after construction is completed. (i) Pipelines. (5) “Cutting” means a process in which the severing or

removing of metal is affected by the use of an arc or flame. (6) “Cylinders” means containers for storing

compressed gases. R 408.40706 Definitions; D to N.

Rule 706. (1) “DC” means direct current. (2) “Fire resistance” means the property of a material or

assembly to withstand fire or give protection from it.


2

(3) “Fuel gas” means a gas, such as acetylene and propane, that is used to generate heat to perform a welding operation.

(4) “Gas welding” means a process for joining metals by heating with a gas flame with or without the use of pressure and with or without the use of a filler material.

(5) “Inert gas” means argon, carbon dioxide, helium, or nitrogen gas.

(6) “Manifold” means an assembly of pipe and fittings to interconnect either single or multiple sources of fuel gas or oxygen to single or multiple outlets.

(7) “Noncombustible” means having properties that do not support combustion. R 408.40707 Definitions; P to W.

Rule 707. (1) “Psig” means pounds per square inch as measured by a gauge.

(2) “Soldering” means a process of joining metals, without melting them, using a filler metal melting at 800 degrees Fahrenheit (427 degrees Celsius) or below.

(3) “Storage” means the storage of a filled or empty cylinder not in use.

(4) “Welding” means the process of joining metals by melting them.

(5) “Welding operations” means the cutting, welding, brazing, or soldering of materials.

(6) “Welder” means a person performing welding operations. R 408.40709 Adoption of standards by reference.

Rule 709. (1) The standards specified in this rule, except for the standards specified in subrule (2) of this rule, are adopted by reference.

(a) The following standards are available from Global Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, Colorado, 80112, USA, telephone number: 1-800-854-7179 or via the internet at web-site: http://global.ihs.com; at a cost as of the time of adoption of these rules, as stated in this subrule: (i) American National Standard Institute Standard

ANSI/AWS Z49.1, Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes, 1973 edition. Cost: $80.00.

(ii) American National Standard Institute Standard ANSI/ASA B57.1, Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, 1965 edition. Cost $25.00

(b) The following standards are available from the National Fire Protection Association, Charles S Morgan Technical Library, 1 Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, Massachusetts, 02269-9101, USA; telephone number: 617-984-7445; or via the internet at web-site: www.nfpa.org/library or e-mail at [email protected]; at a cost as of the time of adoption of these rules, as stated in this subrule. (i) National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70

National Electrical Code, Article 630 Electric Welders, 1978 edition. Cost: $7.50.

(ii) National Fire Protection Association NFPA 50 Standards for Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites, 1974 edition. Cost: $7.50.

(iii) National Fire Protection Association NFPA 58 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code, 1974 edition. Cost: $39.50.

(c) Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Transportation, Part 186-199 stock number 869-048-00199-9 is available from the U.S. Government Bookstore, Washington DC, 20402; telephone number: 888-293-6498; or via the internet at web-

site: http://bookstore.gpo.gov; at a cost, as of the time of adoption of these rules, of $5.00.

These standards are also available for inspection at, and purchase from, the Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Growth, MIOSHA Standards Section, 7150 Harris Drive, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909-8143.

(2) The following Michigan occupational safety and health standards are referenced in these rules. Up to 5 copies of these standards may be obtained at no charge from the Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Growth, MIOSHA Standards Section, 7150 Harris Drive, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan, 48909-8143 or via the internet at web-site: www.michigan.gov/mioshastandards. For quantities greater than 5, the cost, as of the time of adoption of these rules, is 4 cents per page

(a) Construction Safety Standard Part 1 General Rules, R 408.40101 et seq.

(b) Construction Safety Standard Part 6 Personal Protective Equipment, R 408.40601 et seq.

(c) Construction Safety Standard Part 45 Fall Protection, R 408.44501 et seq.

(d) General Industry Safety Standard Part 12 Welding and Cutting, R 408.11231 to R 408.11252.

R 408.40711 Employer and employee responsibilities.

Rule 711. (1) An employer shall do all of the following: (a) Assure that each employee has received safety

training in the use of equipment for welding operations and instruction in the rules of this part before allowing the employee to use the equipment.

(b) Provide protection to an employee against toxic or hazardous materials or deficient oxygen, as prescribed by the department of labor and economic growth.

(c) Assure that employees wear personal protective equipment as required in R 408.40751.

(d) Assure that an employee in charge of the operation of oxygen or fuel gas supply equipment or of oxygen or fuel gas systems is instructed and judged competent for this work by the employer before being left in charge. Rules and instructions covering the operation and maintenance of oxygen or fuel gas distribution piping systems shall be readily available.

(2) An employee shall do all of the following: (a) Use welding and cutting equipment as trained and

authorized. (b) Use the protective equipment required by the

hazard and this part. (c) Not tamper with safety devices. (d) Report to the supervisor any faulty or defective

equipment. (3) Welding operations shall not be permitted in the

following situations: (a) In an area not authorized by the building or structure

occupant. (b) In a sprinklered building while the sprinkler system

is impaired, unless a fire watch is provided. (c) In the presence of a potentially explosive

atmosphere, such as mixtures of flammable gases, vapors, liquids, or dusts with air.

R 408.40712 Requirements generally.

Rule 712. (1) A mixture of fuel gas with air or oxygen shall not be permitted except when consumed by a burner or torch.

(2) Only apparatus designed for use with fuel gas or oxygen, such as a torch, regulator, pressure-reducing valve,

http://global.his.com/

http://www.nfpa.org/library

mailto:[email protected]

http://bookstore.gpo.gov/

http://www.michigan.gov/MIOSHASTANDARDS

3

acetylene generator, and manifold, shall be used for welding or cutting.

(3) The total volume of acetylene used per hour shall not exceed 1/7 of the total volume of the acetylene supply in the system.

(4) Fuel gas, oxygen, or compressed air shall not flow from a cylinder or manifold through a torch or other device equipped with a shutoff valve unless the pressure is reduced by a regulator attached to the cylinder or manifold.

(5) An oxygen cylinder, fuel gas cylinder, cylinder valve, coupling regulator, hose, and apparatus shall be kept in good operating condition and shall be kept free from defects.

(6) An oxygen cylinder, fuel gas cylinder, cylinder valve, coupling regulator, hose, and apparatus shall be kept free from oily or greasy substances and shall not be handled with oily hands or gloves. A jet of oxygen shall not be permitted to strike oily surfaces or greasy clothes and shall not be permitted to enter a fuel, oil, or other storage tank.

(7) Oxygen shall only be used for welding or cutting. (8) Welders shall place welding cable, hose, and other

equipment so that it is clear of passageways, ladders, and stairways, or shall assure that it is protected against damage and does not create a hazard to an employee.

(9) After welding operations are completed, a sign or other means shall be used to provide a warning of the hot metal. R 408.40713 Working in confined spaces.

Rule 713. (1) Before the start of a welding operation in a confined space, the atmosphere shall be tested and recorded. Ventilation shall be provided and maintained in accordance with the requirements of the department of labor and economic growth.

(a) The records shall be maintained at the jobsite as prescribed in Construction Safety Standard Part 1 General Rules, R 408.40101 et seq.

(2) When working in a confined space, the torch valves and the gas supply valve and oxygen valve outside the confined space shall be shut off during the lunch period, overnight, or during any other prolonged period and the torch and hose shall be removed from the confined space. Open-end fuel gas and oxygen hoses shall be immediately removed from enclosed spaces when they are disconnected from the torch or other gas-consuming device.

(3) When electrodes are used in a confined space and welding is suspended during the lunch period, overnight, or during any other prolonged period, the electrode shall be removed from the holder and the machine shall be shut off. The holders shall be placed or protected so that they cannot make electrical contact with employees or conducting objects.

(4) A gas cylinder or a welding machine used for welding operations in a confined space shall be placed on the outside of the space where work is being performed.

(5) If an employee must enter a confined space through a small opening to perform welding operations, another employee trained in rescue procedures and equipped with the means necessary to effect a rescue shall be stationed outside the confined space in position to watch the welder. When a safety harness and lifeline are used, they shall be provided for as prescribed in Construction Safety Standard Part 45 Fall Protection, R 408.44501 et seq., and shall be attached to the welder’s body so that his or her body cannot be jammed in a small exit opening. R 408.40714 Warning tags and labels.

Rule 714. (1) A storage container of welding materials with filler metals or fusible granular materials shall carry a special label which shall read as follows:

CAUTION Welding may produce fumes and gases hazardous to health.

Use adequate ventilation. See American national standards institute standard

ANSI/AWS Z49.1, 1973 edition, Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes.

(2) A storage container of brazing filler metals

containing cadmium in significant amounts shall carry a special label which shall read as follows:

WARNING Contains cadmium–poisonous fumes may be formed on

heating. Do not breathe fumes.

Use only with adequate ventilation such as fume collectors, exhaust ventilators, or air-supplied respirators.

See American national standards institute standard ANSI/AWS Z49.1, 1973 edition,

Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes. If chest pain, cough, or fever develops after use, contact

physician immediately. (3) A storage container of brazing or gas welding fluxes

containing fluorides shall have a special label which shall read as follows:

CAUTION Contains fluorides.

This flux, when heated, gives off fumes that may irritate the eye, nose, and throat.

Avoid fumes–use only in well-ventilated spaces. Avoid contact of flux with eyes or skin.

Do not take internally. R 408.40715 Torches generally.

Rule 715. (1) A torch shall be inspected before each shift for leaking shutoff valves, hose and tip connections, or clogged tips. A defective torch shall not be used.

(2) A clogged tip opening shall be cleaned with a device, such as a drill or cleaning wire, designed for this purpose.

(3) A torch shall be lighted by a friction lighter and not by a match or hot work.

CYLINDERS

R 408.40721 Cylinders manufacturing, labeling, periodic testing, and marking.

Rule 721. (1) A cylinder shall be manufactured, labeled, and periodically tested in accordance with the specifications of the federal department of transportation requirements published in 49 C.F.R. Part 178, Subpart C, Specification for Cylinders, which are adopted by reference in R 408.40709.

(2) A cylinder shall be legibly marked with either the chemical or trade name. Marking shall be by stenciling, stamping, or labeling and shall not be tampered with or be readily removable. Whenever practical, the marking shall be located on the shoulder of the cylinder.

(3) An unlabeled cylinder shall not be used. (4) An empty cylinder shall be so marked at the time of

depletion. R 408.40722 Storage.

Rule 722. (1) An oxygen cylinder shall be stored not less than 20 feet from fuel gas cylinders or any highly combustible material, such as, but not limited to, oil, grease,

4

excelsior, flammable gas, or a source of ignition, or shall be separated from the material by a noncombustible wall not less than 5 feet (1.6 meters) high which has a fire resistance rating of 1 hour.

(2) A cylinder shall be stored away from any source of heat in excess of 125 degrees Fahrenheit.

(3) A cylinder, whether full or empty, in storage or during shipment, or with the regulator removed, shall have the valve closed and the cap connected in place if a cap is provided in the design, or shall be otherwise protected.

(4) Storage shall be set up to ensure first in, first out usage.

(5) A cylinder storage area shall be posted with the names of the individual gases stocked, and a warning shall be posted against tampering by an unauthorized employee. An assigned storage area shall be located where a cylinder will not be knocked over or struck by a passing or falling object.

(6) Where different gases are stored, they shall be grouped by types. Groupings shall separate the fuel gases from the oxidizing gases as specified in subrule (1) of this rule.

(7) A storage area for cylinders shall be well ventilated. (8) A cylinder shall not be stored in basements or pits. (9) All storage of fuel gas or oxygen within a building

shall be in accordance with the specifications of National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 58, 1974 edition Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code, which is adopted by reference in R 408.40709.

(10) Where a liquid or gaseous oxygen system is used to supply gaseous oxygen for welding and cutting and the system has a storage capacity of more than 20,000 cubic feet (560 cubic meters), measured at 14.7 psia and 70 degrees Fahrenheit, including unconnected reserves at the site, the system shall be as prescribed in National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 50, 1974 edition, Standards for Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites, which is adopted by reference in R 408.40709. R 408.40723 Cylinders generally.

Rule 723. (1) A chain, bracket, or other restraining device shall be used at all times to prevent cylinders from falling.

(2) A cylinder shall stand valve end up at all times. (3) A cylinder shall not be dropped, dragged, rolled on

its side, or struck violently. (4) When using a crane or hoisting device, a cylinder

shall be lifted only by cradles or enclosed platforms. An electromagnet, hook, rope, or sling shall not be used.

(5) A frozen or ice-clogged valve shall be thawed either by warm air or warm water and shall be dried before using. Boiling water or a flame shall not be used. Force shall not be applied to a valve or cap to loosen a cylinder frozen in place.

(6) Gases shall not be mixed within a cylinder except by the supplier. Only the owner of the cylinder, if the owner is qualified, or a person trained, qualified, and authorized by the owner, shall refill a cylinder. The contents of a cylinder shall be used only for those purposes intended by the supplier.

(7) A cylinder shall not be placed where it will become a part of the electrical circuit by accidental grounding or where it may be burned by an electric welding arc. A cylinder shall not be placed so that hot slag or flame can reach it unless the cylinder is protected by a fire-resistant shield. An electrode shall not be tapped against a cylinder to strike an arc.

(8) A regulator, gauge, or hose shall not be interchangeable between fuel gas, oxidizing gas, or inert gas. Connections for compressed gas cylinders shall be as prescribed in American National Standard Institute Standard

ANSI/ASA B57.1, 1965 edition, Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, which is adopted by reference in R 408.40709.

(9) A cylinder valve shall be opened slightly for an instant and then closed before connecting to a regulator or manifold to clear the valve of dust and dirt. The employee opening the valve shall stand to one side of the outlet, not in front of it. This shall not be done near a source of ignition. Pressure to a regulator shall be introduced by slowly opening the cylinder valve. An acetylene cylinder valve shall only be opened enough to allow proper working pressure, but shall not be opened more than 1 1/2 turns of the spindle.

(10) Acetylene shall not be utilized or piped, except in cylinder manifolds, at a pressure in excess of 15 psig.

(11) A cylinder to which a regulator is attached shall not be moved unless secured to a hand or powered truck designed or equipped for this purpose.

(12) A cylinder valve shall be closed in any of the following situations:

(a) When moving the cylinder. (b) When the work is finished or is left unattended

during the lunch period, overnight, or any other prolonged period.

(c) When the cylinder is empty. (d) When the regulator is removed. (13) A cylinder without fixed handwheels shall have

keys, handles, or nonadjustable wrenches on valve stems while in service. A multiple cylinder installation shall require only 1 key or handle for each manifold. A hammer shall not be used to open a cylinder valve or loosen a cap.

(14) A cylinder, whether full or empty, shall not be used as a roller or support.

(15) A damaged or a leaking cylinder, a cylinder with a valve stuck open, or a valve in need of repair shall be taken outdoors away from sources of ignition, tagged with a warning sign, and the manufacturer or distributor notified. Complete removal of the stem from the cylinder valve shall be avoided.

(16) Nothing shall be placed on top of the cylinder. R 408.40729 Manifolding.

Rule 729. Manifolding used for a welding operation shall be as prescribed in the general industry safety standard Part 12 Welding and Cutting, R 408.11231 to R 408.11252.

HOSES AND REGULATORS R 408.40731 Hoses and connections.

Rule 731. (1) Hose and hose connections used for a welding operation shall be as prescribed in paragraph 3.5.6 of the American National Standard Institute Standard ANSI/AWS Z49.1, 1973 edition, Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes, which is adopted by reference in R 408.40709.

(2) Parallel lengths of hose taped together shall have not more than 4 inches out of each 12 inches covered by tape.

(3) Parallel hoses shall be color coded as follows: (a) Red–fuel gases. See subrule (4) of this rule. (b) Green–oxygen. (c) Black–inert gas or air. (4) The employer shall assure that only approved hose

is used for LP gas. (5) A hose and its connections shall be inspected

before each shift for burns, leaks, worn places, or other defects which could affect the safety of an employee. Suspected leaks shall be checked by use of a grease-free soap solution.

5

(6) A defective hose shall not be used, but shall be repaired or replaced.

(7) A hose that has been subject to a flashback or has been repaired or spliced shall be tested at twice the normal pressure, but not less than 300 psig.

(8) A box used for the storage of gas hose shall be ventilated. R 408.40732 Regulators and protective devices.

Rule 732. (1) The use of regulators shall comply with the following requirements:

(a) Regulators shall be used only for the gas and pressure of which they are intended.

(b) Regulators shall be repaired by authorized and trained personnel or shall be returned to the supplier for calibration or repairs.

(c) Regulators shall not be removed until the cylinder valve is closed and the regulator drained.

(d) Regulators shall have gauges marked “Use No Oil” when used for oxygen.

(2) Backflow prevention devices shall be installed on the fuel gas and oxygen hoses.

(3) A cylinder equipped with a shutoff valve shall have a regulator attached to the cylinder valve or manifold during use.

ARC WELDING AND CUTTING R 408.40741 Arc welding machines.

Rule 741. (1) An arc welding machine shall be capable of operating safely in the environment in which it is located. The design and construction shall enable the machine to carry its rated load with rated temperature rise where the temperature of the cooling air is not more than 104 degrees Fahrenheit and where the altitude is not more than 3,300 feet (1,000 meters approx.).

(2) Where unusual service conditions exist, such as corrosive fumes, steam, oil vapor, flammable gases, vibration, shock, dust, or weather, a specially designed arc welding machine shall be used. R 408.40742 Open circuit and no-load voltages of arc

welding machines. Rule 742. (1) When an arc welding machine is operated

without being connected to a load, the open circuit voltage shall not exceed the values shown in table 1 when rated voltage is applied to the primary winding or when a generator-type arc welding machine is operating at maximum rated no-load speed.

(2) When welding and cutting processes require valves of open circuit voltages higher than 100, insulation or other means shall be provided to prevent the operator from making accidental contact with the high voltage.

(3) Equipment working through resistors from DC trolley voltages or 250 to 600 volts shall have a protective device for automatically disconnecting the power during arc off periods.

(4) Automatic control devices for reducing no-load voltage below 50 volts shall be provided where AC welding is to be done under wet conditions that could provide a shock hazard.


TABLE 1 Maximum Open Circuit Voltages of Welding Machines

Welding current

Maximum open circuit (no-load)

Manual & semi automatic machines

Voltage Automatic machines

ac 80 rms 100 rms dc>10% Ripple voltage

80 rms 100 average

dc<10% Ripple voltage

100 average 100 average

R 408.40743 Design requirements for arc welding

machines. Rule 743. (1) A controller integrally mounted in an

electric motor-driven welding machine shall have the capacity for carrying rated motor current and shall be capable of making and interrupting stalled rotor current of the motor.

(2) Control apparatus shall be enclosed except for the operating wheels, levers, or handles. The handles and wheels shall be large enough to be grasped by a gloved hand.

(3) Input power terminals, tap change devices, and live metal parts connected to input circuits shall be completely enclosed and shall be accessible only by use of tools.

(4) Welding lead terminals shall be protected from accidental electrical contact by personnel or metal objects. If a welding lead terminal normally used for connection to the work is connected to a grounded enclosure, it shall be done by a conductor not less than 2 sizes smaller than the grounding conductor and it shall be so marked.

(5) Portable control devices, such as push buttons, shall not be connected to an AC circuit of more than 120 volts. Exposed metal parts of a portable control device operating above 50 volts shall be grounded.

(6) Auto transformers or AC reactors shall not be used to draw welding current directly from any AC power source having a voltage of more than 80 volts.

R 408.40744 Installation.

Rule 744. (1) The frame or case of a welding machine shall be grounded, unless the manufacturer does not recommend it.

(2) The work on which the operator welds shall be grounded. A wire used to ground a workpiece shall be capable of carrying the full welding current. Connections of the ground shall be mechanically sound and strong. When a single ground return cable services more than 1 unit, the safe current-carrying capacity of the cable shall equal or exceed the total maximum output capacities of all units which it services.

(3) A conduit containing an electrical conductor shall not be used for completing a work-lead circuit.

(4) An arc welder shall meet the applicable requirements of article 630, Electric Welders of the National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, 1978 edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.40709.

(5) A pipeline in service shall not be used as a permanent part of a work-lead circuit, but may be used during construction, extension, or repair if current is not carried through threaded joints, flanged bolted joints, or caulked joints and if special precautions are used to avoid sparking at the connection of the work-lead cable.

(6) Chains, wire ropes, cranes, hoists, and elevators used for carrying loads shall not be used to carry a welding current.

6

(7) A welding cable shall be protected against damage, entanglement, or contact with power supply or high-tension wires.

(8) A welding machine that is not provided with a controller or disconnect switch as an integral part shall have a controller or disconnect switch with overload protection provided. A disconnect switch with overload protection or overload disconnect protection, or equivalent, shall be provided for each outlet used by a portable welding machine, unless the machine is equipped with a disconnect switch and overload protection.

(9) The rated current-carrying capacity of the supply conductors for individual machines shall not be less than the rated primary current for the welding machine. The rated current-carrying capacity of the conductors for a group of welding machines may be less than the sum of the rated primary current of the welding machines supplied. The conductor rating shall be determined in each case according to the machine loading based on the use to be made of each welding machine and the allowance permissible if all the machines supplied by the conductor will not be in use at the same time.

(10) Where a welding machine is working sufficiently close to another machine so that a welding operator is likely to touch the exposed parts of more than 1 electrode holder simultaneously, the machine shall be connected so as to minimize shock hazard as follows:

(a) DC machine shall be connected with the same polarity.

(b) AC machine shall be connected to the same phase of the supply circuit and with the same instantaneous polarity.

(11) A current-carrying part passing through the portion of the holder that the employee grips by hand and the outer surface of the jaws of the holder shall be insulated against the maximum voltage encountered to ground. R 408.40745 Welding cables and electrode holders.

Rule 745. (1) An arc welding and cutting cable shall be of the completely insulated, flexible-type and shall be capable of handling the maximum current requirements of the work, taking into account the duty cycle under which the welder is working.

(2) A manual electrode holder shall be specifically designed for arc welding and cutting and shall be capable of handling the maximum rated current required by the electrode. R 408.40746 Operation.

Rule 746. (1) Engine fuel, cooling water, or shielding gas shall not be allowed to leak.

(2) A welding machine shall be disconnected when being moved and shall be turned off when not in use.

(3) Electrodes shall be retracted or removed when not in use. Electrode holders not in use shall be placed so that they cannot make electrical contact with an employee, fuel, gas tanks, or conducting objects.

(4) A welder shall not let live electrodes or holders touch his bare skin or damp clothing. When arc welding is performed in wet conditions or under a condition of high humidity, the welder shall be protected against electric shock.

(5) Electrode holders shall not be cooled by immersion in water.

(6) Welding shall not be permitted where fumes of chlorinated hydrocarbons are present or will reach or be drawn into the atmosphere surrounding the welding operation.

(7) Before starting an arc welding operation, the welder shall do all of the following:

(a) Make sure the work lead is secured to the work. (b) Make sure the magnetic work clamps are free of

spatter on the contact surfaces. (c) Spread out the welding cable, if necessary, to

prevent overheating and damage. (d) Make sure grounding connections are secured to a

good ground. (e) Make sure the required switching equipment for

shutting down the machine has been provided. (8) A welder shall not curl or loop welding cable around

his body. (9) An employee working in the vicinity of arc welding

operations and exposed to the direct rays of the arc shall be shielded by a noncombustible or flameproof screen provided by the employer, at no expense to the employee.

(10) When a welding machine used indoors is powered by an internal combustion engine, the atmosphere indoors to which an employee is exposed shall be maintained in accordance with the requirements of the department of labor and economic growth. R 408.40747 Maintenance of arc welding machines.

Rule 747. (1) Spliced welding cable shall not be used within 10 feet (3.05 meters) of an arc welding machine.

(2) Equipment in need of repair that constitutes a safety hazard shall not be used or put in use until repairs are made by a knowledgeable employee or an outside service.

(3) Cut insulation on work and lead cable or exposed bare conductors of an arc welding machine shall be protected by electrical tape and shall be made watertight or the conductor shall be replaced. Splices shall be made by insulated welded joints or pressure connectors.

(4) An arc welding machine that has become wet shall be thoroughly dried and tested before use.

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT R 408.40751 Personal protective equipment.

Rule 751. (1) Face and eye protection shall be worn by a welder when performing welding operations and by other employees exposed to a risk of injury from spatter or flash, or both. The protective devices shall be provided for as prescribed in construction safety standard Part 6 Personal Protective Equipment, R 408.40617, R 408.40623, and R 408.40624.

(2) Welding gloves shall be provided for by the employer, at no expense to the employee, and shall be worn to protect the hands and wrists.

(3) When necessary, such as when performing overhead arc welding, sleeves shall be provided for by the employer, at no expense to the employee, and shall be worn to protect the arms when arc welding.

(4) Leather shoes or other appropriate apparel that cover the ankle shall be worn. The employee shall provide leather shoes or other appropriate apparel unless specifically otherwise provided for in a collective bargaining agreement or other employer-employee agreement.

(5) Other protective devices, such as, but not limited to, body protection, chaps, and curtains shall be provided for by the employer, at no expense to the employee, and shall be used when an employee is exposed to a risk of injury by flash burn, sparks, and foreign bodies.

GENERAL FIRE RULES R 408.40761 Fire precautions.

Rule 761. (1) Welding operations shall not be performed within 50 feet of explosives, stored cylinders, or stored fuel.

7

Combustible and flammable materials located within 35 feet of a welding operation shall either be removed or covered with fire-resistant material.

(2) Cracks or openings through which sparks could pass in the floor or wall that are within 35 feet of a welding operation shall be covered with a fire-resistant material.

(3) A wood floor within 10 feet of a welding operation shall be protected by either wetting down, covering with sand, or covering with a fire-resistant material.

(4) A minimum of 1 2A-10BC portable fire extinguisher shall be immediately available to the work area during welding operations.

(5) Conveyor and exhaust systems within 35 feet of a welding operation that might carry sparks or hot slag shall be protected or shut down.

(6) An employer shall designate a person as responsible for fire safety during a welding operation where a fire could start or where 1 of the following conditions exists:

(a) Appreciable combustible and flammable materials are more than 35 feet from a welding operation but are easily ignited.

(b) Combustible and flammable material is adjacent to the opposite side of a metal partition, wall, ceiling, or roof that is likely to ignite by conduction or radiation.

(c) If there is a possibility that a smoldering fire may have started, the person shall remain at the scene of the work for not less than 30 minutes after the welding operation has stopped. Such personnel shall be instructed as to the specific anticipated fire hazards and how the firefighting equipment provided is to be used.

(7) The connection, by welding, of branches to a pipeline carrying a flammable substance shall be performed in accordance with the regulations of the department of

transportation, 49 C.F.R. Part 192, Minimum Federal Safety Standards for Gas Pipelines, which are adopted by reference in R 408.40709.

(8) Before welding, cutting, or heating is commenced on any surface covered by a preservative coating whose flammability is not known, a test shall be made by a competent person to determine its flammability. Preservative coatings shall be considered to be highly flammable when scrapings burn with extreme rapidity.

(9) Precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of highly flammable hardened preservative coatings. When coatings are determined to be highly flammable, they shall be stripped from the area to be heated to prevent ignition.

R 408.40762 Welding drums, barrels, tanks, or other

containers. Rule 762. (1) Welding operations shall not be performed

on drums, barrels, tanks, or other containers until they have been cleaned of all flammable, combustible, or toxic materials or fumes.

(2) All pipelines or other connections to drums, barrels, or tanks shall be disconnected or blanked before performing welding operations.

(3) Hollow spaces or cavities shall be vented and either filled with water or purged with an inert gas before preheating, cutting, or welding.

(4) An opening shall be maintained during welding and cutting to vent gases or vapors.

(5) Welding on natural gas pipelines shall be as prescribed by the regulations of the department of transportation, 49 C.F.R. Part 192, Minimum Federal Safety Standards for Gas Pipelines, which are adopted by reference in R 408.40709.





Total Units Printed: 1,000 Total Printing Cost: $391.95 Cost Per Unit: $0.39

EXCAVATION AND SHORING

4



CONSTRUCTION SAFETY STANDARDS Filed with the Secretary of State on August 17, 1979 (as amended November 23, 1982)

(as amended January 11, 1988) (as amended July 8, 1993) (as amended September 3, 1996)

This rule takes effect 15 days after filing with the Secretary of State

(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 19 and 21 of Act No. 154 of the Public Acts of 1974, as amended, and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, being

§§408.1019, 408.1021, and 445.2001 of the Michigan Compiled Laws)

R 408.40951 of the Michigan Administrative Code is effective as of the date of this amendment.


PART 9. EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND SHORING

TABLE OF CONTENTS R 408.40901 Scope. ............................................................. 1 R 408.40925 Definitions A to Q. ........................................... 1 R 408.40926 Definitions; S. .................................................. 1 R 408.40927 Definitions; T, U............................................... 2 R 408.40931 Locating utility lines. ........................................ 2 R 408.40932 Excavation; consideration of soil types;........... 2 water; slide hazards. ............................................................. 2 R 408.40933 Excavation; obstructions; retaining.................. 2 materials; egress; guarding; heavy ....................................... 2 equipment. ............................................................................ 2 R 408.40934 Hazardous atmospheres; testing and.............. 3 controls. ................................................................................ 3 R 408.40941 Excavation; angle of repose. ........................... 3

R 408.40942 Supporting systems; angle of repose; tie .........4 backs; tight sheeting; additional bracing................................4 R 408.40943 Additional requirements for trench support ......4 systems. ................................................................................4 R 408.40944 Benching and sloping.......................................4 R 408.40945 Trenching boxes and shields. ..........................4 R 408.40946 Caisson excavation; employee protection........4 R 408.40951 Walkways, sidewalks, roadways. .....................4 R 408.40952 Openings in roadways. ....................................5 R 408.40953 Adjacent structures; protection; design; ...........5 inspection of shoring, bracing, and........................................5 underpinning..........................................................................5 APPENDIX ............................................................................6

R 408.40901 Scope.

Rule 901. This part pertains to the digging of excavations and trenches which an employee is required to enter and the supporting systems used on construction operations.

R 408.40925 Definitions A to Q.

Rule 925. (1) “Angle of repose” means the maximum permissible slope as determined by table 1.

(2) “Braces” or “struts” means the horizontal cross members of a shoring system that bear against the uprights or stringers.

(3) “Excavation” means any man-made cavity or depression in the earth’s surface, including its sides, walls, or faces, formed by earth removal. For the purpose of this part, a trench is an excavation.

(4) “Hazardous atmosphere” means an atmosphere which, by reason of being any of the following, may cause death, illness, or injury: (a) Explosive. (b) Flammable. (c) Poisonous. (d) Corrosive. (e) Irritating. (f) Oxygen deficient. (g) Toxic. (h) Otherwise harmful.

(5) “Kickouts” means the accidental release or failure of a stringer or brace.

(6) “Qualified person” means a person who, by possession of a recognized degree or certificate of professional standing, or who, by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter and work.

R 408.40926 Definitions; S.

Rule 926. (1) “Sheet piling” means a continuous row of timber or steel piles driven in close contact to provide a tight wall to resist lateral pressure of water, adjacent earth, or other materials.

(2) “Sides,” sometimes called faces or walls, means the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of excavation work.

(3) “Slope” means the acute angle formed by the side of a trench or excavation and the horizontal plane.

(4) “Soil” means any of the following: (a) “Clay” — a very fine textured soil that derives

its resistance to displacement from cohesion and may be:


2(i) “Soft clay” — a clay-type soil that has an

unconfined strength of less than 1.0 ton per square foot.

(ii) “Medium clay,” sometimes called plastic — a clay-type soil that has a minimum unconfined strength of 1.0 ton per square foot.

(iii) “Firm soil” — a clay-type soil that is resistant to forces causing rupture or displacement. A firm clay has a minimum unconfined strength of 1.5 tons per square foot.

(iv) “Stiff clay” — a clay-type soil that is very resistant to forces causing rupture or displacement. A stiff clay has a minimum unconfined strength of 2.5 tons per square foot.

(b) “Fill” — a manmade soil condition that may be constructed of any type of soil or combination thereof.

(c) “Granular soil” — a course grained soil that does not possess cohesion but derives its strength from internal friction.

(d) “Organic soil” — A soil that contains significant amounts of peat, muck, or marl.

(e) “Running soil” — any type of soil that has insufficient strength to stand unsupported. Running soil tends to run or slough into the excavation as the excavation is being dug.

(5) “Stringers” means the horizontal members of a trench shoring system whose sides bear against the uprights or earth.

(6) “Supporting system” means the total system necessary to restrain the sides of an excavation from moving.

R 408.40927 Definitions; T, U.

Rule 927. (1) “Tight sheeting” means a continuous row of wood or steel sheets in close contact to provide a tight wall, but is not driven as with piling.

(2) “Toe of slope” means the point at which the side of an excavation intersects the lowest level of the excavation.

(3) “Trench” means an excavation having a depth greater than its width measured at the bottom.

(4) “Trench jack,” means a screw or hydraulic jack used as a brace in a trench shoring system.

(5) “Trench shield” sometimes called a trench box, means a trench shoring system composed of steel plates and bracing, welded or bolted together, which can be moved along as work progresses.

(6) “Uprights” means the vertical members of a trench shoring system.

R 408.40931 Locating utility lines.

Rule 931. (1) An employer shall not excavate in a street, highway, public place, a private easement of a public utility, or near the location of a public utility facility owned, maintained, or installed on a customer’s premises, without having first ascertained the location of all underground facilities of a public utility in the proposed area of excavation.

(2) Upon receiving the information from the public utility, an employer shall exercise reasonable care when working in close proximity to the underground facilities of any public utility. If the facilities are to be exposed, or are likely to be exposed, only hand digging shall be employed in such circumstances

and such support, as may be reasonably necessary for protection of the facilities, shall be provided in and near the construction area.

(3) When any contact with, or damage to, any pipe, cable, or its protective coating, or any other underground facility of a public utility occurs, the public utility shall be notified immediately by the employer responsible for operations causing the damage. If an energized electrical cable is severed, an energized conductor is exposed, or dangerous fluids or gasses are escaping from a broken line, the employer shall evacuate the employees from the immediate area while awaiting the arrival of the public utility personnel.

R 408.40932 Excavation; consideration of soil types; water; slide hazards.

Rule 932. (1) If different textured soils are encountered in the side of an excavation, each soil type of the excavation shall be cut to the proper angle of repose, except that the slope shall not steepen between the toe of the slope and the ground level where soft clay or running soil is encountered in the lower cut.

(2) If the excavation is a trench, a trench shoring system shall be used or the sides shall be properly sloped to protect against a cave-in.

(3) An employee shall not work in an excavation in which there is accumulated water or in which water is accumulating unless precautions have been taken to protect employees against the hazards posed by water accumulation. The precautions necessary to protect employees adequately vary with each situation, but may include special support or shield systems to protect from cave-ins, water removal to control the level of accumulating water, or the use of a safety harness and lifeline.

(4) If water is controlled or prevented from accumulating by the use of water removal equipment, the water removal equipment and operation shall be monitored by a qualified person or a monitoring system to ensure that the equipment is properly operated.

(5) An ongoing inspection of an excavation or trench shall be made by a qualified person. After every rainstorm or other hazard-producing occurrence, an inspection shall be made by a qualified employee for evidence of possible slides or cave-ins. Where these conditions are found, all work shall cease until additional precautions, such as additional shoring or reducing the slope, have been accomplished.

(6) An excavation that is cut into a rock formation shall be scaled to remove loose material.

(7) When installed forms, walls, or similar structures create a trench between the form, wall, or structure and the side of the excavation, an employer shall comply with the provisions of R 408.40941 to R 408.40944.

R 408.40933 Excavation; obstructions; retaining materials; egress; guarding; heavy equipment.

Rule 933. (1) A tree, boulder, rock fragments, or other obstructions whose movement could cause injury to an employee shall be removed or supported.

(2) An excavation that an employee is required to enter shall have excavated and other material stored and

3retained not less than 2 feet from the excavation edge.

(3) When a shoring system is used, the system shall be designed and used to resist the added pressure when heavy equipment, material handling equipment, or material is located near an excavation.

(4) When mobile equipment is utilized or permitted adjacent to an excavation where the operator’s vision is restricted, stop logs or barricades shall be utilized or a signal person shall be used.

(5) An excavation 48 or more inches in depth and occupied by an employee shall be provided with either a ladder extending not less than 3 feet above the top as a means of access or with a ramp meeting the requirements of subrule (6) of this rule. Lateral travel along the wall of a trench to a ladder or other means of egress shall not exceed 25 feet.

(6) An earth ramp may be used in place of a ladder if it meets all of the following requirements: (a) The ramp material shall be stable. (b) The sides of the excavation above the ramp

shall be maintained to the angle of repose or sheeted or shored along the means of egress.

(c) The degree of angle of the ramp shall not be more than 45 degrees.

(d) Vertical height between the floor of the trench and the toe of the ramp shall not exceed 30 inches.

R 408.40934 Hazardous atmospheres; testing and controls.

Rule 934. To prevent exposure to harmful levels of atmospheric contaminants and to assure acceptable atmospheric conditions, all of the following requirements shall apply:

(a) Where an oxygen deficiency (an atmosphere that contains less than 19.5% oxygen) or a hazardous atmosphere exists, such as in excavations in areas

where hazardous substances are stored nearby, the atmosphere in the excavation shall be tested before employees enter excavations that are more than 4 feet (1.22 m) deep.

(b) Precautions shall be taken to prevent employee exposure to atmospheres that contain less than 19.5% oxygen and any other hazardous atmosphere. These precautions include providing proper respiratory protection or ventilation in accordance with the requirements of this part.

(c) Precautions shall be taken, such as providing ventilation, to prevent employee exposure to an atmosphere that contains a concentration of a flammable gas in excess of 20% of the lower flammable limit of the gas.

(d) When controls are used that are intended to reduce the level of atmospheric contaminants to acceptable levels, testing shall be conducted as often as necessary to ensure that the atmosphere remains safe.

R 408.40941 Excavation; angle of repose.

Rule 941. (1) The side of an excavation more than 5 feet deep shall be sloped as prescribed in table 1, unless supported as prescribed in this part.

(2) An excavation less than 5 feet in depth shall also be effectively protected when examination of the ground indicates hazardous earth movement may be expected.

(3) If 1 side of a trench is 5 feet or less in depth and the other side is deeper than 5 feet, the side deeper than 5 feet shall be protected as provided in this part. All excavated material shall be placed on the low side if possible.

(4) Special attention shall be given to a side that may be adversely affected by weather or moisture content.

TABLE 1 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ANGLE OF REPOSE FOR THE SIDE OF AN EXCAVATION IN EXCESS OF 5' DEPTH

4

R 408.40942 Supporting systems; angle of repose; tie backs; tight sheeting; additional bracing.

Rule 942. (1) The angle of repose and the design of the supporting system for a side of an excavation shall be based on the evaluation of all of the following factors: (a) Depth of cut and type of soil. (b) Possible variation in the water content of the

material while the excavation is open. (c) Anticipated changes in the material due to

exposure to air, sun, water, or freezing. (d) Load imposed by structures, equipment,

overlying material, or stored material. (e) Vibration from traffic, equipment, or blasting.

(2) A support system shall be designed by a qualified employee. The design of the supporting system shall be maintained at the jobsite. Changes from the design of the support system shall be approved by a qualified employee.

(3) Tie rods and other forms of tie backs used to restrain the top of sheeting shall be anchored a minimum of 10 feet. The measurement to the anchor point shall start at the intersection of an angle of repose with the surface of the soil retained. The tie back and anchor shall be capable of restraining any pressure exerted on the system.

(4) When tight sheeting or sheet piling is used, pressures due to existing ground water conditions shall be considered in the design. Sheet piling shall be driven to the predetermined depth set forth in the required design. Changes from the design shall be approved by the designer of the support system.

(5) Materials used for a supporting system shall be in good serviceable condition. When timbers are used, they shall be sound and free of large or loose knots.

(6) A supporting system shall include additional bracing approved by the designer of the support system when the sides of excavations are cut adjacent to a previous known excavation or a known fill, particularly when the separation between the previous excavation and the new excavation is less than the depth of the excavation.

(7) Tight sheeting shall be braced or anchored at the bottom and along the vertical plane to prevent lateral movement.

R 408.40943 Additional requirements for trench support systems.

Rule 943. (1) A brace or trench jack that is used for a support system for a trench shall be spaced as designed and shall be secured to prevent sliding, failing, or kickout.

(2) The backfilling and the removal of a support system for a trench shall progress together from the bottom of the trench. In unstable or running soil, the jacks and braces shall be removed from above the trench after employees have cleared the trench.

(3) The excavation of material to a level that is not more than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of the members of a support system shall be permitted, but only if the system is designed to resist the forces calculated for the full depth of the trench and if there are no indications, while the trench is open, of a possible loss of soil from behind or below the bottom of the support system.

(4) The installation of a support system shall be closely coordinated with the excavation of trenches.

R 408.40944 Benching and sloping.

Rule 944. (1) The angle of repose shall be flattened when an excavation has water conditions, silty materials, loose boulders, or areas where erosion, deep frost action, or slide planes appear.

(2) When benching the side of an excavation, the vertical rise shall not be more than 5 feet and the step back shall extend at least to the angle of repose as required by table 1.

(3) When benching a side of a trench, the height of the lower bench shall not be more than the lesser of 5 feet or width of the trench measured at the bottom.

(4) An employee shall not be permitted to work on sloped or benched excavations at levels above another employee, except when an employee at the lower level is protected from the hazard of falling, rolling, or sliding material or equipment.

R 408.40945 Trenching boxes and shields.

Rule 945. (1) Portable trench boxes or sliding trench shields may be used for the protection of personnel in place of a shoring system or sloping. Where such trench boxes or shields are used, they shall be designed, constructed, and maintained in a manner that provides protection equal to or greater than the sheeting or shoring required for the trench.

(2) The use of benching in conjunction with a portable trench box is permitted when the toe of the trench box is not more than 2 feet above the trench bottom, but only if the trench box is designed to resist the forces calculated for the full depth of the trench and if there are no indications, while the trench is open, of a possible cave-in below the bottom of the trench box.

(3) An employee shall not be allowed in shields when shields are being installed, removed, or moved.

R 408.40946 Caisson excavation; employee protection.

Rule 946. The requirements for employee protection during caisson excavation are found in R 408.41482 of construction safety standard, Part 14. Tunnels, Shafts, Caissons, and Cofferdams, being R 408.41401 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code. R 408.40951 Walkways, sidewalks, roadways.

Rule 951. (1) A walkway or sidewalk shall be kept clear of excavated material and other obstructions.

(2) The walkways and sidewalks shall be lighted if used during hours of darkness.

(3) A sidewalk shall not be undermined unless it is shored to support a live load of not less than 125 pounds per square foot.

(4) A walkway or sidewalk that is adjacent to an excavation shall be separated from the excavation and protected by a guardrail as prescribed in Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(5) An employee who is routed from a sidewalk or walkway into a roadway to detour an excavation shall be protected on both sides by guardrails or barricades as prescribed in Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code, or Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades, being R 408.42201 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

5(6) If an employee or equipment is required or

permitted to cross a trench or ditch, a walkway, runway, ramp, or bridge shall be provided and shall have a designed capacity of not less than 3 times the imposed load. A guardrail prescribed by the provisions of Part 21. Guarding of Walking and Working Areas and Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.42101 and R 408.44501 et seq., respectively, of the Michigan Administrative Code, shall be provided.

(7) If equipment is routed across or onto a roadway, protection shall be provided as prescribed in rule 2223 of Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades, being R 408.42233 of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(8) Guardrails or barricades, as prescribed in Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades and Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.42201 et seq. and R 408.44501 et seq., respectively, of the Michigan Administrative Code, shall be provided at all remotely located excavations. All wells, pits, and shafts shall be barricaded or covered. Temporary wells, pits, and shafts shall be barricaded or covered. Temporary wells, pits, and shafts shall be

backfilled when exploration and similar operations are completed.

R 408.40952 Openings in roadways.

Rule 952. An open cut into a roadway shall be provided with a barricade on all sides as prescribed in rule 2223 of Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades, being R 408.42223 of the Michigan Administrative Code. Warning lights shall be provided during hours of darkness. R 408.40953 Adjacent structures; protection; design; inspection of shoring, bracing, and underpinning.

Rule 953. (1) A structure that is adjacent to an excavation or trench below the level of the base or footing of any foundation or retaining wall shall be protected against settlement, lateral movement, undermining, or washout.

(2) Before the excavation begins, the design of the protection used shall be set forth by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject area.

(3) The shoring, bracing, and underpinning shall be inspected daily or more often, as conditions warrant, by a qualified employee.

6

APPENDIX

PART 9. EXCAVATIONS, TRENCHING & SHORING

The following pages are not a part of the mandatory requirements of this safety standard.

They are, however, examples of good engineering practices based on the rules contained herein.

EXAMPLES OF EXCAVATION & TRENCH PROTECTION

EXCAVATIONS

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14





Total Units Printed: Total Printing Cost:

Cost Per Unit:

LADDERS

5




Filed with the Secretary of State on August 31, 1976 (as amended May 16, 1978) (as amended May 31, 1990) (as amended July 8, 1993) (as amended September 3, 1996)

This rule takes effect 15 days after filing with the Secretary of State

(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 19 and 21

of Act No. 154 of the Public Acts of 1974, as amended, and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, being §§408.1019, 408.1021, and 445.2001 of the Michigan Compiled Laws)

R 408.41127 of the Michigan Administrative Code is effective as of the date of this amendment.


PART 11. FIXED AND PORTABLE LADDERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS R 408.41101. Scope. ............................................................1 R 408.41102. Rescission. .....................................................1 R 408.41103. Definitions; B to I. ...........................................1 R 408.41104. Definitions; J to R. ..........................................2 R 408.41105. Definitions; S to W..........................................2 R 408.41111. Adoption by reference; certification. ...............2 R 408.41112. Training requirements. ...................................3 R 408.41113. General requirements.....................................3 R 408.41115. Ladder loads; clearances; safety

devices; cages; wells; extensions. .................................4 R 408.41121. Inspection; faults and defects. ........................6 R 408.41122. Use generally. ................................................6 R 408.41123. Classification of ladders..................................6

R 408.41124. Portable ladders............................................. 6 R 408.41125. Trestle ladders. .............................................. 7 R 408.41126. Use of stepladders. ........................................ 7 R 408.41127. Single and double-cleat ladders generally. .... 8 R 408.41128. Single-cleat ladders; width; side rails. ............ 8 R 408.41129. Double-cleat ladders; width; additional

rail; side rails. ................................................................ 8 R 408.41130. Storage of ladders.......................................... 8 R 408.41131. Handling and transporting of ladders. ............ 8 R 408.41132. Maintenance. ................................................. 8 R 408.41133. Special-purpose ladders. ............................... 8 R 408.41140. Fixed ladders. ................................................ 9

R 408.41101. Scope.

Rule 1101. This part establishes minimum requirements for the construction, care, and training in the use of portable and fixed ladders for construction, alteration, or repair operations. R 408.41102. Rescission.

Rule 1102. (1) Part 11 of the construction safety commission standards, being R 408.2101 to R 408.2115 of the Michigan Administrative Code and appearing on ages 4297 to 4301 of the 1967 Annual Supplement to the Code, is rescinded.

(2) Part 12 of the construction safety commission standards, being R 408.2201 to R 408.2205 of the Michigan Administrative Code and appearing on pages 3315 and 3316 of the 1964-1965 Annual Supplement to the Code is rescinded. R 408.41103. Definitions; B to I.

Rule 1103. (1) “Brand” means marking by burning with a hot iron.

(2) “Cage,” “cage guard,” or “basket guard” means an enclosure that is fastened to the side rails of a fixed ladder or to the structure to encircle the climbing space of a ladder for the safety of a climber.

(3) “Cleats” means a ladder’s crosspieces of rectangular cross section which are placed on edge and on which a person may step to ascend or descend.

(4) “Double-cleat ladder” means a ladder that is similar to a single-cleat ladder, but is wider and has an additional rail in the center that allows simultaneous 2-way traffic.

(5) “Equivalent” means alternative designs, materials, or methods that will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees.

(6) “Extension ladder” means a non-self-supporting portable ladder that is adjustable in length. An extension ladder consists of 2 or more sections traveling in guides or brackets arranged to permit adjustment of the ladder’s length. An extension ladder’s size is designed by the sum of the lengths of the sections measured along the side rails.

(7) “Extension trestle ladder” means a self-supporting portable ladder which is adjustable in length, which consists of a trestle ladder base and a vertically adjustable single ladder, and which has suitable means for locking the ladders together. The size is designated by the length of the rail of the trestle ladder base.

(8) “Fixed ladder” means a ladder that is permanently attached to a structure, building, or equipment.

(9) “Grab bar” means a handhold that is placed adjacent to, or as an extension above, a ladder for the


2purpose of providing access beyond the limits of the ladder.

(10) “Individual rung ladder” means a fixed ladder that has each rung individually attached to a structure, building, or equipment. R 408.41104. Definitions; J to R.

Rule 1104. (1) “Job-built ladder” means a ladder, other than a manufactured ladder, that is usually built at the jobsite.

(2) “Ladder” means an appliance that usually consists of 2 side rails which are joined at regular intervals by crosspieces which are called steps, rungs, or cleats and on which a person may step to ascend or descend.

(3) “Ladder safety device” means a device, other than a cage or well, that is designed to eliminate or reduce the possibility of accidental falls.

(4) “Lower levels” means those levels to which an employee can fall from a ladder. Such areas include ground levels, floors, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, water, and similar surfaces. The term does not include the surface from which the employee falls.

(5) “Manufactured ladder” means a commercially made ladder.

(6) “Maximum intended load” means the total load of all employees, equipment, tools, materials, transmitted loads, and other loads that are anticipated to be applied to a ladder compartment at any one time.

(7) “Pitch” means the included angle which is between the horizontal and the ladder and which is measured on the opposite side of a ladder from the climbing side.

(8) “Platform ladder” means a self-supporting type of fixed size stepladder that has a platform provided at the working level. The size is determined by the distance along the front rail from the platform to the base of the ladder.

(9) “Portable ladder” means a ladder which is not permanently fixed in place and which may be used at various locations.

(10) “Rail ladder” means a fixed ladder which consists of side rails that are joined at regular intervals by rungs or cleats and which is fastened along its entire length or in sections to a building, structure, or equipment.

(11) “Rungs” means a ladder’s crosspieces of circular or oval cross section on which a person may step to ascend or descend.

R 408.41105. Definitions; S to W.

Rule 1105. (1) “Safety feet” means a safety device that is placed on the foot of the side rails of straight, sectional, or extension ladders to reduce the likelihood that the base will slip. Safety feet may be flat pads that are covered with a nonslip material, pointed metal projections, or spur wheels.

(2)“Side-step ladder” means a ladder that requires an employee who is getting off at the top of the ladder to step sideways from the ladder to reach the landing.

(3) “Single-cleat ladder” means a ladder which consists of a pair of parallel side rails that are connected with cleats which are joined to the side rails at regular intervals.

(4) “Single-rail ladder” means a portable ladder that has rungs, cleats, or steps which are mounted on a single rail instead of the normal 2 rails that are used on most other ladders.

(5) “Special-purpose ladder” means a portable ladder that represents either a modification or a combination of

design or construction features in 1 or more of the general purpose types of ladders, as defined in R 408.41103(5) and (6), R 408.41104(6) and (7), and subrules (4) and (9) of this rule, in order to adapt the ladder to special or specific uses.

(6) “Stepladder” means a self-supporting portable ladder which is nonadjustable in length and which has flat steps and a hinged back. A stepladder’s size is measured along the front edge of the side rails.

(7) “Steps” means the flat crosspieces of a ladder on which a person may step to ascend or descend.

(8) “Through ladder” means a ladder that requires an employee who is getting off at the top of the ladder to step through the ladder to reach the landing.

(9) “Trestle ladder” means a self-supporting portable ladder which is nonadjustable in length and which consists of 2 sections that are hinged at the top to form equal angles with the base. The size of the ladder is designated by the length of the side rails measured along the front edge.

(10) “Well” means a permanent complete enclosure around a fixed ladder that protects a climber. Proper clearance for a well will give the same protection as a cage.

(11) “Worn” means a reduction of the dimension of a wood or nonwood part by more than 10% of its original size. R 408.41111. Adoption by reference; certification.

Rule 1111. (1) A manufactured portable wood ladder shall be constructed and maintained as prescribed in the ANSI standard A14.1-1990, which is adopted by reference in this rule and may be inspected at the Lansing office of the department of consumer and industry services. This standard may be purchased at a cost as of the time of adoption of this rule of $35.00 from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.

(2) A manufactured portable metal ladder shall be constructed and maintained as prescribed in the ANSI standard A14.2-1990, which is adopted by reference in this rule and may be inspected at the Lansing office of the department of consumer and industry services. This standard may be purchased at a cost as of the time of adoption of this rule of $35.00 from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.

(3) A manufactured portable plastic ladder shall be constructed and maintained as prescribed in the ANSI standard A14.5-1982 and supplement 1985, which is adopted by reference in this rule and may be inspected at the Lansing office of the department of consumer and industry services. This standard may be purchased at a cost as of the time of adoption of this rule of $24.00 from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.

(4) Fixed ladders shall be constructed and maintained as prescribed in the ANSI standard A14.3-1984, which is adopted by reference in this rule and may be inspected at the Lansing office of the department of consumer and

3industry services. This standard may be purchased at a cost as of the time of adoption of this rule of $15.00 from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.

(5) Job-made ladders shall be constructed and maintained as prescribed in the ANSI standard A14.4- 1979 (R1984), which is adopted by reference in this rule and may be inspected at the Lansing office of the department of consumer and industry services. This standard may be purchased at a cost as of the time of adoption of this rule of $15.00 from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York, 10036, or from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.

(6) A manufactured portable ladder shall be branded or have a permanent label permanently affixed by the manufacturer which shows the type of ladder and certifies that it meets the requirements of the appropriate ANSI standard as set out in subrules (1) to (5) of this rule.

R 408.41112. Training requirements.

Rule 1112. (1) The employer shall provide a training program for each employee who uses a ladder. The program shall enable each employee to recognize hazards related to the ladder and shall train each employee in the procedures to be followed to minimize these hazards.

(2) An employer shall ensure that each employee has been trained by a competent person in all of the following areas, as applicable:

(a) The nature of fall hazards in the work area. (b) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining,

and disassembling the fall protection systems to be used.

(c) The proper construction, use, and placement of, and care in handling, ladders.

(d) The maximum intended load-carrying capacities of ladders that are used.

(e) The rules contained in this part. (3) Retraining shall be provided for each employee as

necessary so that the employee maintains the understanding and knowledge acquired through compliance with these rules. R 408.41113. General requirements.

Rule 1113. (1) A ladder shall be provided at all personnel points of access if there is a break in elevation of 19 inches (48 cm) or more and if a ramp, runway, sloped embankment, stairway, or personnel hoist is not provided.

(2) When a building or structure has only 1 point of access between levels, that point of access shall be kept clear to permit the free passage of employees. When work must be performed or equipment must be used, that restricts the free passage of employees at the point of access, a second point of access shall be provided and used.

(3) When a building or structure has 2 or more points of access between levels, at least 1 point of access shall be kept clear to permit the free passage of employees.

(4) Employers shall provide and install all ladder fall protection systems that are required by this part and shall comply with all other pertinent requirements of this part before employees begin the work that necessitates the

installation and use of ladders and their respective fall protection systems.

(5) Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps shall be parallel, level, and uniformly spaced when a ladder is in position for use.

(6) Rungs, cleats, and steps of portable ladders, except as provided in subrules (7) and (8) of this rule, and fixed ladders shall be spaced not less than 10 inches (25 cm) apart and not more than 14 inches (36 cm) apart, as measured between the center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps.

(7) Rungs, cleats, and steps of step stools shall be not less than 8 inches (20 cm) apart and not more than 12 inches (31 cm) apart, as measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps.

(8) Rungs, cleats, and steps of the base section of extension trestle ladders shall be not less than 8 inches (20 cm), nor more than 18 inches (46 cm), apart, as measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. The rung spacing on the extension section of the extension trestle ladder shall be not less than 6 inches (15 cm), nor more than 12 inches (31 cm), as measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps.

(9) The minimum clear distance between the sides of individual rung-type stepladders and the minimum clear distance between the side rails of other fixed ladders shall be 16 inches (41 cm).

(10) The minimum clear distance between side rails for all portable ladders shall be 11 1/2 inches (29 cm).

(11) The rungs of individual rung-type stepladders shall be shaped so that an employee’s feet cannot slide off the end of the rungs, see figure 1.

(12) The rungs and steps of fixed metal ladders that

are manufactured after January 14, 1991, shall be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-resistant material, or otherwise treated to minimize slipping.

(13) The rungs of steps of portable metal ladders shall be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-resistant material, or otherwise treated to minimize slipping.

4(14) Except when portable ladders are used to gain

access to fixed ladders, such as ladders on utility towers, billboards, and other structures where the bottom of the fixed ladder is elevated to limit access, when 2 or more separate ladders are used to reach an elevated work area, the

manner that prevents employee injury due to punctures or

R 4

lls; extensions.

the follow(a)

ned by applying or

(b)

ward vertical direction when

(c)

concentrated load of not less than 250

n elevator pit ladder, for which a minimum per

ction on the climbing side of the ladder shall be 30 inc

to 24 inches (61 cm), if a deflection device is installed to guide employees around the obstruction. See figure 2.

ladder shall be offset with a platform or landing between the ladders.

(15) Ladder components shall be surfaced in a

lacerations and prevents the snagging of clothing.

08.41115. Ladder loads; clearances; safety devices; cages; we

Rule 1115. (1) Ladders shall be capable of supporting ing loads without failure: For each self-supporting portable ladder, not less than 4 times the maximum intended load, except that each extra heavy-duty type IA metal or plastic ladder shall sustain not less than 3.3 times the maximum intended load. The ability of a ladder to sustain the loads indicated in this subdivision shall be determitransmitting the requisite load to the ladder in a downward vertical direction. For each portable ladder that is not self-supporting, not less than 4 times the maximum intended load, except that each extra heavy-duty type IA metal or plastic ladder shall sustain not less than 3.3 times the maximum intended load. The ability of a ladder to sustain the loads indicated in this subdivision shall be determined by applying or transmitting the requisite load to the ladder in a downthe ladder is placed at an angle of 75 1/2 degrees from the horizontal. For each fixed ladder, not less than 2 loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, concentrated between any 2 consecutive attachments (the number and position of additional concentrated loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, determined from the anticipated usage of the ladder, shall also be included), plus anticipated loads caused by ice buildup, winds, rigging, and impact loads that result from the use of ladder safety devices. Each step or rung shall be capable of supporting a single pounds (114 kg) applied in the middle of the step of rung.

(2) The minimum perpendicular clearance between fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps and any obstruction behind the ladder shall be 7 inches (18 cm), except in the case of a

pendicular clearance of 4 1/2 inches (11 cm) is required.

(3) The minimum perpendicular clearance between the center line of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps and any obstru

hes (76 cm), except as provided in subrule (4) of this rule.

(4) When unavoidable obstructions are encountered, the minimum perpendicular clearance between the center line of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps and the obstruction on the climbing side of the ladder may be reduced

(5) Through fixed ladders, at their point of access or egress, shall have a step across distance of not less than 7 inches (18 cm) nor more than 12 inches (30 cm), as measured from the center line of the steps or rungs to the nearest edge of the landing area. If the normal stepacross distance is more than 12 inches (30 cm), a landing platform shall be provided to reduce the distance to the specified limit. See figure 3.

5(6) Fixed ladders that do not have cages or wells shall

have a clear width to the nearest permanent object of not less than 15 inches (38 cm) on each side of the center line of the ladder.

(7) Fixed ladders shall be provided with cages, wells, ladder safety devices, or self-retracting lifelines where the length of climb is less than 24 feet (7.3 m), but the top of the ladder is at a distance that is more than 24 feet (7.3 m) above lower levels.

(8) Where the total length of a climb equals or is more than 24 feet (7.3 m), fixed ladders shall be equipped with 1 of the following:

(a) Ladder safety devices. (b) Rest platforms at intervals of not more than 150

feet (45.7 m) and self-retracting lifelines. (c) Multiple ladder sections and a cage or well. Each

ladder section shall not be more than 50 feet (15.2 m) in length. Ladder sections shall be offset from adjacent sections, and landing platforms shall be provided at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15.2 m).

(9) Cages for fixed ladders shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions:

(a) Horizontal bands shall be fastened to the side rails of rail ladders or for individual rung ladders, directly to the structure, building, or equipment.

(b) Vertical bars shall be on the inside of the horizontal bands and shall be fastened to them.

(c) Cages shall extend not less than 27 inches (68 cm), and not more than 30 inches (76 cm) from the center line of the step or rung, excluding the flare at the bottom of the cage, and shall not be less than 27 inches (68 cm) in width.

(d) The inside of the cage shall be clear of projections.

(e) Horizontal bands shall be spaced not more than 4 feet (1.2) on center vertically;

(f) Vertical bars shall be spaced at intervals of not more than 9 1/2 inches (24 cm) on center horizontally.

(g) The bottom of the cage shall be at a level that is not less than 7 feet (2.1 m) and not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) above the point of access to the bottom of the ladder. The bottom of the cage shall be flared not less than 4 inches (10 cm) all around within the distance between the bottom horizontal band and the next higher band.

(h) The top of the cage shall be not less than 42 inches (1.2 m) above the top of the platform or the point of access at the top of the ladder and shall provide for access to the platform or other point of access.

(10) A well for a fixed ladder shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions:

(a) The well shall completely encircle the ladder. (b) The well shall be free of projections. (c) The well’s inside face on the climbing side of the

ladder shall extend not less than 27 inches (68 cm) and not more than 30 inches (76 cm) from the center line of the step or rung.

(d) The inside clear width of the well shall be not less 30 inches (76 cm).

(e) The bottom of the wall on the access side of the well shall start at a level that is not less than 7 feet (2.1 m) and not more than 8 feet (2.4 m)

above the point of access to the bottom of the ladder. See figure 4.

(11) Ladder safety devices and related support systems for fixed ladders shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions:

(a) The devices and support systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a drop test that consists of an 18-inch (41 cm) drop of a 500-pound (226 kg) weight.

(b) The devices and support systems shall permit the employee who uses the device to ascend or descend without continually having to hold, push, or pull any part of the device, thereby leaving both hands free for climbing.

(c) The devices and support systems shall be activated within 2 feet (.61 m) after a fall occurs and shall limit the descending velocity of an employee to 7 feet per second (2.1 m/sec.) or less.

(d) The connection between the carrier or lifeline and the point of attachment to the body belt or harness shall not be more than 9 inches (23 cm) in length.

(12) The mounting of ladder safety devices for fixed ladders shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions:

(a) To provide the strength necessary to stop an employee’s fall, mountings for rigid carriers shall be attached at each end of the carrier and intermediate mountings, as necessary, shall be spaced along the entire length of the carrier.

(b) Mountings for flexible carriers shall be attached at each end of the carrier. When the system is exposed to wind, cable guides for flexible carriers shall be installed at a minimum spacing of not less than 25 feet (7.6 m) and not more than 40 feet (12.2 m) along the entire length of the carrier in a manner that will prevent wind damage to the system.

(c) The design and installation of mountings and cable guides shall not reduce the design strength of the ladder.

(13) The side rails of through or side-step fixed ladders shall extend 42 inches (1.1 m) above the top of the access level or landing platform served by the ladder. For a parapet ladder, the access level shall be the roof if the

6parapet is cut to permit passage through the parapet; however, if the parapet is continuous, the access level shall be the top of the parapet.

(14) For through fixed ladder extensions, the steps or rungs shall be omitted from the extension and the extension of the side rails shall be flared to provide not less than 24 inches (61 cm) and not more than 30 inches (76 cm) of clearance between side rails. Where ladder safety devices are provided, the maximum clearance between side rails of the extensions shall not be more than 36 inches (91 cm).

(15) For side-step fixed ladders, the side rails and the steps or rungs shall be continuous in the extension.

(16) Individual rung ladders and stepladders, except for ladders that are used where their access openings are covered with manhole covers or hatches, shall extend not less than 42 inches (1.1 m) above an access level or landing platform either by the continuation of the rung spacings as horizontal grab bars or by providing vertical grab bars that shall have the same lateral spacing as the vertical legs of the rungs.

R 408.41121. Inspection; faults and defects.

Rule 1121. (1) A ladder, as prescribed in this part, shall be used to provide safe access to all elevations, unless other means, such as steps, stairs, ramps, runways, or elevators, are provided.

(2) A ladder shall be inspected before use and after it has fallen or been involved in an accident to determine its condition.

(3) A ladder that has any of the following faults and defects shall be immediately tagged “DANGEROUS – DO NOT USE” and shall be withdrawn from service:

(a) Broken, worn, or missing rungs, cleats, or steps. (b) Broken or split side rails. (c) Broken or bent guides or iron spreaders. (d) Broken or bent locks. The tag shall be as prescribed in rules 2241 and 2242

of Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags and Barricades, being R 408.42241 and R 408.42242 of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(4) Fixed ladders that have structural defects, such as broken or split rails or corroded components, shall be withdrawn from service until repaired. The requirement to withdraw a defective ladder from service is satisfied if 1 of the following provisions is complied with:

(a) The ladder is immediately tagged with the words “do not use” or similar language.

(b) The ladder is marked in a manner that readily identifies it as defective.

(c) The ladder is blocked, such as with a plywood attachment that spans several rungs.

(5) Ladder repairs shall restore the ladder to a condition that meets its original design criteria before the ladder is returned to use. R 408.41122. Use generally.

Rule 1122. (1) A ladder shall not be placed in a passageway, doorway, driveway, or any location where it may be displaced, unless it is protected by barricades or guards or is secured to prevent displacement.

(2) A ladder shall be placed on a substantial and stable base unless it is secured to prevent accidental displacement. The area around the top and bottom of the ladder shall be kept clear.

(3) A ladder shall not be used as a brace, slide, guy, gin pole, or gangway or for any other use than that for which it is designed.

(4) An employee shall face the ladder when ascending or descending. Each employee shall use at least 1 hand to grasp the ladder when progressing up or down the ladder. An employee shall not carry any object or load that could cause the employee to lose balance and fall.

(5) An employee who is on a ladder shall not overreach or do any pushing or pulling that may cause the ladder to move or topple. If both of an employee’s shoulders are outside of a side rail, the employee is overreaching.

(6) A manufactured portable ladder or a single-cleat ladder shall not be used by more than 1 employee at a time.

(7) A ladder shall be located and maintained to prevent an employee from bumping into, or snagging onto, projecting objects while ascending or descending the ladder.

(8) If a ladder provides the only means of access to, or egress from, a working area for 25 or more employees, or if simultaneous 2-way traffic is expected, a minimum of 2 ladders or a job-built, double-cleat ladder shall be provided.

(9) A rope or chain ladder shall not be used on a construction site.

(10) A ladder shall not be loaded beyond its loadcarrying capacity.

(11) A ladder shall not be moved, shifted, or extended while occupied by an employee.

(12) Single-rail ladders shall not be used.

R 408.41123. Classification of ladders. Rule 1123. The use of all manufactured portable

ladders or stepladders shall be limited to those classified as type IA or type I, as prescribed in ANSI A14.1-1990, which is adopted by reference in this rule and may be inspected at the Lansing office of the department of consumer and industry services. This standard may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York, 10036, or from the Safety Standards Division, Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost as of the time of adoption of this rule of $35.00. R 408.41124. Portable ladders.

Rule 1124. (1) A portable ladder shall be used at such a pitch that the horizontal projected distance from the top support to the base is not more than 1/4 of the vertical distance between these points.

(2) A portable ladder in use shall be equipped with appropriate safety feet, unless the ladder is tied, blocked, or otherwise secured to prevent it from being displaced. Slip-resistant feet shall not be used as a substitute for care in placing, lashing, or holding a ladder that is used upon slippery surfaces, including flat metal or concrete surfaces that are constructed so that they cannot be prevented from becoming slippery.

(3) A portable ladder that is used at such a pitch that the horizontal projected distance from the top support to the base is less than 1/5 of the vertical distance between these points shall be secured at the top to prevent tipping backward.

7(4) A portable ladder that is used at a pitch of 80

degrees or more shall be in compliance with the requirements of a fixed ladder as prescribed in R 408.10335 of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(5) When portable ladders are used for access to an upper landing surface, the ladder side rails shall extend not less than 3 feet (.9 m) above the upper landing surface to which the ladder is used to gain access; or, when such an extension is not possible because of the ladder’s length, then the ladder shall be secured at its top to rigid support that will not deflect and a grasping device, such as a grabrail, shall be provided to assist employees in mounting and dismounting the ladder. The side rails shall not extend in a manner that would permit ladder deflection under a load, by itself, to cause the ladder to slip off its support. The top of a non-self-supporting ladder shall be placed with the 2 rails supported equally, unless the ladder is equipped with a single support attachment.

(6) A manufactured portable metal ladder shall not be used for electrical work or where the ladder or an employee may contact electrical conductors. A ladder shall have nonconductive siderails if the ladder is used where the employee or the ladder could contact exposed energized electrical equipment.

(7) A metal ladder shall not be used or moved unless a minimum of 20 feet is maintained between power transmission or distribution lines.

(8) A power transmission or distribution line or electrical apparatus shall be considered energized unless the property owner or utility indicates it is de-energized and the line or apparatus is visibly grounded. Where de-energizing is impractical, the minimum clearances set forth in table 1 shall be maintained between the ladder, employee, or material, whichever is closer.


TABLE 1

VOLTAGE MINIMUM CLEARANCE

To 50 kV 10 feet

Over 50 kV 10 feet plus .4 inch per kV

(10) A manufactured portable ladder shall not be more

than the following lengths:

TYPE MAXIMUM LENGTH

Single-section ladder (Type 1A or 1) 30 feet Extension ladder (Type 1A or 1) 60 feet Trestle ladder or extension sections or base sections of an extension trestle ladder

20 feet

(11) An employee who is using a portable ladder shall

not stand on the top 2 rungs or within 3 feet of the top of the ladder.

(12) Two portable ladders shall not be spliced together to provide long sections unless such ladders are specifically designed for such use.

(13) A portable extension ladder shall be adjusted only from the ground, floor, or the lower section of the ladder.

(14) A portable 2-section extension ladder shall be erected so that the top section rests on the base section. The top section shall be the section nearest to the climber.

(15) A non-self-supporting ladder shall be used at an angle such that the horizontal distance from the top

support to the foot of the ladder is approximately 1/4 of the working length of the ladder that is the distance along the ladder between the foot and the top support.

(16) A fixed ladder shall be used at a pitch of not more than 90 degrees from the horizontal, as measured to the back side of the ladder. See figure 5.

R 408.41125. Trestle ladders.

Rule 1125. (1) When trestle ladders are used to support an elevated work platform, the entire system shall be considered a scaffold.

(2) An employee shall not work directly from the vertical portion of an extension trestle ladder.

(3) Rungs, cleats, and steps of the base section of extension trestle ladders shall be not less than 8 inches (20 cm) and not more than 18 inches (46 cm) apart, as measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. The rung spacing on the extension section of the extension trestle ladder shall be not less than 6 inches (15 cm) and not more than 12 inches (31 cm). R 408.41126. Use of stepladders.

Rule 1126. (1) An employee shall not use the backside of a stepladder for climbing, unless the stepladder is designed for such use.

(2) Unless the stepladder is equipped with a handrail, the top step and cap shall not be used to stand on.

(3) A stepladder shall not be used as a straight ladder by leaning it against a wall or other support.

(4) A metal spreader or locking device shall be provided on each stepladder to hold the front and back sections in an open position when the ladder is being used. The ladder shall be opened fully and the spreaders shall be locked while in use.

(5) Each leg of a step ladder shall be in contact with solid footing.

8(6) A portable metal stepladder shall not be used for

electrical work or where the ladder or an employee may contact electrical conductors.

(7) A portable stepladder shall be in compliance with the provisions of R 408.41121(2) to (5), R 408.41122(1) to (7), (9), and (10), and R 408.41130(1) to (4). R 408.41127. Single and double-cleat ladders

generally. Rule 1127. (1) A job-built ladder shall not be more

than 24 feet in length. If the length of a required job-built ladder would be more than the maximum length, 2 or more separate ladders shall be used and shall be offset with a platform between each ladder that is not supported by the ladders. Ladders used with a platform shall be secured at the top and bottom.

(2) The platform shall be designed to support 4 times the intended load. Guardrails and toeboards, as prescribed in Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code, shall be erected on the exposed sides of the platform. Rails shall extend above the top landing at least 36 inches but not more than 42 inches to provide a handhold for mounting and dismounting, and cleats shall be eliminated above the landing level. When 2 or more separate job-built ladders are used with a platform, the ladders shall be completely offset from each other and the minimum horizontal distance between adjacent side rails shall be 6 inches.

(3) Side rails of a job-built ladder shall be continuous. (4) Each cleat of a job-built ladder shall be a

continuous member. (5) A wood cleat shall be not less than nominal 1-inch

by 4-inch construction grade lumber for a cleat less than 20 inches in length and not less than nominal 2-inch by 4-inch construction grade lumber for a cleat from 20 inches to 50 inches in length. Knot-free lumber shall be used for cleats.

(6) The cleats shall be uniformly spaced 12 inches top to top. A cleat shall be attached to the narrow face of each side rail using 2 10-d nails for nominal 1-inch by 4-inch cleats or 2 16-d nails for 2-inch by 4-inch cleats.

(7) Filler blocks shall be used on the rails between cleats. Filler blocks of the same thickness as the cleats shall be inserted between cleats and butted tightly against the underside of each cleat.

(8) Side rails shall not be cut into to house cleats. R 408.41128. Single-cleat ladders; width; side rails.

Rule 1128. (1) The width of a single-cleat ladder shall be not less than 16 inches or more than 20 inches between rails. Side rails shall be parallel.

(2) Side rails of a single-cleat ladder shall be not less than nominal 2-inch by 4-inch construction grade lumber for ladders less than 16 feet in length and not less than nominal 2-inch by 6-inch construction grade lumber for ladders from 16 feet to 24 feet in length. R 408.41129. Double-cleat ladders; width; additional

rail; side rails. Rule 1129. (1) The width between outside rails of a

double-cleat ladder shall be not less than 38 inches or more than 46 inches. (2) A double-cleat ladder shall have an additional rail

located at the center of the ladder. (3) The side rails and middle rail for a double-cleat

ladder shall be not less than nominal 2-inch by 4-inch

construction grade lumber for double cleat ladders less than 12 feet in length and not less than nominal 2-inch by 6-inch construction grade lumber for a double cleat ladder from 12 feet to 24 feet in length.

(4) The side rails of a double-cleat ladder shall be secured at the bottom and as close as possible to the top to prevent moving or toppling.

R 408.41130. Storage of ladders.

Rule 1130. (1) A ladder should be stored in such a manner as to provide ease of access and inspection. A ladder stored in a horizontal position shall be supported at a sufficient number of points to prevent the ladder from sagging during storage.

(2) A wood ladder shall not be stored within 6 feet of a radiator, stove, or steam pipe or in a location subject to excessive heat or dampness.

(3) A metal ladder shall not be stored where it is subject to reaction with corrosive substances like acids and alkali solutions.

(4) A plastic ladder shall be stored on edge on racks when not in use and in a location which is free of corrosive substances and which provides protection from adverse environmental conditions. R 408.41131. Handling and transporting of ladders.

Rule 1131. (1) A ladder shall be handled with reasonable care and not be subjected to deliberate dropping or to misuse.

(2) A ladder which is transported on a vehicle shall be secured to prevent it from catapulting or falling from the vehicle. R 408.41132. Maintenance.

Rule 1132. (1) A ladder shall be maintained free of slip-enhancing hazards and in good working condition.

(2) A ladder shall not be painted with an opaque material. A ladder, particularly one used out-of-doors should be coated with a suitable transparent protective material to retard splintering caused by weathering.

(3) The side rails and legs of a ladder shall be kept free from splinters. The joint between the side rail and step shall be kept tight and metal hardware and fittings secured.

(4) The locks, pulleys, spreader joints, or other movable metal parts of a ladder shall operate freely without undue play. Lubricants shall be applied as needed.

(5) A rope used on a ladder shall not have a long or loosely twisted lay, shall be free of burns and cuts, and shall not show evidence of weakness resulting from fraying, wear, mildew, or rot. Rope ends shall be fastened or whipped.

(6) A ladder surface shall be free of puncture or laceration hazards.

R 408.41133. Special-purpose ladders.

Rule 1133. (1) A special-purpose ladder may be capable of being used as a step ladder, a single or extension ladder, or a trestle ladder.

(2) A special-purpose ladder, when used as any of the types of ladders listed in subrule (1) of this rule, shall meet the requirements of the applicable rules of this part.

(3) A special-purpose ladder may be used by more than 1 employee if specifically designed for that purpose.

9(4) A platform step ladder shall be constructed in

accordance with requirements for a type 1 step ladder. A platform of a platform ladder shall be capable of supporting a load of 200 pounds placed at any point on the platform. R 408.41140. Fixed ladders.

Rule 1140. A fixed ladder shall be as prescribed in Part 3. Fixed ladders, being R 408.10301 et seq. of the

Michigan Administrative Code. This standard may be inspected at or purchased from the Safety Standards Division, Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.





Total Units Printed: 1,000 Total Printing Cost: $307.05 Cost Per Unit: $0.31

SCAFFOLD

6



CONSTRUCTION SAFETY STANDARDS Filed with the Secretary of State on June 1, 1981 (as amended May 31, 1990)

(as amended September 3, 1996) (as amended October 20, 1997) (as amended April 28, 1999)

These amended rules will take effect May 12, 1999



R 408.41201, R 408.41203, R 408.41204, R 408.41205, R 408.41206, R 408.41207, R 408.41208, R 408.41210, R 408.41211, R 408.41212, R 408.41213, R 408.41214, R 408.4117, R 408.41221, R 408.41223, R 408.41224, R 408.41227, R 408.41231,R 408.41233, R 408.41234,R 408.41235, R 408.41236, R 408.41241, R 408.41251,

R 408.41261, R 408.41262, and R 408.41264 of the Michigan Administrative Code are amended, and R 408.41209, R 408.41219, R 408.41229, R 408.41239, R 408.41240, R 408.41256a, and R 408.41256b

are added to the Code, as follows:


PART 12. SCAFFOLDS AND SCAFFOLD PLATFORMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL PROVISIONS ..................................................... 2 R 408.41201 Scope. ............................................................. 2 R 408.41203 Definitions; A to C............................................ 2 R 408.41204 Definitions; D to I ............................................. 2 R 408.41205 Definitions; L, M............................................... 2 R 408.41206 Definitions; N to R ........................................... 3 R 408.41207 Definitions; S ................................................... 3 R 408.41208 Definitions; T to W ........................................... 4 R 408.41209 Training requirements ..................................... 4 R 408.41210 Construction and capacity generally................ 4 R 408.41211 Access to scaffold platforms............................ 5 R 408.41212 Accumulation of tools, material, or debris

prohibited; weather conditions; slippery conditions; electrical hazards; rope protection; fall protection... 6

R 408.41213 Guardrails; fall arrest devices .......................... 7 R 408.41214 Hoisting machines generally............................ 7 R 408.41215 Powered hoisting machines............................. 8 R 408.41216 Manually powered hoisting machines............. 8 R 408.41217 Planking and scaffold platforms generally ....... 8 R 408.41218 Plywood scaffold platforms.............................. 9 R 408.41219 Protection from falling objects ......................... 9 FLOOR AND GROUND SUPPORTED................................. 9 SCAFFOLDS ........................................................................ 9 R 408.41221 Stilts ................................................................ 9 R 408.41222 Wood pole scaffolds ........................................ 9 R 408.41223 Tube and coupler scaffolds ........................... 10 R 408.41224 Tubular welded frame scaffolds (fabricated

frame scaffold)...................................................... 11 R 408.41225 Horse scaffolds.............................................. 12 R 408.41226. Bricklayer’s square scaffold.......................... 12 R 408.41227 Pump jack scaffolds ...................................... 12 R 408.41228 Steel tower scaffolds ..................................... 12 SUSPENDED SCAFFOLDS ............................................... 12 R 408.41229 Suspended scaffolds; tipping moment

requirement; support devices; outrigger beams; counterweights tiebacks; suspension ropes; use of

certain equipment on scaffolds prohibited; securing scaffolds; use of emergency escape and rescue devices..................................................................12

R 408.41231 Adjustable multipoint suspension scaffolds....13 R 408.41232. Multipoint suspended scaffold.......................13 R 408.41233 Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds

(swing stage scaffold) ...........................................14 R 408.41234 Multilevel suspension scaffolds......................14 R 408.41235 Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds 14 R 408.41236 Needle beam scaffolds ..................................14 R 408.41237 Boatswain’s chair ...........................................15 R 408.41238 Float scaffolds................................................15 R 408.41239 Catenary scaffolds .........................................15 R 408.41240 Interior hung scaffolds....................................15 MOBILE SCAFFOLDS ........................................................15 R 408.41241 Mobile scaffolds .............................................15 R 408.41243 Rough terrain forklift truck scaffolds; equipment

requirements; employee safety requirements .......16 R 408.41244 Inspection and maintenance of rough terrain

forklift trucks..........................................................17 R 408.41245 Operator training ............................................17 R 408.41246 Operator permits ............................................18 AUXILIARY SUPPORTED SCAFFOLDS............................18 R 408.41251 Outrigger scaffolds.........................................18 R 408.41252 Rescinded. .....................................................18 R 408.41253 Roofing brackets and crawling boards ...........18 R 408.41254 Carpenter’s bracket scaffold ..........................18 R 408.41255 Form Scaffolds...............................................19 R 408.41256 Ladder jack scaffolds .....................................19 R 408.41256a Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds ..19 R 408.41256b Repair bracket scaffolds ..............................19 WIRE, FIBER AND SYNTHETIC ROPE..............................19 R 408.41261 Wire rope generally........................................19 R 408.41262 Fiber rope generally .......................................20 R 408.41263 Synthetic rope ................................................20 R 408.41264 Window jack scaffolds....................................20


2

GENERAL PROVISIONS R 408.41201 Scope.

Rule 1201. This part pertains to scaffolds and scaffold platforms used in construction operations. The equipment may be commercially manufactured or job-built. This part does not apply to crane or derrick suspended personnel platforms as prescribed in R 408.41001a et seq. and R 408.43201 et seq.

R 408.41203 Definitions; A to C

Rule 1203. (1) “Adjustable multipoint suspension scaffold” means a scaffold that has a continuous platform which is supported by bearers suspended by wire rope from overhead supports so arranged and operated as to permit the raising or lowering of a platform to desired working positions.

(2) “Bearer,” sometimes called a putlog, means a horizontal transverse scaffold member, which may be supported by ledgers or runners, upon which the scaffold platform rests, and which joins scaffold uprights, posts, poles, and similar members.

(3) “Boatswain’s chair” means a single-point adjustable suspension scaffold that consists of a seat or sling designed to support 1 employee in a sitting position.

(4) “Brace” means a rigid connection that holds 1 scaffold member in a fixed position with respect to another member or that holds 1 scaffold member to a building or structure.

(5) “Bricklayer’s square scaffold” means a supported scaffold that is composed of framed squares that support a platform.

(6) “Carpenter’s bracket scaffold” means a supported scaffold that consists of a platform supported by brackets attached to a building or structural walls.

(7) “Carriage” means an assembled steel framework which is affixed to a steel tower and which is used to support a work platform.

(8) “Catenary scaffold” means a suspension scaffold consisting of a platform supported by 2 essentially horizontal and parallel ropes attached to structural members of a building or other structure. Additional support may be provided by vertical pickups.

(9) “Chimney hoist” means a multipoint adjustable suspension scaffold used to provide access to work inside chimneys. (See “multipoint suspension scaffold.”)

(10) “Cleat” means a structural block used at the end of a platform to prevent the platform from slipping off its supports. Cleats are also used to provide footing on sloped surfaces such as crawling boards.

(11) “Competent person” means a person who is experienced and capable of identifying an existing or potential hazard in surroundings, or under working conditions, that are hazardous or dangerous to an employee and who has the authority and knowledge to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate the hazards.

(12) “Coupler” means a device for locking together the component parts of a tube and coupler scaffold.

(13) “Crawling board,” sometimes called a chicken ladder, means a plank that has cleats, which are spaced and secured, at equal intervals for use by an employee on roofs. A crawling board is not designed to carry any material.

R 408.41204 Definitions; D to I Rule 1204. (1) “Double pole (independent pole)

scaffold” means a supported scaffold that consists of a platform which rests on cross beams (bearers) supported by ledgers and a double row of uprights independent of support, except for ties, guys, and braces, from any structure.

(2) “Equivalent” means alternative designs, materials, or methods to protect against a hazard that the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the methods, materials, or designs specified in these rules.

(3) “Exposed power lines” means electrical power lines which are accessible to employees and which are not shielded from contact. Exposed power lines do not include extension cords or power tool cords.

(4) “Eye” or “eye splice” means a loop that may have a thimble at the end of a wire rope.

(5) “Fabricated decking and planking” means manufactured platforms that are made of wood, including laminated wood, and solid sawn wood planks, metal, or other materials.

(6) “Failure” means load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is the point where the ultimate strength is exceeded.

(7) “Float” or “ship scaffold” means a scaffold which is hung from an overhead support by means of ropes and which consists of a substantial platform that has diagonal bracing underneath and that rests upon, and is securely fastened to, 2 parallel plank bearers at right angles to the span.

(8) “Forklift truck (industrial)” means a self-loading truck which is equipped with a load carriage and forks and which is used for transporting and tiering loads.

(9) “Form scaffold” means a supported scaffold that consists of a platform supported by brackets attached to the formwork.

(10) “Guardrail” means a horizontal barrier that is erected along the exposed sides and ends of a scaffold.

(11) “Heavy-duty scaffold” means a scaffold that is designed and constructed to carry a working load of not more than 75 pounds per square foot.

(12) “Hoist” means a manual or power-operated mechanical device used to raise or lower a suspended scaffold.

(13) “Horse scaffold” means a supported scaffold that consists of a platform supported by construction horses (sawhorses). Horse scaffolds constructed of metal are sometimes known as trestle scaffolds.

(14) “Interior hung scaffold” means a suspension scaffold that consists of a platform suspended from the ceiling or roof structure by fixed length supports.

R 408.41205 Definitions; L, M

Rule 1205. (1) “Ladder jack scaffold” means a scaffold that is supported by brackets attached to ladders.

(2) “Ladder safety device” means a device that is installed on a ladder and which, when attached to an employee as prescribed in R 408.44501 et seq., will prevent an accidental fall of the employee.

(3) “Landing” means a platform at the end of a flight of stairs.

(4) “Large area scaffold” means a pole scaffold, tube and coupler scaffold, systems scaffold, or fabricated frame scaffold erected over substantially the entire

3

work area, for example, a scaffold erected over the entire floor area of a room.

(5) “Lean-to scaffold” means a supported scaffold that is kept erect by tilting it toward, and resting it against, a building or structure.

(6) “Ledger” means a horizontal member of a scaffold which extends from post to post and which supports bearers that form a tie between the posts.

(7) “Light-duty scaffold” means a scaffold that is designed and constructed to carry a working load of not more than 25 pounds per square foot.

(8) “Maximum intended load” means the maximum anticipated weight of persons, equipment, material, and scaffold.

(9) “Medium-duty scaffold” means a scaffold that is designed and constructed to carry a working load of not more than 50 pounds per square foot.

(10) “Midrail” means a rail which is located approximately midway between a guardrail and platform and which is secured to uprights erected along the exposed sides and ends of a platform.

(11) “Mobile scaffold” means a powered or unpowered portable caster or wheel-mounted supported scaffold.

(12) “Mobile scaffold tower” means a type of freestanding scaffolding that can be manually moved horizontally from one area to another.

(13) “Multilevel suspension scaffold” means a scaffold that is manufactured to have 2 or more work platforms which are one above another and which are connected vertically to each other by rigid metal members, all of which are suspended from overhead supports.

(14) “Multipoint suspended scaffold” means a scaffold that is constructed of rigid steel or wire rope members which suspend and support a work platform. The scaffold can be stationary or the scaffold can be mobile and travel horizontally.

R 408.41206 Definitions; N to R

Rule 1206. (1) “Needle beam scaffold” means a scaffold that consists of a platform supported by needle beams.

(2) “Outrigger” means the structural member of a supported scaffold used to increase the base width of a scaffold in order to provide support for, and increased stability of, the scaffold.

(3) “Outrigger beam (thrustout)” means the structural member of a suspension scaffold or outrigger scaffold that provides support for the scaffold by extending the scaffold point of attachment to a point out and away from the structure or building.

(4) “Outrigger scaffold” means a platform supported by, and fastened to, outriggers or thrustouts projecting beyond the wall or face of the building or structure, the inboard ends of which are secured inside the building or structure.

(5) “Platform” means a work surface elevated above lower levels. Platforms can be constructed using individual wood planks, fabricated planks, fabricated decks, and fabricated platforms.

(6) “Power-operated hoist” means a hoist that is powered by other than human energy.

(7) “Pump-jack scaffold” means a scaffold for light-duty work that consists of vertical poles, platform planking, and movable brackets for raising or lowering the platform on the vertical poles by a manual pumping action.

(8) “Qualified person” means one who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his or her ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.

(9) “Rated load” means the manufacturer’s specified maximum load to be lifted by a hoist or to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold component.

(10) “Repair-bracket scaffold” means a supported scaffold that consists of a platform supported by brackets which are secured in place around the circumference or perimeter of a chimney, stack, tank, or other supporting structure by 1 or more wire ropes placed around the supporting structure.

(11) “Roof bracket scaffold” means a rooftop-supported scaffold that consists of a platform resting on angular-shaped supports.

(12) “Rough terrain forklift truck” means a wheeled-type truck which is designed primarily as a fork truck that has a vertical mast or pivoted boom, or both, which has variable fixed length reach and which may be equipped with attachments and that is intended for operation on unimproved natural terrain as well as the disturbed terrain of construction sites. A machine that is designed primarily or earth-moving, such as a loader or dozer, even though its buckets and blades are replaced with forks, or a machine that is designed primarily as an over-the-road truck that has a lifting device is not a rough terrain forklift truck.

(13) “Runner” (ledger or ribbon) means the lengthwise horizontal spacing or bracing member that may support the bearers.

R 408.41207 Definitions; S

Rule 1207. (1) “Scaffold” means a temporary elevated platform which is supported or suspended, including its supporting system and points of anchorage, and which is used for supporting an employee or materials, or both.

(2) “Shore scaffold” means a supported scaffold which is placed against a building or structure and which is held in place with props.

(3) “Single-point adjustable suspension scaffold” means a manual or power-operated unit which is supported by a single rope from an overhead support and which is arranged and operated to permit the raising or lowering of the platform to desired working positions.

(4) “Single-pole scaffold” means a type of wood pole scaffold that has a platform which rests on putlogs or cross beams, the outside ends of which are supported on ledgers secured to a single row of posts or uprights and the inner ends of which are supported on or in a wall.

(5) “Stall load” means the load at which the prime mover of a power-operated hoist stalls or the power to the prime mover is automatically disconnected.

(6) “Steel tower” means a vertical assembly of tubular steel post members connected together with welded diagonal and horizontal steel bracing.

(7) “Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffold” means a platform resting directly on the rungs of step ladders or trestle ladders.

(8) “Stiff arm brace” means a steel horizontal member used to tie a steel tower to a structure to prevent the scaffold from overturning.

4

(9) “Stilt” means a device which is attached to the leg and foot or shoe of an employee and which is used to elevate the employee from a work surface.

(10) “Supported scaffold” means 1 or more platforms supported by any of the following: (a) Outrigger beams. (b) Brackets. (c) Poles. (d) Legs. (e) Uprights. (f) Posts. (g) Frames. (h) Similar rigid support.

(11) “Suspension scaffold” means 1 or more platforms suspended from an overhead structure by ropes or other nonrigid means.

R 408.41208 Definitions; T to W

Rule 1208. (1) “Toeboard” means a horizontal barrier that is erected along the exposed edges of an elevated surface to prevent materials, tools, or equipment from falling.

(2) “Tube and coupler scaffold” means a manufactured assembly that consists of all of the following: (a) Tubing that serves as posts, bearers, braces,

ties, and runners. (b) A brace supporting the post. (c) Special couplers that serve to connect the

uprights and to join the various members. (d) A work platform.

(3) “Tubular welded frame scaffold” or “fabricated frame scaffold” means a scaffold platform that is supported by a metal sectional frame that consists of posts and a horizontal bearer that has intermediate members.

(4) “Two-point suspension scaffold” or “swing stage” means a suspension scaffold that consists of a platform which is supported by hangers (stirrups) suspended by 2 ropes from overhead supports and which is equipped with means to permit the raising and lowering of the platform to desired work levels.

(5) “Unstable objects” means items whose strength, configuration, or lack of stability may allow them to become dislocated and shift and, therefore, may not properly support the loads imposed on them. Unstable objects do not constitute a safe base support for scaffolds, platforms, or employees. Examples include, but are not limited to, barrels, boxes, loose brick, and concrete blocks.

(6) “Vertical pickup” means a rope used to support the horizontal rope in catenary scaffolds.

(7) “Window jack scaffold” means a platform which extends through a window opening and which is secured to the structure and supported by braces.

(8) “Working load” means a load that is imposed by persons, materials, and equipment.

R 408.41209 Training requirements

Rule 1209. (1) This rule supplements and clarifies the requirements of R 408.40114(2) of construction safety standard Part 1. General Rules as the rule relates to the hazards of work on scaffolds. An employer shall have each employee who performs work on a scaffold trained by a person qualified in scaffold safety. The training shall enable an employee to recognize the hazards associated with

the type of scaffold being used and to understand the procedures to control or minimize the hazards. The training shall include the following areas as applicable: (a) The nature of any electrical hazards, fall

hazards, and falling object hazards in the work area.

(b) The correct procedures for dealing with electrical hazards and for erecting, maintaining, and disassembling the fall protection systems and falling object protection systems being used.

(c) The proper use of the scaffold, and the proper handling of materials on the scaffold.

(d) The maximum intended load and the load-carrying capacities of the scaffolds used.

(e) Any other pertinent requirements. (2) An employer shall have each employee who is

involved in erecting, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, maintaining, or inspecting a scaffold trained by a competent person to recognize any hazards associated with the work in question. The training shall include the following topics, as applicable: (a) The nature of scaffold hazards. (b) The correct procedures for erecting,

disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, inspecting, and maintaining the type of scaffold being used.

(c) The design criteria, maximum intended load-carrying capacity, and intended use of the scaffold.

(d) Any other pertinent requirements. (3) If an employer has reason to believe that an

employee lacks the skill or understanding needed to safely perform work that involves the erection, use, or dismantling of scaffolds, then the employer shall retrain the employee so that the requisite proficiency is regained. Retraining is required in all of the following situations: (a) Where changes at the worksite present a

hazard about which an employee has not been previously trained.

(b) Where changes in the types of scaffolds, fall protection, falling object protection, or other equipment present a hazard about which an employee has not been previously trained.

(c) Where inadequacies in an affected employee’s work involving scaffolds indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite proficiency for the work involved.

R 408.41210 Construction and capacity generally

Rule 1210. (1) A scaffold shall be designed, constructed, erected, and used in accordance with the provisions of this part. A scaffold shall be designed by a qualified person.

(2) A scaffold shall not be erected, moved, dismantled, or altered, except under the supervision of a competent person.

(3) A scaffold and its components shall be capable of supporting, without failure, not less than 4 times the maximum intended load.

(4) A specially designed scaffold that utilizes methods of bracing other than cross bracing is acceptable if the scaffold and its components comply with the requirements of this rule.

5

(5) A scaffold shall not be loaded to more than the designed working load.

(6) Scaffolds and scaffold components shall be inspected for visible defects by a competent person before each work shift and after any occurrence that could affect a scaffold’s structural integrity. Any scaffold, including accessories such as braces, brackets, trusses, screw legs, ladders, or platforms, that is damaged or weakened from any cause shall be immediately repaired or replaced. Any scaffold or accessories that are repaired shall have at least the original designed strength of the scaffold or accessory.

(7) An employee on a scaffold who is exposed to an overhead hazard of falling material shall be protected with overhead protection that is sufficient to prevent injury.

(8) All load-carrying wood members of scaffold framing shall be a minimum of 1,500 psi fiber stress value.

(9) All scaffold dimensions are nominal sizes as provided in the American lumber standards, which are adopted by reference in these rules and are available from the West Coast Inspection Bureau, 6990 S.W. Virne Road, P.O. Box 23145, Portland, Oregon 97223, or from the Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Growth, MIOSHA Standards Division, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost of $9.50. However, where rough sizes are noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the size specified will satisfy the minimum requirement of that standard.

(10) The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds shall be plumb and shall be securely and rigidly braced to prevent swaying and displacement.

(11) The support for a scaffold shall be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the maximum intended load without settling or displacement. Leveling jack adjusting screws, when used, shall not extend more than 18 inches below the base of the scaffold. Unstable objects, such as barrels, boxes, pallets, brick, or concrete blocks, shall not be used to support a scaffold or work platform. Scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall bear on base plates and mudsills or other adequate firm foundation.

(12) Scaffold components that are not designed to be compatible shall not be intermixed.

(13) A shore or lean-to scaffold shall not be used. (14) Makeshift devices, such as, but not limited to boxes

and barrels, shall not be used on top of scaffold platforms to increase the working level height of employees.

(15) A ladder shall not be used on a scaffold to increase the working level height of employees, except on a large area scaffold where an employer has satisfied all of the following criteria: (a) When the ladder is placed against a structure

that is not a part of the scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured against the sideways thrust exerted by the ladder.

(b) The platform units shall be secured to the scaffold to prevent the units from moving.

(c) Either the ladder legs shall be on the same platform or another means shall be provided to stabilize the ladder against unequal platform deflection.

(d) The ladder legs shall be secured to prevent them from slipping or being pushed off the platform.

R 408.41211 Access to scaffold platforms

Rule 1211. (1) Access to a scaffold platform shall be provided by 1 or more of the following: (a) A ladder that conforms to R 408.41101 et seq. (b) Hook-on or attachable metal ladders that are

specifically designed for use in construction with manufactured types of scaffolds. If hook-on or attachable metal ladders are used as access to, or egress from, a work platform that is more than 35 feet above the ground or floor level, then a ladder safety device shall be installed or the ladders shall be offset with landing platforms and guardrails that are installed at not more than 35-foot intervals.

(c) Step or hook-on, stair-type accessories that are specifically designed for use with appropriate types of scaffolds.

(d) Direct access from an adjacent scaffold, the structure, or personnel hoist. The direct access to or from another surface shall be used only when the scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36 cm) horizontally and not more than 24 inches (61 cm) vertically from the other surface.

(e) A ramp, runway, or stairway that conforms to R 408.42121 et seq.

(2) The intermediate horizontal members of the frame of a manufactured tubular welded frame scaffold may be used instead of a ladder or stairway for access to, and egress from, the work platform, if all of the following conditions are met: (a) All the frames and component parts are

compatible in design. (b) The intermediate horizontal members of a

frame are a minimum of 11 1/2 inches in length.

(c) The horizontal members of each frame shall be uniformly spaced and shall not be more than 18 inches center to center vertically.

(d) When frames are connected vertically to one another, the distance between the bottom horizontal member of the upper end frame and the top horizontal member of the lower end frame shall be within 3 inches of the uniform spacing of the horizontal members of each frame.

(e) The elevation to the lowest horizontal member of the bottom frame shall not be more than 24 inches from the ground or floor.

(f) Each horizontal member shall be capable of supporting 300 pounds applied at its midpoint without bending or cracking.

(g) Each horizontal member shall be inspected for, and found free of, cracks, bends, or bad welds. Cracks, bends, or bad welds shall be corrected.

(h) Only 1 employee at a time shall use a horizontal member of a frame as access to, or egress from, the workstation.

(i) Cross braces shall not be used as a means of access.

(3) The guardrail system located on the side where horizontal members of the scaffold frame are used

6

for access to, or egress from, a work platform shall be constructed as follows: (a) The intermediate rail shall be omitted between

the corner posts at the access location. (b) The top rail shall be continuous between

posts. A scaffold and its components shall be capable of supporting, without failure, not less than 4 times the maximum intended load.

(4) The overhang of a work platform shall not interfere with an employee accessing or leaving a work platform.

(5) If horizontal members of scaffold frames are used as access to, or egress from, a work platform which is more than 35 feet above ground or floor level, a ladder safety device shall be installed and used or the horizontal members shall be offset with landing platforms and guardrails that are installed at not more than 30-foot intervals.

(6) Steps and rungs of ladder and stairway-type access shall line up vertically with each other between rest platforms.

(7) All of the following provisions apply to erecting or dismantling a scaffold: (a) An employer shall provide a safe means of

access for each employee erecting or dismantling a scaffold if providing safe access is feasible and does not create a greater hazard. The employer shall have a competent person determine whether it is feasible or would pose a greater hazard to provide, and have employees use, a safe means of access. The determination shall be based on site conditions and the type of scaffold being erected or dismantled.

(b) Hook-on or attachable ladders shall be installed as soon as scaffold erection has progressed to a point that permits safe installation and use.

(c) When erecting or dismantling tubular welded frame scaffolds, endframes, that have horizontal members which are parallel, level, and not more than 22 inches apart vertically as climbing devices for access, the employer shall ensure that the tubular welded frame scaffolds are erected in a manner that creates

a usable ladder and provides a good handhold and foot space.

(d) Cross braces on tubular welded frame scaffolds shall not be used as a means of access or egress.

R 408.41212 Accumulation of tools, material, or debris

prohibited; weather conditions; slippery conditions; electrical hazards; rope protection; fall protection

Rule 1212. (1) Excess tools, materials, and debris shall not be permitted to accumulate on a scaffold to create a hazard.

(2) Work on or from scaffolds is prohibited during storms or high winds unless a competent person has determined that it is safe for employees to be on a scaffold and that the employees are protected by a personal fall arrest system. Wind screens shall not be used unless the scaffold is secured against the anticipated wind forces imposed.

(3) A scaffold shall be kept free of slippery conditions such as those caused by ice, snow, oil, grease, or other slippery compounds.

(4) An employee shall not be allowed within 10 feet of uninsulated electrical energized lines.

(5) Before a scaffold is erected within 10 feet of an electrical line, the utility or property owner shall be consulted. An electrical line or electrical apparatus shall be considered energized unless the property owner or utility indicates it is de-energized and the line or apparatus is visibly grounded. If de-energizing is impractical and the equipment is exposed to contact by an employee, the minimum clearances set forth in table 1 shall be maintained between the scaffold, employee, or material, whichever is closer. The requirements for employees performing power transmission and distribution work, electrical work, or telecommunications work are found in construction safety standard Part 16. Power Transmission and Distribution, Part 17. Electrical Installations, and Part 30. Telecommunications, being R 408.41601 et seq., R 408.41701 et seq., and R 408.43001 et seq., respectively, of the Michigan Administrative Code.


TABLE 1

INSULATED LINES

VOLTAGE MINIMUM DISTANCE ALTERNATIVES Less than 300 volts 3 feet (0.9 meters)

300 volts to 50 kilovolts 10 feet (3.1 meters)

More than 50 kilovolts 10 feet (3.1 meters) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 centimeter) for each

kilovolt over 50 kilovolts

2 times the length of the line insulator, but not less than 10

feet (3.1 meters)

UNINSULATED LINES

VOLTAGE MINIMUM DISTANCE ALTERNATIVES

Less than 50 kilovolts 10 feet (3.1 meters)

More than 50 kilovolts 10 feet (3.1 meters) plus 0.4 inches

(1.0 centimeter) for each kilovolt over 50 kilovolts

2 times the length of the line insulator, but not less than 10 feet (3.1 meters)

(7) Welding, burning, riveting, or open flame work shall

not be performed within 10 feet of fiber or synthetic rope that is used to suspend a scaffold, unless the rope is protected from sparks, flame, or hot metal.

7

Only treated or protected fiber or synthetic ropes shall be used for or near any work that involves the use of corrosive substances or chemicals.

(8) A suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on nonadjustable or adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without failure, not less than 6 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to the rope.

(9) If personal fall arrest systems are required by these rules for the protection of employees, then the arrest system equipment shall be as prescribed in R 408.44501 et seq.

(10) To reduce the possibility of welding current arcing through the suspension wire rope when performing welding from suspended scaffolds, a welder shall take the following precautions, as applicable: (a) An insulated thimble shall be used to attach

each suspension wire rope to its hanging support, such as a cornice hook or outrigger. Excess suspension wire rope and any additional independent lines from grounding shall be insulated.

(b) The suspension wire rope shall be covered with insulating material extending not less than 4 feet (1.2 meters) above the hoist. If there is a tail line below the hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent contact with the platform. The position of the tail line that hangs free below the scaffold shall be guided or retained, or both, so that it does not become grounded.

(c) Each hoist shall be covered with insulated protective covers.

(d) In addition to a work lead attachment required by the welding process, a grounding conductor shall be connected from the scaffold to the structure. The size of the conductor shall be at least the size of the welding process work lead, and the conductor shall not be in series with the welding process or the workpiece.

(e) If the scaffold grounding lead is disconnected, the welding machine shall be shut off.

(f) An active welding rod or uninsulated welding lead shall not be allowed to contact the scaffold or its suspension system.

R 408.41213 Guardrails; fall arrest devices

Rule 1213. (1) A guardrail shall be installed on any open side or end of a scaffold work platform that is 10 (3.1 meters) or more feet above the floor or ground, except for any of the following: (a) A boatswain’s chair. (b) A catenary scaffold. (c) A float scaffold. (d) A ladder jack scaffold. (e) A needle beam scaffold.

The guardrail shall be as prescribed in R 408.42150.

(2) An employee on a boatswain’s chair, catenary scaffold, float scaffold, needle beam scaffold, or ladder jack scaffold shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system. An employee on a single-point or 2-point adjustable suspension scaffold shall be protected by both a personal fall arrest system and guardrail system.

(3) A personal fall arrest device as prescribed in R 408.44501 shall be worn and attached to a substantial portion of a scaffold when the work platform of an adjustable suspension scaffold that

has overhead protection is 10 (3.1 meters) or more feet above the floor, water, or ground. Separate safety lines shall be attached to a substantial portion of the structure above and to the scaffold by an approved fall prevention device in a manner to prevent the scaffold from falling more than 12 inches if the scaffold suspension system fails.

(4) A top rail or an intermediate rail may be eliminated if the configuration of the scaffold and the material deck provides equivalent protection against an employee falling from the platform or if a personal fall arrest device is worn.

(5) A cross brace may be used as part of the guardrail system as follows: (a) If the pivot point occurs from 36 inches to 48

inches above the platform, then a midrail shall be added midway between the platform and the brace pivot point.

(b) If the pivot point occurs from 18 inches above the platform, then a top rail shall be added.

(c) If the pivot point occurs less than 18 inches or more than 48 inches above the platform, then both a top rail and midrail shall be provided.

(6) An employer shall have a competent person determine the feasibility and safety of providing fall protection for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds. An employer is required to provide fall protection for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds where the installation and use of the protection is feasible and does not create a greater hazard.

(7) If vertical lifelines are used, then they shall be fastened to a fixed safe point of anchorage and shall be protected from sharp edges and abrasion. Safe points of anchorage include structural members of buildings, but do not include any of the following: (a) Standpipes. (b) Vents. (c) Other piping systems. (d) Electrical conduit. (e) Outrigger beams. (f) Counterweights.

(8) If horizontal lifelines are used, they shall be secured to 2 or more structural members of the scaffold or may be looped around both suspension and independent support lines equal in number to the number of points supported and equivalent in strength to the strength of the suspension ropes. Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be attached to the same points of anchorage.

R 408.41214 Hoisting machines generally

Rule 1214. (1) A hoisting machine shall carry a label of an approved nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as underwriters laboratories or factory mutual engineering corporation, which states that the machine is approved for use on a suspension scaffold, swinging scaffold, or powered mobile elevating platform.

(2) If wire rope is used to suspend an adjustable scaffold, then the rope shall be in compliance with all of the following requirements: (a) Have the fixed end equipped with a proper

size thimble and attached to the upper support member.

8

(b) Have the running rope securely attached to the hoisting drum and have not less than 4 wraps of the rope remain on the drum at all times.

(c) When other types of hoists are used, either the suspension ropes shall be long enough to allow the scaffold to be lowered to the level below without the rope end passing through the hoist or the rope end shall be configured or provided with means to prevent the end from passing through the hoist.

(3) A hoisting machine shall be inspected daily when in use and shall not be put in service unless it is free of defects which would affect the operation of the machine.

(4) The stall load of any scaffold hoist shall not be more than 3 times its rated load.

R 408.41215 Powered hoisting machines

Rule 1215. (1) Gears and brakes of a powered hoisting machine shall be enclosed.

(2) In addition to the operating brake, a machine shall have an emergency brake which engages automatically when the normal speed of descent is exceeded.

(3) Operating controls shall be of a deadman type. (4) When a hydraulic or pneumatic system of a

powered hoisting machine is bled, the platform supported by this system shall be in the lowered

position or blocked in such a manner that the safety of the employee is assured.

(5) A leak in a hydraulic or pneumatic system shall be repaired before the unit is used.

(6) A reverse check valve or equivalent means shall be installed in the hydraulic cylinder to prevent uncontrolled fall of the work platform in case of system failure.

R 408.41216 Manually powered hoisting machines

Rule 1216. (1) A manually powered hoisting device shall be equipped with a positive locking device.

(2) A manually powered machine shall be designed to prevent free-spooling of the cable drum.

R 408.41217 Planking and scaffold platforms generally

Rule 1217. (1) If wood planks are used for a work platform, then the planks shall be scaffold-grade lumber that has a minimum of 1,500 pounds per square inch fiber stress value. The planks shall be not less than 2 inches by 10 inches. The platform shall consist of a minimum of 2 planks laid side by side. Each platform on all working levels of scaffolds shall be fully planked or decked between uprights where practicable. Spaces between the platform and the uprights shall not be more than 9 1/2 inches. The maximum permissible spans for 2- by 10-inch or wider planks are as follows:

Material full thickness undressed lumber

Material nominal thickness lumber

Working load (per square foot) 25 50 62 75 25 37 50 62 Permissible span (feet) 10 8 7 6 8 7 6 4

(2) Laminated planks shall meet or exceed the load requirement of regular planking.

(3) A manufactured work platform shall be tested and listed by an approved nationally recognized testing laboratory.

(4) Wood scaffold planks, laminated planks, manufactured work platforms, and picks that are found to be defective shall be removed from service and shall not be used.

(5) A manufactured pick shall be permanently marked or tagged to indicate the maximum working load and shall not be less than 14 inches wide when used in single width, except that a ladder jack scaffold may be used with a minimum 12-inch manufactured pick.

(6) Platform planks shall be laid with their edges together so the platform is tight and does not have spaces through which tools or fragments of materials can fall.

(7) Planking shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions: (a) Extend over the end bearer not less than 6

inches, but not more than 12 inches. (b) Be cleated or otherwise fastened to prevent

shifting and be uniform in thickness, except where lapped as prescribed in subrule (10) of this rule.

(c) Where 16-foot planks are used as prescribed in subrule (9) of this rule, tie downs are not required unless wind uplift may occur.

(8) Hook-on-type manufactured work platforms may be used if they are secured to the bearer.

(9) Where planks are lapped, each plank shall lap its bearer not less than 6 inches, which will provide a minimum overlap of 12 inches.

(10) Where a scaffold turns a corner, the planks shall be laid to prevent tipping. The planks that meet the corner bearer at an angle shall be laid first and shall extend over the diagonally placed bearer far enough to have a good bearing, but not far enough to tip. The planks that run in the different direction shall be laid so as to extend over the rest on the first layer of planks.

(11) When moving a platform to the next level, an employee shall leave the old platform undisturbed until the new platform supports have been set in place and are ready to receive the platform planks.

(12) When a scaffold is occupied by an employee, a slippery condition that occurs on the scaffold platform shall be eliminated as soon as possible after the condition occurs.

(13) A platform shall not deflect more than 1/60 of the span when loaded.

(14) A wood platform shall not be covered with opaque finishes, except that platform edges may be covered or marked for identification. A platform may be coated periodically with wood preservatives, fire-retardant finishes, and slip-resistant finishes; however, the coating may not obscure the top or bottom wood surfaces.

(15) The front of a platform shall be not more than 14 inches from the face of the work unless a guardrail system is erected along the front edge, or unless a personal fall arrest system is used as set forth in R 408.44501 et seq., except that the maximum

9

distance from the face of the work for plastering and lathing operations shall be not more than 18 inches.

R 408.41218 Plywood scaffold platforms

Rule 1218. (1) If plywood is used as a work platform, the plywood shall be supported by 2- by 10- inch planks. The planks shall support 2 parallel edges of the plywood and shall also be spaced not more than 24 inches center to center.

(2) The plywood work surface shall be secured to the planks.

(3) If the plywood work surface is a load-carrying member, it shall have a minimum thickness of 5/8 inch.

R 408.41219 Protection from falling objects

Rule 1219. (1) In addition to wearing a hard hat, an employee on a scaffold shall be provided with additional protection from falling hand tools, debris, and other small objects through the installation of toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems or through the erection of debris nets, catch platforms, or canopy structures that contain or deflect the falling objects. If the falling objects are too large or heavy to be contained or deflected by any of the measures specified in this subrule, then the employer shall place the potential falling objects away from the edge of the surface from which they could fall and shall secure the objects as necessary to prevent them from falling.

(2) If there is a danger of tools, materials, or equipment falling from a scaffold and striking employees below, then one of the following provisions shall apply: (a) The area below the scaffold to which objects

can fall shall be barricaded and employees shall not be permitted to enter the hazard area.

(b) A toeboard shall be erected along the edge of a platform that is more than 10 feet (3.1 meters) above lower levels. The toeboard shall span a distance sufficient to protect employees below, except on a float (ship) scaffold, where an edging of 3/4-inch by 1 1/2- inch (2 by 4-centimeters) wood or equivalent may be used in place of a toeboard.

(c) If tools, materials, or equipment are piled to a height higher than the top edge of the toeboard, then paneling or screening extending from the toeboard or platform to the top of the guardrail shall be erected for a distance sufficient to protect employees below.

(d) A guardrail system shall be installed with openings small enough to prevent the passage of potential falling objects.

(e) A canopy structure, debris net, or catch platform that is strong enough to withstand the impact forces of potential falling objects shall be erected over the employees below.

(3) Canopies, when used for falling object protection, shall be in compliance with all of the following criteria as applicable: (a) A canopy shall be installed between the falling

object hazard and employees. (b) If a canopy is used on a suspension scaffold

for falling object protection, then the scaffold shall be equipped with additional independent support lines equal in number to the number of points supported and equivalent in strength to the strength of the suspension ropes.

(c) Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be attached to the same points of anchorage.

(4) If used, toeboards shall be in compliance with both of the following provisions: (a) Be capable of withstanding, without failure, a

force of not less than 50 pounds (222 nano) applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any point along the toeboard.

(b) Be not less than 3 1/2 inches (9 centimeters) high from the top edge of the toeboard to the level of the walking/working surface. A toeboard shall be securely fastened in place at the outermost edge of the platform and have not more than 1/4 inch (0.7 centimeter) of clearance above the walking/working surface. A toeboard shall be solid or have openings of not more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeter) in the greatest dimension.

FLOOR AND GROUND SUPPORTED SCAFFOLDS

R 408.41221 Stilts Rule 1221. (1) A stilt shall be constructed in accordance

with all of the following provisions: (a) It shall be able to support 4 times the intended

load. (b) It shall have a bottom base plate which is not

less than 3 1/2 inches by 5 1/2 inches and which is equipped with rubber pads.

(c) It shall be not more than 20 inches in height from the bottom of the base plate to the foot support.

(d) It shall be made of metal and remain unpainted.

(e) It shall be made by a manufacturer of stilts. (2) A stilt shall be inspected for damage, wear, and

corrosion. A defective stilt, including the pins and straps, shall be repaired or replaced before being placed in use.

(3) A stilt shall be kept clean and free of accumulations of paint, plaster, and other debris.

(4) Stilts shall be used only if all of the following conditions exist: (a) Floors are level. (b) All floor holes are securely covered. (c) When an employee is using stilts, the top edge

height of the top rail, or equivalent member, shall be increased an amount equal to the height of the stilts.

(d) The floor is capable of supporting a load on the stilt’s base plate without deformation of more than 1/4 of an inch.

(e) The floor is cleared of debris, materials, or liquids that could cause a slipping or tripping hazard.

(5) An employee who is wearing stilts shall not support, lift, or hold a weight of more than 20 pounds.

(6) Stilts shall not be used while going from one level to another.

(7) An employee may wear stilts on a scaffold only if it is a large area scaffold.

R 408.41222 Wood pole scaffolds

Rule 1222. (1) Where a pole of a wood pole scaffold is spliced, the ends shall be squared and the upper section shall rest squarely on the lower section.

10

Wood splice plates shall be fastened on not less than 2 adjacent sides, shall be not less than 4 feet in length, shall overlap the abutted ends equally, shall have the same width and same total cross-sectional area of the pole, and shall be capable of preventing displacement of the abutted ends. Splice plates of other materials of equivalent strength may be used.

(2) A single pole scaffold shall be securely guyed or tied to the building or structure. Where the height or length exceeds 25 feet, a pole scaffold shall be secured at intervals not greater than 25 feet vertically and horizontally.

(3) A bearer shall be set with its greater end dimension vertical and shall be long enough to project over the ledgers not less than 3 inches for proper support.

(4) The inner end of a bearer for a single pole scaffold shall be supported in accordance with 1 of the following: (a) Rest in a wall of a building with not less than a

40 inch bearing. Notching of the bearer is not permitted.

(b) Rest on a 12- by 2- by 6- inch wood block. The block shall be notched at the center to the width of the bearer and 2 inches deep. The bearer shall be nailed to both the block and the building.

(c) At a wall opening by a plank capable of supporting the loaded bearer and fastened to

the building. The bearer shall be braced against displacement.

(5) A ledger shall be long enough to extend over 2 pole spaces. The ledger shall not be spliced between the poles. The ledger shall be reinforced by bearing blocks securely nailed to the side of the pole to form a support for the ledger.

(6) Diagonal bracing shall be provided to prevent the poles of a single pole scaffold from moving in a direction parallel with the wall of the building or from buckling.

(7) Bracing shall be provided between the inner and outer sets of poles in independent pole scaffolds. The free ends of pole scaffolds shall be cross braced.

(8) Full diagonal face bracing, in both directions, shall be erected across both faces of pole scaffold. The braces shall be spliced at the poles.

(9) A wood pole scaffold shall not exceed 40 feet in height and shall be constructed and erected in accordance with table 2.

(10) Where the ends of planks abut each other to form a flush floor, the butt joint shall be at the centerline of a pole. The abutted ends shall rest on separate bearers.


MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAXIMUM SPACING

OF MEMBERS OF WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

HEIGHT OF SCAFFOLD IN FEET

LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY

UP TO 20 20 FT. TO 40 FT. UP TO 40 FT. UP TO 40 FT.

Single Pole Independent Single Pole Independent Single Pole Independent Single Pole Independent Poles

2 in. x 4 in. 2 in. x 4 in. 4 in. x 4 in. 4 in. x 4 in. 4 in. x 4 in. 4 in. x 4 in. 4 in. x 6 in. 4 in. x 4 in.

Pole Spacing Longitudinal

6 ft 6 ft 8 ft 8 ft 6 ft 6 ft 6 ft 6ft

Pole Spacing Traverse

6 ft 10 ft 8 ft 8 ft

Bearers 2 in. x 6 in. 2 in. x 6 in. 2 in .x 6 in. 2 in. x 10 in. 2 in. x 10 in. 3 in. x 4 in.

2 in. x 10 in. 2 in. x 10 in. 3 in. x 4 in.

2 in x 10 in.

Ledgers

2 in. x 6 in. 2 in. x 6 in. 2 in. x 10 in 2 in. x 10 in. 2 in. x 10 in. 2 in. x 10 in. 2 in. x 10 in. 2 in. x 10 in.

Bracing

1 in. x 6 in. 1 in. x 6 in. 1 in. x 6 in. 1 in. x 6 in. 1 in. x 6 in. 1 in. x 6 in. 2 in. x 4 in. 2 in. x 4 in.

Maximum Width

5 ft 5 ft 5 ft 5 ft

Tie-ins

1 in. x 4 in. 1 in. x 4 in. 1 in. x 4 in. 1 in. x 4 in 1 in. x 4 in. 1 in. x 4 in. 1 in. x 4 in. 1 in. x 4 in.

ALL MEMBERS SHALL BE USED ON EDGE

R 408.41223 Tube and coupler scaffolds Rule 1223. (1) A tube and coupler scaffold shall have all

posts, bearers, runners, and bracing of not less than a nominal 2-inch (1.90 inches outside dimension) steel tubing or equivalent.

(2) The material used for couplers shall be of a structural type, such as a drop-forged steel, malleable iron, or structural grade aluminum. Dissimilar metals shall not be used.

(3) The posts of a tube and coupler scaffold shall not be spaced more than 6 feet apart in width and not more than 10 feet along the length for a light-duty rated

scaffold, 8 feet along the length for a medium-duty rated scaffold, and 6 feet along the length for a heavy-duty rated scaffold.

(4) Drawings and specifications for a tube and coupler scaffold over 125 feet in height above the base plate shall be designed by a qualified engineer who is knowledgeable in scaffolding. Drawings and specifications shall be readily available at the jobsite. A scaffold that is less than 125 feet in height shall conform to the requirements of table 3.

(5) Runners shall be erected along the length of the scaffold and located on both the inside and the

11

outside posts at even heights. When tube and coupler guardrails and midrails are used on outside posts, they may be used in place of outside runners. Runners shall be interlocked to form a continuous length and coupled to each post. The bottom runner shall be located as close to the base as possible. The runners shall be placed not more than 6 feet 6 inches on centers.

(6) A bearer shall be installed transversely between posts and shall be securely coupled either to a post bearing on a runner coupler or directly to a runner and shall be kept as close to the post as possible.

(7) A bearer shall be not less than 4 inches, but not more than 12 inches, longer than the post spacing or runner spacing. A bearer may be cantilevered for use as brackets to carry 2 2-inch by 10-inch planks. The bearer for a cantilevered section shall be not more than 24 inches and the section shall be limited to 25 pounds per square foot.

(8) Cross bracing shall be installed across the width of the scaffold at both ends and at least every third set of posts horizontally and every fourth runner vertically. The bracing shall extend diagonally from the inner and outer runners upward to the next outer and inner runners.

(9) Longitudinal diagonal bracing on the outer rows of poles shall be installed at a 45-degree angle from near the base of the first outer post upward to the

extreme top of the scaffold. Where the longitudinal length of the scaffold permits, the bracing shall be duplicated beginning at every fifth post. In a similar manner, longitudinal diagonal bracing shall also be installed from the last post extending back and upward toward the first post. Where conditions preclude the attachment of this bracing to the posts, it may be attached to the runners.

(10) Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed according to the scaffold manufacturer’s recommendations or at the closest horizontal member to the 4 to 1 ratio height and be repeated vertically at locations of horizontal members every 20 feet (6.1 meters) or less hereafter for a scaffold 3 feet (0.91 meters) wide or less and every 26 feet (7.9 meters) or less thereafter for a scaffold more than 3 feet (0.9 meters) wide. The top guy, tie, or brace of a completed scaffold shall be placed no further than a 4 to 1 ratio from the top. The top guys, ties, and braces shall be installed at each end of the scaffold and at horizontal intervals of not more than 30 feet (9.1 meters), measured from 1 end, not both, towards the other end. Outriggers, when used, may be considered a part of the base dimension. The outriggers shall be installed on both sides of the scaffold at each frame line.


TABLE 3

TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS LIGHT DUTY MEDIUM HEAVY

Maximum uniformly distributed load 25 pounds per square foot 50 pounds per square foot 75 pounds per square

foot Post spacing (longitudinal) 10 feet 8 feet 6 feet Post spacing (transverse) 6 feet 6 feet 6 feet Work levels 1 2 3 1 2 1 Maximum allowable additional planked levels 8 4 0 6 0 6 Maximum height (feet) 125 125 91 125 75 125

R 408.41224 Tubular welded frame scaffolds (fabricated

frame scaffold) Rule 1224. (1) The spacing of frames of a tubular welded

frame scaffold shall be consistent with the provisions of R 408.41223(3).

(2) The scaffold shall be braced by cross bracing or diagonal braces, or both, for securing vertical members together laterally. The cross braces shall be of sufficient length so that the erected scaffold is always plumb, square, and rigid. All brace connections shall be made secure.

(3) The frames shall be placed one on top of the other with coupling or stacking pins to provide proper vertical alignment of the legs.

(4) Where uplift may occur, frames shall be locked together vertically by pins or other equivalent suitable means.

(5) A guy, tie, and brace shall be installed according to the scaffold manufacturer’s recommendations or at the closest horizontal member to the 4 to 1 ratio height and be repeated vertically at locations of horizontal members every 20 feet (6.1 meters) or less thereafter for a scaffold 3 feet (0.91 meters) wide or less and every 26 feet (7.9 meters) or less thereafter for a scaffold more than 3 feet (0.91 meters) wide. The top guy, tie, or brace of a

completed scaffold shall be placed no further than a 4 to 1 ratio height from the top. A guy, tie, and brace shall be installed at each end of the scaffold and at horizontal intervals of not more than 30 feet (9.1 meters) measured from one end, not both, towards the other. Outriggers, when used, may be considered as part of the base dimension when installed on each corner of the long side at intervals of not more than 20 feet.

(6) Drawings and specifications for all tubular welded frame scaffolds over 125 feet in height above the base plates shall be designed by a qualified engineer who is knowledgeable in scaffolding. The plans shall be available at the jobsite.

(7) Brackets used to support cantilevered loads shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions: (a) Be seated with side brackets parallel to the

frames and end brackets at 90 degrees to the frames.

(b) Not be bent or twisted from the positions specified in subdivision (a) of this subrule.

(c) Be used only to support personnel, unless the scaffold has been designed for other loads by a qualified engineer and built to withstand the tipping forces caused by the other loads being

12

placed on the bracket-supported section of the scaffold.

R 408.41225 Horse scaffolds

Rule 1225. (1) The horse for a horse scaffold shall be built of straight grained lumber or material of equivalent strength and braced to resist side thrusts.

(2) A horse shall not be more than 4 feet in height and length.

(3) Nailing of extension pieces is prohibited. (4) Horses shall not be tiered.

R 408.41226. Bricklayer’s square scaffold Rule 1226. (1) The squares of a bricklayer’s square

scaffold shall not be more than 5 feet wide by 5 feet high and set not more than 5 feet apart. The bearers and legs shall be made of 2- by 6-inch material, the corner braces of 1- by 6-inch material, and the diagonal braces of 1- by 8-inch material on both sides running from center to center of each member.

(2) Additional 1- by 8-inch bracing shall extend from the bottom of each square to the top of the next square on the front and rear of the scaffold.

(3) Each platform plank shall be supported by not less than 3 squares.

(4) A bricklayer’s square scaffold shall not be tiered. R 408.41227 Pump jack scaffolds

Rule 1227. (1) Pump jack brackets, braces, and accessories shall be fabricated from metal plates and angles. Each bracket shall have 2 positive gripping mechanisms to prevent any failure or slippage.

(2) The platform bracket shall be fully decked. (3) Poles that are used for a pump jack shall not be

spaced more than 10 feet center to center when wood scaffold planks are used for a platform. The spacing may be more than 10 feet center to center if a manufactured platform meets the requirements of this part.

(4) A pole shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions: (a) Not be more than 30 feet in height. (b) Be secured to the structure by rigid triangular

bracing, or equivalent, at the bottom, top, and other points as necessary to provide a maximum vertical spacing of not more than 10 feet between braces. Each brace shall be capable of supporting not less than 225 pounds tension or compression.

(c) Be made of 2, 2 by 4s of Douglas fir, or the equivalent, or 2 continuous lengths made of 2 by 4s spiked together, with the seam parallel to the bracket, with 10D common nails at not more than 12 inches center to center, staggered uniformly from opposite outside edges. Each 2 by 4 may be spliced to make up a pole if the splice is constructed to develop the full strength of the member.

(5) Where the bracket must pass bracing already installed, an extra brace shall be used approximately 4 feet above the one to be passed until the original brace is reinstalled.

(6) Occupancy of a pump-jack scaffold shall be limited to 2 employees between any 2 adjacent supports.

(7) If poles are made of wood, then the pole lumber shall be straight-grained and free of shakes, large

loose or dead knots, and other defects that might impair strength.

R 408.41228 Steel tower scaffolds

Rule 1228. (1) A steel tower scaffold shall be designed and erected according to the specifications of a qualified engineer who is knowledgeable in the subject.

(2) The erected scaffold shall meet the general provisions of this part.

SUSPENDED SCAFFOLDS

R 408.41229 Suspended scaffolds; tipping moment requirement; support devices; outrigger beams; counterweights tiebacks; suspension ropes; use of certain equipment on scaffolds prohibited; securing scaffolds; use of emergency escape and rescue devices

Rule 1229. (1) Direct connections to roofs and floors, and counterweights used to balance an adjustable suspension scaffold, shall be capable of resisting not less than 4 times the tipping moment imposed by the scaffold operating at either the rated load of the hoist or not less than 1.5 times the tipping moment imposed by the scaffold operating at the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater.

(2) A suspension scaffold support device, such as an outrigger beam, cornice hook, parapet clamp, and a similar device shall rest on a surface capable of supporting not less than 4 times the load imposed on them by the scaffold operating at the rated load of the hoist or not less than 1.5 times the load imposed on them by the scaffold at the stall capacity of the hoist, whichever is greater.

(3) A suspension scaffold outrigger beam, when used, shall be made of structural metal or equivalent strength material and shall be restrained to prevent movement.

(4) The inboard end of a suspension scaffold outrigger beam shall be stabilized by bolts or other direct connection to the floor or roof deck or shall be stabilized by counterweights, except that a multipoint adjustable suspension scaffold outrigger beam shall not be stabilized by counterweights.

(5) Before a scaffold is used, a competent person shall evaluate direct connections. The person shall confirm, based on the evaluation, that the support surfaces are capable of supporting the loads to be imposed. In addition, an engineer who is experienced in multipoint adjustable suspension scaffold design shall design the multipoint adjustable suspension scaffold connections.

(6) Counterweights shall be made of nonflowable material. Sand, gravel, and similar materials that can be easily dislocated shall not be used as counterweights.

(7) Only items specifically designed as counterweights shall be used to counterweight scaffold systems. Construction materials, such as, but not limited to, masonry units and rolls of roofing felt, shall not be used as counterweights.

(8) Counterweights shall be secured by mechanical means to the outrigger beams to prevent accidental displacement.

13

(9) Counterweights shall not be removed from an outrigger beam until the scaffold is disassembled.

(10) Outrigger beams that are not stabilized by bolts or other direct connections to the floor or roof deck shall be secured by tiebacks.

(11) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the suspension ropes.

(12) An outrigger beam shall be placed perpendicular to its bearing support, usually the face of the building or structure. However, if an employer can demonstrate that it is not possible to place an outrigger beam perpendicular to the face of the building or structure because of obstructions that cannot be moved, then the outrigger beam may be placed at some other angle if opposing angle tiebacks are used.

(13) Tiebacks shall be secured to a structurally sound anchorage on the building or structure. Sound anchorages include structural members, but do not include any of the following items: (a) Standpipes. (b) Vents. (c) Other piping systems. (d) Electrical conduit.

(14) Either tiebacks shall be installed perpendicular to the face of the building or structure or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed. Single tiebacks installed at an angle are prohibited.

(15) A suspension scaffold outrigger beam shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions: (a) Have stop bolts or shackles at both ends. (b) Be securely fastened together with the flanges

turned out when channel iron beams are used in place of I-beams.

(c) Be installed with all bearing supports perpendicular to the beam center line.

(d) Be set and maintained with the web in a vertical position.

(e) When an outrigger beam is used, the shackle or clevis with which the rope is attached to the outrigger beam shall be placed directly over the center line of the stirrup.

(16) A suspension scaffold support device, such as a cornice hook, roof hook, roof iron, parapet clamp, or similar device shall be in compliance with the following provisions, as applicable: (a) Be made of steel, wrought iron, or materials of

equivalent strength. (b) Be supported by bearing blocks. (c) Either be secured against movement by

tiebacks installed at right angles to the face of the building or structure or have opposing angle tiebacks installed and secured to a structurally sound point of anchorage on the building or structure. Sound points of anchorage include structural members, but do not include any of the following items: (i) Standpipes. (ii) Vents. (iii) Other piping systems. (iv) Electrical conduit.

(d) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the hoisting rope.

(17) A suspension rope that supports an adjustable suspension scaffold shall be of a diameter large enough to provide sufficient surface area for the functioning of brake and hoist mechanisms.

(18) Repaired wire rope shall not be used as suspension rope.

(19) Wire suspension ropes shall not be joined together, except through the use of eye splice thimbles connected with shackles or cover plates and bolts.

(20) Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not be used unless the attachments or eyes are made by the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified person.

(21) The load end of a wire suspension rope shall be equipped with proper size thimble and shall be secured by eye splicing or an equivalent means.

(22) Gasoline-powered equipment and hoists shall not be used on suspension scaffolds.

(23) A suspension scaffold shall be tied or otherwise secured to prevent it from swaying. A competent person shall evaluate the scaffold and determine if it needs to be tied or otherwise secured. Window cleaner’s anchors shall not be used to tie or otherwise secure a suspension scaffold.

(24) A device that functions solely to provide emergency escape and rescue shall not be used as a working platform. This subrule does not preclude the use of a system that is designed to function both as a suspension scaffold and an emergency system.

R 408.41231 Adjustable multipoint suspension scaffolds

Rule 1231. (1) An adjustable multipoint suspension scaffold shall be capable of sustaining a working load of 50 pounds per square foot and shall not be loaded to more than 50 pounds per square foot.

(2) An outrigger beam that is used for an adjustable multipoint suspension scaffold shall meet all of the following criteria: (a) Be made of metal that is equivalent in strength

to a standard 7-inch, 15.3-pound steel beam. (b) Be not less than 15 feet in length. (c) Project not more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond

the bearing point. (d) Be spaced not more than 7 feet on center.

(3) The scaffold outrigger beam shall be securely fastened or anchored to the frame or floor system of the building or structure.

(4) Only wire rope shall be used for suspending an adjustable multipoint suspension scaffold.

(5) The steel shackles or clevises with which the wire ropes are attached to the outrigger beams shall be placed directly over the hoisting drums.

(6) The outrigger beam shall rest on a wood bearing block that is capable of supporting the load without deformation.

R 408.41232. Multipoint suspended scaffold

Rule 1232. (1) A multipoint suspended scaffold shall be suspended from structural components that are capable of supporting 4 times the maximum intended load.

(2) A multipoint suspended scaffold shall be light- or medium-duty scaffold only.

(3) If wire rope is used for the suspension of a multipoint suspended scaffold, a minimum of 2 wraps around the supporting structural members and around put logs shall be used and secured with the proper number of wire rope clips or fist grips as prescribed in table 5 of R 408.41261(11).

(4) Softeners shall be used to prevent damage to wire rope that is used for suspension.

14

R 408.41233 Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds (swing stage scaffold)

Rule 1233. (1) A swing stage scaffold platform shall not be less than 20 inches nor more than 36 inches wide overall. The platform shall be securely fastened to the stirrups by U-bolts or by other equivalent means.

(2) At the beginning of each new installation, after a swing stage scaffold is completely suspended, the scaffold shall be tested by being set about 1 foot above the lowest elevation and loaded with 2 times the anticipated working load.

(3) The stirrups shall be designed with a support for a guardrail, intermediate rails, and toeboard.

(4) Rope and blocks that are used to support a 2-point adjustable scaffold shall have all of the following: (a) Supporting ropes of 3/4-inch, first-quality

manila rope or a synthetic rope of equivalent strength used with at least one 6-inch single and one 6-inch double block.

(b) Blocks that have sheaves which fit the size of the rope the blocks carry.

(c) Live ropes made fast to the scaffold in a manner to prevent displacement.

(d) The dead-end of the supporting rope connected to the block at the stirrup by means of an eye splice incorporating a thimble.

(5) Slings, hangers, platforms, and other supporting parts shall be inspected before every installation. Periodic inspections shall be made while the scaffold is in use. For ropes, see R 408.41261, R 408.41262, and R 408.41263.

(6) A swing stage scaffold shall be limited to the following number of employees: (a) For a scaffold designed for a working load of

500 pounds, not more than 2 employees shall be permitted to work at one time.

(b) For a scaffold designed for a working load of 750 pounds, not more than 3 employees shall be permitted to work at one time.

(7) Two or more scaffolds shall not be combined by bridging with planks or similar connecting links.

(8) Rollers or fenders shall be provided to prevent striking the building and to facilitate raising and lowering.

(9) The platform of a swing stage scaffold shall be 1 of the following types: (a) Ladder-type platforms - The ladder-type

platform shall be constructed to meet ANSI standard A10.8-1977 entitled “Scaffolding,” which is adopted in these rules by reference and which may be inspected at the Lansing office of the department of Labor and Economic Growth. The standard may be purchased at a cost as of the time of adoption of these rules of $5.00 from the American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, New York 10018, or from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, MIOSHA Standards Division, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.

(b) Plank-type platform - The plank-type platform shall be composed of not less than two 2 by 10-inch unspliced planks which are laid straight and which are cleated together on the underside, with the cleats starting 6 inches from each end and spaced at 12-inch intervals.

(c) Beam-type platform - The beam platform shall have side stringers made of lumber that is not less than 2 by 6 inches set on edge. The span between hangers shall not be more than 12 feet. The flooring shall be supported on 2 by 6-inch crossbeams which are laid flat, which are set into the upper edge of the stringers with a snug fit at intervals of not more than 4 feet center to center, and which are securely nailed in place. The flooring shall be 1 by 6-inch lumber or 3/4-inch plywood and shall be securely nailed. Floorboards shall not be spaced more than 1/2 of an inch apart.

(d) Manufactured picks - When used, a manufactured pick shall conform to the requirements of R 408.41217(3), (4), and (5).

R 408.41234 Multilevel suspension scaffolds

Rule 1234. (1) A multilevel suspension scaffold shall have a separate fall prevention device that allows a drop of not more than 12 inches installed at each support point connected with a line to the scaffold.

(2) The device shall be attached to a wire rope safety line equivalent to the support rope, and the safety line shall be secured to a substantial member of the structure separate from the support rope and to the ground. If it is not possible to attach a safety line to the structure, then the safety line shall be attached to the outrigger.

(3) Each employee shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system as specified in Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code, attached to the scaffold.

(4) The multilevel suspension scaffold shall be in compliance with the provisions of R 408.41229 and R 408.41233.

(5) At the beginning of each new installation, after a multilevel suspension scaffold is completely suspended, the scaffold shall be tested by being set about 1 foot above the lowest elevation and loaded with 2 times the anticipated working load.

(6) A support for a platform shall be attached directly to the support stirrup and not to any other platform.

R 408.41235 Single-point adjustable suspension

scaffolds Rule 1235. (1) A single-point adjustable suspension

scaffold shall be raised or lowered by an electrical, air motor-driven, or manual hoisting machine.

(2) A single-point adjustable suspension scaffold shall travel only in a vertical line.

(3) At the beginning of each new installation, after a single-point adjustable suspension scaffold is completely suspended, the scaffold shall be tested by being set about 1 foot above the lowest elevation and loaded with 2 times the anticipated working load.

(4) The suspension methods shall be as prescribed in R 408.41229.

R 408.41236 Needle beam scaffolds

Rule 1236. (1) A needle beam scaffold shall be suspended from a structure that is capable of supporting not less than 4 times the weight of the scaffold and intended load.

(2) The beams of a needle beam scaffold shall be of wood not less than 4 by 6 inches, with the greater

15

dimension set vertically, or of equivalent structural metal.

(3) A needle beam scaffold shall not be altered or moved while in use.

(4) The distance between the needle beams shall not be more than 8 feet, the length of needle beams shall be not more than 12 feet, and the needle beams shall be supported at points 12 inches from the ends.

(5) Rope supports shall be of 1-inch, first-grade manila rope or synthetic rope of equivalent strength and shall be hung vertically. The rope shall be attached to the needle beams in a manner that prevents the needle beams from rolling or otherwise becoming displaced.

(6) The scaffold planking shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions: (a) Be laid tight between supporting ropes. (b) Be secured against displacement. Cleats are

not an adequate means of attachment. (c) Extend not more than 6 inches beyond the

beam. (7) Tools, bolts, and nuts on a needle beam scaffold

shall be kept in containers that are properly secured on the scaffold.

(8) One end of a needle beam scaffold may be supported by and secured to a permanent structural member.

R 408.41237 Boatswain’s chair

Rule 1237. (1) The seat of a boatswain’s chair made of wood shall be not less than 12 by 24 inches and 1- inch thick with the underside reinforced by cleats fastened to prevent splitting. Other materials used shall be of equivalent strength and size.

(2) Two 5/8-inch, first-quality manila rope slings or synthetic rope of equivalent strength shall be reeved through the 4 seat holes so as to cross each other on the underside. Where an employee is using a heat or spark-producing process, such as gas welding or cutting, a protected 3/8-inch wire rope shall be used in place of fiber rope.

(3) An employee shall be protected by a fall arrest system as prescribed in Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(4) The tackle shall consist of bearing or bushed blocks and 5/8-inch, first grade manila rope or its equivalent. The block shall be secured to roof irons, hooks, or other objects that are secured. Tiebacks shall be installed at right angles to the face of the building and shall be secured to the roof hooks and the building.

R 408.41238 Float scaffolds

Rule 1238. (1) A float scaffold shall be constructed of not less than 3/4-inch exterior plywood or equivalent material. The platform shall be not more than 3 by 6 feet in size, and the ends of the platform shall project 6 inches beyond the outer edge of the bearers.

(2) The plywood shall be securely fastened to 2 2- by 4- inch bearers which are made of select lumber that is free of knots and other defects and which project 6 inches beyond the platforms on each side. The plywood shall be reinforced with a diagonal brace that runs from bearer to bearer beneath the platform.

(3) An edging of wood not less than 1 by 2 inches, or its equivalent, shall be secured around all sides of the platform to prevent tools from rolling off.

(4) Supporting ropes shall be 1- inch manila rope, or its equivalent, and shall be free of defects.

(5) Rope connections shall be made in a manner that prevents the platform from shifting or slipping. The rope shall be arranged to do all of the following: (a) Pass under the platform. (b) Be hitched around the end of each bearer on

each side. (c) Provide 4 ends that shall be securely fastened

to an overhead support. (6) Not more than 2 employees and necessary light

tools shall occupy a float scaffold. (7) Each employee on a float scaffold shall be protected

by a personal fall arrest system. R 408.41239 Catenary scaffolds

Rule 1239. (1) Not more than 1 platform shall be placed between consecutive vertical pickups, and not more than 2 platforms shall be used on a catenary scaffold.

(2) A platform supported by wire ropes shall have hook-shaped stops on each end of the platform to prevent it from slipping off the wire ropes. The hooks shall be placed to prevent the platform from falling if 1 of the horizontal wire ropes breaks.

(3) A wire rope shall not be tightened to the extent that the application of a scaffold load will overstress the wire rope.

(4) A wire rope shall be continuous and not have splices between anchors.

R 408.41240 Interior hung scaffolds

Rule 1240. (1) An interior scaffold shall be suspended only from the roof structure or other structural member such as a ceiling beam.

(2) An overhead supporting member (roof structure, ceiling beams, or other structural members) shall be inspected and checked for strength before the scaffold is erected.

(3) Suspension ropes and cables shall be connected to the overhead supporting members by shackles, clips, thimbles, or other means that meet the strength and durability of the suspension ropes and cables.

MOBILE SCAFFOLDS

R 408.41241 Mobile scaffolds Rule 1241. (1) When a freestanding mobile scaffold is

used, the height shall not be more than 4 times the minimum base dimension.

(2) Outriggers, when used, may be considered as part of the base dimension. The outriggers shall be installed on both sides of the scaffold at each frame line.

(3) Locking devices shall be used to secure the casters to the frame or adjusting screw. The adjusting screw shall not extend more than 12 inches. The casters shall be provided with a positive locking device to prevent movement of the scaffold. The device shall be used when the scaffold is in use, except where the work platform is 4 feet or less from the floor.

16

(4) Vertical members of the scaffold shall be braced by cross bracing and diagonal bracing. Not less than 2 horizontal diagonal braces shall be installed, 1 as close to the casters as possible, at intervals of not more than 4 times the least-based dimension. The horizontal diagonal brace may be omitted on a scaffold that is specifically designed to absorb racking.

(5) A scaffold platform shall cover the full width of the scaffold, except for a necessary entrance opening. A platform shall be secured in place. A platform shall not extend outward beyond the base supports of the scaffold unless outrigger frames or equivalent devices are used to ensure stability.

(6) A ladder or stairway that is provided on a manually propelled mobile scaffold shall be affixed or built into the scaffold and shall be so located that, when in use, the ladder or stairway does not have a tendency to tip the scaffold. A landing platform shall be provided at intervals of not more than 30 feet.

(7) In place of a ladder or stairway, the requirements of R 408.41211(2) may be complied with.

(8) Only manual force shall be used to move a scaffold covered by this rule. The force shall be applied near or as close to the base as practical, except for a scaffold with a work platform that is 4 feet or less from the floor.

(9) When being used, a mobile scaffold shall rest upon a suitable footing and shall stand plumb. Where leveling of the scaffold is necessary, screw jacks or an equivalent means shall be used.

(10) An employer shall not allow an employee to ride on a mobile scaffold, unless all of the following conditions exist: (a) The floor or surface is within 3 degrees of level

and is free from pits, holes, or obstructions. (b) The minimum base dimension of the scaffold

when ready for rolling is not less than 1/2 of the height.

(c) The casters are equipped with rubber or similar resilient tires.

(d) All tools and materials are secured or removed from the platform before the mobile scaffold is moved.

(e) The scaffold is equipped with guardrails on all sides.

(f) Before a scaffold is moved, each employee on the scaffold shall be made aware of the move.

(11) A mobile scaffold shall be in compliance with the applicable provisions of R 408.41217, R 408.41218, R 408.41223, and R 408.41224.

(12) A power system used to propel a mobile scaffold shall be designed to propel a mobile scaffold. A forklift, truck, similar motor vehicle, or add-on motor shall not be used to propel a scaffold unless the scaffold is designed to be propelled by a forklift, truck, similar motor vehicle, or add-on motor.

(13) If a power system is used to propel a scaffold, then the propelling force shall be applied directly to the wheel and shall not produce a speed of more than 1 foot per second (.3 meters per second).

(14) An employee shall not be on any part of a powered mobile scaffold that extends outward beyond the wheels, casters, or other supports.

(15) A powered mobile scaffold shall be stabilized to prevent tipping during movement.

R 408.41243 Rough terrain forklift truck scaffolds; equipment requirements; employee safety requirements

Rule 1243. (1) Before an employee is elevated on a rough terrain forklift truck scaffold, a pre-lift meeting shall be held to review the appropriate requirements and procedures to be followed. The pre-lift meeting shall be attended by all of the following entities: (a) The lift operator. (b) The signalperson. (c) Employees to be lifted. (d) The person who is responsible for the task to

be performed. (2) The scaffold platform shall be attached to the forks

by enclosed sleeves and shall be secured against the back of the forks with a mechanical device so that the platform cannot tip or slip.

(3) The lifting carriage and the forks shall be secured to prevent them from tipping upward.

(4) An employer shall provide protection for an employee on the platform from moving parts and on lift trucks equipped with a lifting mast. The side of the platform adjacent to the mast shall be protected by a solid or mesh guard that is sufficient in height and width to prevent contact with moving parts of the mast. On trucks equipped with rotators, the rotation shall be deactivated.

(5) A work platform shall be in compliance with all of the following requirements: (a) Except for the guardrail system as specified in

construction safety standard Part 21. Guarding of Walking and Working Areas, being R 408.42101 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code, be of welded mild steel construction that has a minimum safety factor of 4 times the maximum intended load.

(b) Have a continuous guardrail system constructed as follows: (i) Have a top rail which is located not less

than 36 inches, nor more than 42 inches, above the platform floor and which is constructed to withstand a minimum of 200 pounds of force in any direction.

(ii) Have a midrail which is installed at mid-height between the top rail and platform floor and which is constructed to withstand a 200-pound side thrust.

(iii) Have a toeboard which is not less than 4 inches in nominal height and which is installed not more than 1/4 of an inch above the floor around the periphery of the work platform. If the platform has a gate, then the toeboard shall be installed on the gate.

(c) Have a wood planking, steel plate, or a steel grating bolted or welded to the bottom of the platform and be maintained free of slip or trip hazards.

(d) Have a permanently affixed sign on the platform that specifies the maximum number of passengers allowed, the work platform identification number, and the maximum rated load.

(e) Be easily identifiable by high-visibility color or marking.

(6) An employee on a scaffold who is exposed to an overhead hazard of falling material or overhead

17

projections shall be protected with overhead protection that is sufficient to prevent injury.

(7) The lifting mechanism shall operate smoothly through its entire lift range, both empty and loaded, and all lift-limiting devices and latches, if provided, shall be functional.

(8) The work platform shall be level when in use. (9) If an employee is elevated in a platform on a

variable reach lift truck, a personal fall arrest system, including the anchorage required in Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq., of the Michigan Administrative Code and Part 6. Personal Protective Equipment, being R408.40601 et seq., of the Michigan Administrative Code, is required and shall be worn when an employee is elevated.

(10) The rough terrain fork truck or the lift truck shall rest on firm footing. Leveling devices and outriggers shall be used where provided on equipment.

(11) A trained operator shall remain at the operator station of a lift truck to control the lift truck while an employee is elevated. The lift truck control or controls shall be in neutral and the parking brake set. The operator of the lift truck scaffold platform shall be able to see the elevated platform at all times.

(12) A lift truck platform shall be returned to the ground before a lift truck is repositioned. The forklift shall be moved as close to the work area as possible for final positioning. An employee shall exit the landed platform and reboard the platform only after the lift truck repositioning is completed.

(13) The path that a lift truck platform travels shall be clear of hazards, such as storage racks, scaffolds, overhead obstructions, and electrical lines. Distances shall be maintained from electrical lines as specified in R 408.41212(4),(5), and (6).

(14) A lift truck operator shall keep his or her hands and feet clear of the controls that are not in use.

(15) A lift truck operator shall lift and lower an employee smoothly, with caution, and either at the employee’s request or after alerting the elevated employee of intended movement. An operator of a lift truck that has a telescopic boom shall extend or retract the boom only at idle or near idle speed.

(16) The combined mass weight of the platform, load, and the employee shall not be more than 1/3 of the rated capacity of the rough terrain forklift truck on which the platform is used.

(17) An employee shall maintain firm footing on the platform floor. Railings, planks, ladders, or other materials shall not be used on the platform to achieve reach or height.

(18) The guardrail system of the platform shall not be used to support any of the following: (a) Materials. (b) Other work platforms. (c) Employees.

(19) The platform shall be lowered to ground level for an employee to enter or exit, except where elevated work areas are inaccessible or hazardous to reach. An employee may exit the platform with the knowledge and consent of the employer. When exiting to unguarded work areas, fall protection shall be provided and used as required in construction safety standard, Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code. An employee shall not climb on any part of a

lift truck when attempting to enter or exit the platform.

(20) A platform shall not be modified if the modification is detrimental to its safe use.

(21) Floor dimensions parallel to the truck longitudinal centerline shall not be more than 2 times the load center distance listed on the rough terrain forklift truck nameplate. The floor dimension width shall not be more than the overall width of the truck measured across the load-bearing tires plus 10 inches (250 mm) on either side. The minimum space for each employee on the platform shall be not less than 18 inches (450 mm) in either direction.

(22) A wood pallet shall not be used as a platform for lift truck scaffolds.

(23) If arc welding is performed by an employee on the platform, then the electrode holders shall be protected from contact with the metal components of the work platform.

(24) The only tools that are permitted on the work platform are hand tools and portable powered tools. Materials and tools shall be secured to prevent displacement. The total weight of compressed gas cylinders shall not be more than 20 pounds.

(25) A work platform shall not be used during high winds, electrical storms, snow, ice, sleet, or other adverse weather conditions that could affect the safety of the employees on the work platform or the operator of the truck.

(26) An employee shall keep all parts of his or her body inside the platform during raising, lowering, or repositioning of the platform.

(27) There shall be a communication system between an employee on the work platform and the operator of the rough terrain forklift truck or a fork lift truck.

R 408.41244 Inspection and maintenance of rough terrain

forklift trucks Rule 1244. (1) Before an employee is elevated on a

rough terrain forklift truck platform, a trained operator or other qualified personnel shall inspect all of the following items: (a) Tires and their inflation pressure. (b) Warning devices. (c) Lights. (d) Lift and tilt mechanisms, load engaging

means, chains, cables, and limit switches. (e) Brakes. (f) Steering mechanism. (g) Fuel systems.

(2) A forklift truck shall not be operated if an unsafe condition is found before or during use until the truck has been restored to a safe operating condition.

(3) A rough terrain forklift truck and forklift trucks shall be maintained according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

R 408.41245 Operator training

Rule 1245. (1) An employer shall ensure that an employee has been trained before the employee’s assignment as an operator of a rough terrain forklift truck that is used to elevate employees. An employee shall be trained in all of the following areas: (a) The capabilities of the equipment and its

attachments.

18

(b) The purpose, use, and limitations of the controls.

(c) How to make daily checks. (2) An employee shall practice operating an assigned

vehicle and perform the functions necessary for a particular job.

R 408.41246 Operator permits

Rule 1246. (1) An employer shall ensure that an operator has a valid permit to operate a rough terrain forklift or a forklift truck for elevating an employee. The operator shall carry the permit or shall have the permit available if it is requested by a department representative, during working hours.

(2) A permit to operate a rough terrain forklift truck or a forklift truck is valid only for work performed for the employer who issued the permit. A permit may be issued for a period of not more than 3 years. A permit shall contain all of the following information: (a) Firm name. (b) Operator’s name. (c) Date issued. (d) Date expiring. (e) Operator restrictions, if any. If a restricted

permit to operate is issued, then the permit shall state the nature of the restriction.

(f) The type of truck an operator has been trained on and is qualified to operate

AUXILIARY SUPPORTED SCAFFOLDS

R 408.41251 Outrigger scaffolds Rule 1251. (1) The inboard end of an outrigger beam

measured from the fulcrum point to anchorage point shall be not less than 1 1/2 times the outboard end in length. The beams shall rest on edge, the sides shall be plumb, and the edges shall be horizontal. The fulcrum point of the beam shall rest on a secure bearing not less than 6 inches in each horizontal dimension. The beam shall be secured in place against movement and shall be securely braced at the fulcrum point against tipping.

(2) The inboard end of an outrigger beam shall be securely anchored either by means of struts bearing against sills in contact with the overhead beams or ceiling or by means of tension members secured to the floor joists underfoot, or by both if necessary. The inboard end of an outrigger beam shall be secured against tipping, and the entire supporting structure shall be securely braced in both directions to prevent any horizontal movement.

(3) An outrigger scaffold shall be constructed as prescribed in table 4.

(4) Planking shall be laid tight and shall extend to within 3 inches of the building wall. Planking shall be secured to the outriggers.

(5) A scaffold and scaffold components shall be designed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in scaffolding and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with the design.


TABLE 4

SPACING AND LENGTH OF OUTRIGGER SCAFFOLDS

Maximum Scaffold Load Light Duty 25 psf

Medium Duty 50 psf

Outrigger size 2 by 10 feet 3 by 10 feet Maximum outrigger spacing 8 feet 6 feet Maximum outrigger length 6 feet 6 feet

R 408.41252 Rescinded. R 408.41253 Roofing brackets and crawling boards

Rule 1253. (1) A roofing bracket shall be installed in a manner to maintain a level working surface.

(2) Spacing between the brackets supporting a work plank shall not be more than 8 feet.

(3) The working plank shall not be less than 2 by 6 inches.

(4) In addition to the pointed metal projections, the brackets shall be secured in place by nailing. When it is impractical to nail brackets, rope supports shall be used. When rope supports are used, they shall consist of first-quality manila rope of at least 3/4-inch diameter or its equivalent.

(5) A crawling board shall not be less than 1 by 10 inches, shall extend from the eave to the ridge of the roof, and shall be secured against displacement.

(6) Cleats shall be secured to the board by nails which are driven through, and clinched to, the underside.

(7) The cleats shall be not less than 1 by 1 1/2 inches, shall be equal in length to the width of the crawling board, and shall be spaced not more than 24 inches center to center.

(8) When a crawling board is used and a catch platform is provided, a lifeline of not less than 3/4-inch diameter rope, or its equivalent, shall be strung beside the board for a handhold.

R 408.41254 Carpenter’s bracket scaffold

Rule 1254. (1) The supporting brackets of a carpenter’s bracket scaffold shall be made of metal.

(2) The supporting brackets shall be fastened to the structure by 1 of the following: (a) Three-eights-inch diameter bolts extending

through the studs at the top of the bracket and projecting 3/4 inch beyond the nut and washer when in place.

(b) Welding to a metal tank. (c) Hooked over a secured supporting member of

the structure. (3) The supporting brackets shall be not more than 8

feet apart to support 1 employee and not more than 75 pounds of material, or 4 feet apart to support 2 employees and not more than 75 pounds of material.

19

R 408.41255 Form Scaffolds Rule 1255. (1) A form scaffold shall be used to support a

maximum intended load of not more than 25 pounds per square foot.

(2) Form scaffold brackets shall be spaced not more than 8 feet on center and shall be constructed of the following: (a) Bearers of not less than 2- by 4-inch wood or

materials of equivalent strength which are secured horizontally to the side of a vertical form support and which extend not more than 6 inches beyond the outer edge of the platform, but the total length of the bearer shall be not more than 42 inches.

(b) A diagonal brace placed at a 45-degree angle from and below the outer end of the bearer to the vertical form support.

(3) Metal brackets that are an integral part of the form shall be bolted or welded to the form. A folding-type bracket shall be secured by bolts or locking pins when in the extended position. Clip-on hook-on brackets may be used if the form walers are bolted to the form or secured by snap ties or shea-bolts extending through the form and anchored.

R 408.41256 Ladder jack scaffolds

Rule 1256. (1) A ladder jack scaffold shall be used only for light duty on type I manufactured ladders at heights not more than 20 feet from the ground or floor level. The ladder shall be used as prescribed in Part 11. Fixed and Portable Ladders, being R 408.41101 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(2) The span of a wood plank shall be not more than 8 feet between ladder jacks and the planking shall be as prescribed in R 408.41217.

(3) The span of a pick shall not exceed 24 feet. (4) A ladder jack scaffold using planks shall be limited

to 2 employees at any one time, except that if 3 ladders support the plank, 3 employees may occupy the plank. Not more than 1 employee shall occupy any given 4 feet of plank at any one time.

(5) A ladder jack scaffold using a pick shall be limited to 2 employees at any one time, except that if 3 ladders support the pick, 3 employees may occupy the pick. Not more than 1 employee shall occupy any given 6 feet of pick at any one time.

(6) All bearing points of a ladder jack shall be designed to bear on the side rails and the rungs, but if bearing on the rungs only, the bearing area shall be not less than 10 lineal inches per rung.

R 408.41256a Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds

Rule 1256a. (1) A scaffold platform shall not be placed higher than the second highest rung or step of the ladder supporting the platform.

(2) A ladder used in conjunction with a step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffold shall be in compliance with the pertinent requirements of construction safety standard Part 11. Fixed and Portable Ladders, being R 408.41101 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code, except that job-made ladders shall not be used to support a step, platform, or trestle scaffold.

(3) A ladder used to support a step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffold shall be placed, fastened, or equipped with a device to prevent slipping.

(4) A scaffold shall not be bridged to another scaffold.

R 408.41256b Repair bracket scaffolds

Rule 1256b. (1) Brackets shall be secured in place by at least 1 wire rope that is at least 1/2 of an inch (1.27 centimeter) in diameter.

(2) Each bracket shall be attached to the securing wire rope or ropes by either a positive locking device capable of preventing the unintentional detachment of the bracket from the rope or by equivalent means.

(3) Each bracket, at the contact point between the supporting structure and the bottom of the bracket, shall have a shoe (heel block or foot) capable of preventing the lateral movement of the bracket.

(4) A platform shall be secured to the brackets in a manner that will prevent the separation of the platform from the brackets and the movement of the platform or the brackets on a completed scaffold.

(5) If a wire rope is placed around the structure to provide a safe anchorage for personal fall arrest systems used by employees erecting or dismantling scaffolds, then the wire rope shall be in compliance with the requirements of construction safety standard Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code, or this part, but shall be at least 5/16 of an inch (0.8 centimeter) in diameter.

(6) A wire rope used for securing brackets in place or as an anchorage for personal fall arrest systems shall be protected from damage due to contact with edges, corners, protrusions, or other discontinuities of the supporting structure or scaffold components.

(7) The tensioning of a wire rope used for securing brackets in place or as an anchorage for personal fall arrest systems shall be accomplished either by means of a turnbuckle at least 1 inch (2.54 centimeter) in diameter or by equivalent means.

(8) A turnbuckle shall be connected to the other end of its rope using an eye splice thimble of a size appropriate to the turnbuckle to which it is attached.

(9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be used on any wire rope used to secure brackets or to serve as an anchor for personal fall arrest systems.

(10) An employer shall ensure that materials shall not be dropped to the outside of the supporting structure.

(11) Scaffold erection shall progress in only 1 direction around any structure.

WIRE, FIBER AND SYNTHETIC ROPE

R 408.41261 Wire rope generally Rule 1261. (1) A wire rope shall be inspected for defects

by a competent person before each work shift and after every occurrence could affect a rope’s integrity. A rope shall be replaced if any of the following conditions exist: (a) Physical damage that impairs the function and

strength of the rope. (b) Kinks that might impair the tracking or

wrapping of rope around the drum or sheaves. (c) Six randomly distributed broken wires in 1 rope

lay or 3 broken wires in 1 strand in 1 rope lay. (d) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, flattening, or

peening that has caused the loss of more than 1/3 of the original diameter of the outside wires.

20

(e) Heat damage caused by a torch or any damage caused by contact with electrical wires.

(f) Evidence that the secondary brake has been activated during an overspeed condition and has engaged the suspension rope.

(2) Wire rope that is bent to form an eye over a bolt or rod which has a diameter of less than 4 times the rope diameter shall be equipped with a metal thimble.

(3) Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not be used unless they are made by the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified person.

(4) If wire rope clips are used on suspension scaffolds, then all of the following provisions apply: (a) Clips shall be installed according to the

manufacturer’s recommendations. (b) Clips shall be retightened to the

manufacturer’s recommendations after the initial loading.

(c) Clips shall be inspected and retightened to the manufacturer’s recommendations at the start of each work shift.

(d) U-bolt clips shall not be used at the point of suspension for any scaffold hoist.

(e) If U-bolt clips are used, then the U-bolt shall be placed over the dead end of the rope and the saddle shall be placed over the live end of the rope.

(5) Wire ropes shall be stored in a manner to prevent damage or deterioration.

(6) Before cutting wire rope, an employee shall place a seizing on each side of the cut on preformed wire rope.

(7) Wire rope shall be maintained in a lubricated condition over its entire length with the same type lubricant used by the manufacturer.

(8) Seizing or an equivalent protection shall be provided at all wire rope ends.

(9) Wire rope shall not come in contact with sharp edges.

(10) Wire rope used to suspend scaffolds shall not be spliced.


TABLE 5

NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-BOLT WIRE ROPE CLIPS

Improved plow steel, rope Diameter

(inches)

Number of Clips Drop Other

Forged Material

Minimum Spacing (inches)

5/16 3 4 3 3/8 3 4 3 1/2 3 4 3 5/8 3 4 3 3/4 3/4 4 5 4 1/2 7/8 4 5 5 1/4 1 5 6 6

1 1/8 6 6 6 3/4 1 1/4 6 7 7 1/2 1 3/8 7 7 8 1/4 1 1/2 7 8 9

R 408.41262 Fiber rope generally Rule 1262. (1) A fiber rope shall be inspected visually for

the following conditions before the start of each work shift: (a) Externally, for abrasions, cut or broken fibers,

decay, burns, lack of strength, softness, and variation in size or roundness of the strands.

(b) Internally, by separating the strands for broken fibers, presence of grit, mildew or mold, color change of the fibers, or powdering and short loose fibers.

(2) A rope having any of the conditions specified in subrule (1) of this rule shall be replaced or returned to the manufacturer for repair.

(3) A fiber rope shall be stored in a dry room in coils or on a reel.

(4) A wet fiber rope shall be dried by placing it in the sunshine or by hanging it loosely over a rounded peg or hook in a warm room.

(5) A fiber rope shall not be kinked, run over sharp corners, used when frozen, or left in freezing temperatures when wet.

(6) A fiber rope subjected to an impact load equal to more than its rated capacity shall be replaced.

(7) A thimble shall be used with fiber rope pursuant to R 408.41261(2).

R 408.41263 Synthetic rope

Rule 1263. (1) A synthetic rope shall be inspected visually before the start of each job for abrasions, cut or broken fibers, burns, melted fibers, and variation in size or roundness of the strands. A rope having any of these conditions shall be replaced or returned to the manufacturer for repair.

(2) Because of the variance in manufacturing methods, the manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed.

(3) A synthetic rope shall not be kinked, run over sharp corners, used when frozen, or left in freezing temperatures when wet.

(4) A synthetic rope subjected to an impact load equal to or more than its rated capacity shall be replaced.

(5) A thimble shall be used with synthetic rope pursuant to R 408.41261(2).

R 408.41264 Window jack scaffolds

Rule 1264. (1) A window jack scaffold shall be used as a work platform for not more than 1 employee and only for the purpose of working at the window opening through which the jack is placed.

21

(2) A window jack scaffold shall consist of a work platform that is secured to the structure with braces that run from a point not more than 4 inches from the end of the platform to the structure at an angle of not less than 45 degrees to the horizontal.

(3) An interior horizontal brace which extends not less than 12 inches beyond the vertical edges of the opening and which is capable of supporting not less than 4 times the intended load shall be secured to the work platform, tight to the interior surface of the

wall, to prevent the outward movement of the platform.

(4) A window jack scaffold shall be provided with guardrails unless a harness that has a lifeline is attached and provided by the employer for the employee as required in Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(5) A window jack shall not be used to support planks placed between one window jack and another or for other elements of scaffolding.






www.4-Safety.com 906-228-9109

1

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLDING Scaffolds are to be erected, moved, altered, and dismantled by competent and experienced personnel or under the Supervision of competent persons. On scaffolds that are 10 feet above the ground or floor, handrails, midrails, and toe boards are to be installed and scaffolds completely decked. Guardrails shall be 2" x 4", or the equivalent, and be approximately 42 inches high with a midrails. All guardrails must be capable of withstanding a 200-pound force applied in any direction. Supports shall be at intervals not to exceed eight feet. Toe boards shall be minimum of four inches in height. All planking shall be Scaffold Grade or equivalent. If for some reason a platform or scaffold cannot be equipped with standard handrails or completely decked, then safety harnesses must be worn and properly tied off. When scaffold heights exceed four (three) times the smallest base dimension (or 26 feet), it must be secured to the building or structure at the second lift and every other lift there after. Running scaffold is to be anchored every 30 feet horizontally at the heights established in the preceding sentence. "Outriggers" or guys may be used where it is impractical to secure scaffold to a building or structure. The footing or anchorage for scaffolds shall be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying four times the maximum intended load without settling or displacement. Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes, loose bricks, or concrete blocks will not be used to support scaffolds. Mudsills 12” x 24” and base plates are recommended. When using leveling jacks, the adjusting screws shall not be extended more than 12” with 1/2 of its length remaining inside the scaffold leg. Scaffolds are to be capable of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load. The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds shall be plumb and securely and rigidly braced to prevent swaying and displacement. Do not stack brick, tile, block, or similar material higher than 4" on the scaffold deck. A safe access ladder extending 36" above the landing or equivalent safe access shall be provided. Rope and No. 9 wire is not acceptable handrail material for scaffolds or elevated platforms, Scaffolds shall not be moved or dismantled until all loose tools, equipment and materials resting on the scaffold deck, are first removed.

http://www.4-safety.com/�


2

All scaffolds shall rest on a suitable footing and shall stand level. Movable scaffolds shall have the casters or wheels locked to prevent movement. Unstable objects such as loose brick or concrete blocks shall not be used to support scaffolds or planks. Never work on a scaffold in high winds or storms. Do not climb bracing of scaffold. Scaffolds shall never be altered or moved while they are in use or occupied, Overhead protection shall be provided for men on a scaffold exposed to overhead hazards. Where practical, the area beneath shall be barricaded and “Men Working Over Head” signs shall be posted in all approach directions. Scaffold Planking Scaffold planks may be painted 2" on each end to denote use for scaffold decking only. (A 2" x 10" or 2" x 12" scaffold grade material only will be used.) Scaffold planks are not to extend over their end supports more than 12" or less than 6" All planking on platforms shall be overlapped (minimum 12 inch) or secured from movement. Do not use cleated boards with cleats turned up. Inspection Before erecting and during dismantling, inspect all scaffold components. Those found with defects must be discarded immediately. Handrails, midrails, cross bracing, and steel tubing shall be inspected for nicks, especially near center span, and indications where a welding arc has struck, Scaffold components shall be straight and free from bends, kinks, dents, and severe rusting. Scaffold frame weld zones shall be inspected for cracks and ends of tubing for splitting or cracking. Manufactured decking shall be inspected for loose bolt or rivet connections and bent, kinked, or dented frame. Plywood surface should be checked for softening due to rot or wear, and peeling or laminated layers at edges. Safety planks should be checked out for rot, cracks, and other damage. Also, inspect the rod or bolt and cleat.



3

Each quick-connecting device, whether spring, threaded connection, or toggle pin arrangement, should be inspected to see that it operates properly. Casters, if used, should be inspected for smooth rolling surfaces, free turning, free acting swivel, and to be sure that the locking mechanism is in good working order. Any scaffold over 25' high should have the access ladder turned inside the framing, and alternate sides of landing. (At no time will a person be required to climb the outside of a scaffold over 25' high.) Design drawings must be made prior to erection and kept on site for any scaffold over 125' high. (They must be made by a licensed professional engineer competent in this field.) Rolling Scaffolds See illustrations on next page 1. Scaffolds and their components are capable of supporting without failure at least four times intended

maximum load. 2. Scaffold height does not exceed four times the minimum base. Out-riggers would be included as a

minimum base or the unit is securely tied off to prevent tipping. 3. Scaffold is level/plumb at all times and used only on level, smooth surface, free of major defects. 4. Use of ladders or makeshift devices to increase the height of the scaffold on the working platform is

prohibited. 5. Casters with effective locking devices are provided and all casters are locked

when unit is in use. 6. The platform decking covers the full width of the unit and is secured against

displacement. 7. Scaffold bracing is not used to ascend or descend the units unless the bracing is specifically designed

for climbing. An access ladder is provided and installed so as not to cause the unit to tip and must extend 36 inches above the deck.

8. Guard rails, midrails, toe boards are installed on all open sides and ends of the scaffold. 9. Where persons are required to work or pass under a scaffold, the unit is provided with a screen or

equivalent protective device to prevent materials from falling. 10. Overhead protection is provided for workers exposed to overhead hazards. 11. No one is to ride on the scaffold that is being moved. 12. Adjusting screws shall never be used with casters on rolling scaffolding.



4

Scaffolds and their components are capable of supporting without failure at least four times intended maximum load

Scaffold height does not exceed four times the minimum base. Out-riggers would be included as a minimum base or the unit is securely tied off to prevent tipping.

Scaffold is level/plumb at all times and used only on level, smooth surface, free of major defects.

Use of ladders or makeshift devices to increase the height of the scaffold on the working platform is prohibited.

Casters with effective locking devices are provided and all casters are locked when unit is not in use.

The platform decking covers the full width of the unit and is secured against displacement.

Scaffold bracing is not used to ascend or descend the units unless the bracing is specifically designed for climbing. An access ladder is provided and installed so as not to cause the unit to tip.

Guard rails, midrails, toe boards are installed on all open sides and ends of the scaffold.

Where persons are required to work or pass under a scaffold, the unit is provided with a screen or equivalent protective device to prevent materials from falling.

Overhead protection is provided for workers exposed to overhead hazards.

Ladder Must Extend 36” Above the Deck



5

Rolling Tower Scaffolding Inspection

Date: ___________ Job Location: ______________ Job Number: ___________

Inspector is to initial each inspection in the appropriate space. ITEMS: Yes No ACTION/COMMENTS Are scaffold components and planking in safe condition for use?

Have competent persons been in charge of erection?

Is the tower plumb? Is the tower height less than 4 times the minimum base with?

Are casters of proper size with locking device? Has proper access been provided? Is tower fully braced on both sides? Have horizontal diagonal bracing been position properly at base and intermediate levels of 20 feet?

Has proper guard railing been installed? Have hazardous conditions been provided for?

Power Lines? Wind Loading? Possible wash out of footings?

Is platform fully planked and toe boards installed?

Are planks secured to prevent movement or uplift?

Have personnel been instructed in the safe use of the scaffolding?

THIS TO CERTIFY THAT I HAVE INSPECTED THIS SCAFFOLDING ____________________ CC: Post, File



6

Scaffolding Inspection

Date: ___________ Job Location: ______________ Job Number: ___________

Inspector is to initial each inspection in the appropriate space. ITEMS: Yes No ACTION/COMMENTS Are scaffold components and planking in safe condition for use?

Have competent persons been in charge of erection?

Is the tower plumb? Is the tower height less than 4 times the minimum base with?

Are sills properly place and adequate size? Are screw jacks extended less than 12”? Has proper access been provided? Is tower fully braced on both sides? Have freestanding towers been guyed or tied off?

Has scaffold been tied to structure at least every 30 feet in length and 26 feet in height?

Have horizontal diagonal bracing been position properly at base and intermediate levels of 20 feet?

Has proper guard railing been installed? Have hazardous conditions been provided for?

Power Lines? Wind Loading? Possible wash out of footings?

Is platform fully planked and toe boards installed?

Are planks secured to prevent movement or uplift?

Have personnel been instructed in the safe use of the scaffolding?

THIS TO CERTIFY THAT I HAVE INSPECTED THIS SCAFFOLDING ____________________ CC: Post, File



7

Allowable spans shall be determined in compliance with the National Design Specification for Wood Construction published by the National Forest Products

Association; paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8-1988 Scaffolding-Safety Requirements published by the American National Standards Institute; or for 2 x 10 inch (nominal) or 2 x 9 inch (rough) solid sawn wood planks, as shown in the following table:

(ii) The maximum permissible span for 1 1/4 x 9-inch or wider wood plank of full thickness with a maximum intended load of 50 lb/ft. (2) shall be 4 feet.

(c) Fabricated planks and platforms may be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks. Maximum spans for such units shall be as recommended by the manufacturer based on the maximum intended load being calculated as follows:

Note: Platform units used to make scaffold platforms intended for light-duty use shall be capable of supporting at least 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire unit-span area, or a 250-pound point load placed on the unit at the center of the span, whichever load produces the greater shear force.

Maximum intended nominal load (lb/ft

(2))

Maximum permissible span using full

thickness undressed lumber (ft)

Maximum permissible span using nominal thickness lumber

(ft) 25 10 8 50 8 6 75 6

Rated load capacity Intended load Light-duty * 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area Medium-duty * 50 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. Heavy-duty * 75 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.

One-person * 250 pounds placed at the center of the span (total 250 pounds).

Two-person * 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 500 pounds).

Three-person * 250 pounds placed at the center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 750 pounds).



8

Guardrail Midrail Toe board

Tied to structure every 26’ vertically and 30’ horizontally

Completely decked

Make sure correctly braced

Use when height of tower over 4 times width

Screw jacks max. 12” exposed and on sill plates



9

• All scaffolding inspected daily? • Erected on sound rigid footing? • Tied to structure as required? • Guardrails, intermediate rails, toeboards and/or

screens in place? • Planking is sound and sturdy? • Proper access provided? • Employees below protected from falling objects,

hard hats being worn? • For additional information:

29 CFR 1926 – Subpart L, MIOSHA Part 12

General Requirements: • Support own weight and 4 X max.

intended load. • Platforms fully planked or decked

(no gaps greater than 1”). • Front edge of platforms no more

than 14” from the face of work (18” for plastering and lathing operations.

• Planks extend at least 6” but not more than 12” past support unless designed and installed and /or guarded properly.

• Overlap planks not less than 12” only over supports, unless restrained to prevent movement.

• No mixed scaffold components used unless compatible and integrity maintained.

• Higher than 4:1 ratio restrained from tipping by guys, ties, or equivalent (mobile scaffolds require a height to base ratio of no more than 2:1).

• Must have safe access with bottom rung of ladder not more than 24” high.

• Rest platforms at 35’ intervals. • Maintain power line clearances. • No work during storms or high

winds. • Fall protection required at 10’.

Base plate centered and secured.

Sills are fully bearing on the ground.

Casters or base plate & mudsills.

Horizontal Brace

Brake


FIRE PROTECTION

7




Filed with the Secretary of State on August 31, 1976 (as amended May 17, 1983) (as amended June 1, 1995) (as amended September 10, 2002)


(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 19 and 21

of 1974 PA 154 and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, MCL 408.1019, 408.1021, and 445.2001)

R 408.41801, R 408.41836, R 408.41837, R 408.41838, R 408.41841, R 408.41842, R 408.41851, R 408.41852, R 408.41853, R 408.41861, R 408.41863, R 408.41864, R 408.41866, R 408.41868,

R 408.41869, R 408.41871, R 408.41875, R 408.41876, R 408.41877, and R 408.41884 of the Michigan Administrative Code are amended and R 408.41802 is added to the Code as follows:


PART 18. FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS R 408.41801 Scope. ................................................................ 1 R 408.41802 Adoption of Standards. ....................................... 1 R 408.41836 Definitions; A to C............................................... 2 R 408.41837 Definitions; F. ..................................................... 2 R 408.41838 Definitions; L to V. .............................................. 2 R 408.41841 Employer Responsibility. .................................... 3 R 408.41842 Employee Emergency Action Plans. .................. 3 R 408.41850 Training. ............................................................. 3 R 408.41851 Portable Fire Extinguishing Equipment;

Selection and Installation. ................................................. 4 R 408.41852 Portable Fire Extinguishing Equipment;

Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance. ............................. 4 R 408.41853 Fixed Fire Equipment. ........................................ 5 R 408.41854 Water Supply...................................................... 6 R 408.41855 Fire Hose and Connections. ............................... 6 R 408.41856 Fire Alarms. ........................................................ 6 R 408.41861 Ignition Hazards. ................................................ 6 R 408.41862 Transportation of Flammable and

Combustible Liquids. ........................................................ 6 R 408.41863 Flammable and Combustible Liquids;

Inside Storage. ................................................................. 6 R 408.41864 Inside Storage Room.......................................... 6 R 408.41865 Flammables and Combustibles;

Outside Storage................................................................ 7

R 408.41866 Emergency Venting of Outside Portable Tanks. .................................................................7

R 408.41867 Flammable and Combustible Liquids; Dispensing. ..........................................................8

R 408.41868 Flammable and Combustible Liquids; Handling At Point Of Use. .................................................8

R 408.41869 Flammable and Combustible Liquids; Service and Refueling Areas.............................................8

R 408.41871 Liquefied Petroleum Gas. ...................................8 R 408.41872 L. P. Pipe, Fittings, and Hose..............................8 R 408.41873 L. P. Safety Devices............................................8 R 408.41874 L. P. Gas Appliances. .........................................8 R 408.41875 L.P. Containers and Equipment. .........................8 R 408.41876 Piping Liquid or Vapor L.P. Gas

Into Buildings and Structures. ...........................................9 R 408.41877 Storage of Portable Containers...........................9 R 408.41878 Location of Containers. .....................................10 R 408.41879 Container Valve Protection. ..............................10 R 408.41881 Temporary Buildings. ........................................10 R 408.41882 Open Yard Storage; Combustible Materials......10R 408.41883 Indoor Storage. .................................................10 R 408.41884 Heating Devices................................................10

R 408.41801 Scope.

Rule 1801. This part pertains to all of the following: (a) Fire prevention plans. (b) Employee emergency plans. (c) Fire fighting equipment. (d) The storing and dispensing of flammable and

combustible materials. (e) Heating devices for construction operations.

R 408.41802 Adoption of Standards. Rule 1802. (1) The standards specified in this rule,

except the standards specified in subrule(5) of this rule, are adopted by reference in these rules.

(2) The following standards are adopted by reference in these rules and are available from The National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, Massachusetts, 02269-9101, USA; telephone number: 617-770-3000; or via the internet at web-site: www.nfpa.org; or at the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, MIOSHA Standards Division, 7150 Harris Drive, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan, 48909-


http://www.nfpa.org/

2 8143, at a cost as of the time of adoption of these rules as stated:

(i) NFPA 13 “Installation Of Sprinkler System” 1991 edition. Cost $67.50.

(ii) NFPA 14 “Standard For The Installation Of Standpipe, Private Hydrants And Hose Systems”, 2000 edition. Cost $26.75.

(iii) NFPA 25 “Inspection, Testing, And Maintenance Of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems”, 1998 edition. Cost $35.25.

(iv) NFPA 251 “Standard Methods Of Fire Testing Of Building Construction And Materials,” 1990 edition. Cost $13.50.

(v) NFPA 30 “Flammable And Combustible Liquids Code,” 1996 edition. Cost $29.75.

(vi) NFPA 385 “Standard For Tank Vehicles For Flammable And Combustible Liquids,” 1990 edition. Cost $22.25.

(vii) NFPA 58 “Storage And Handling Of Liquefied Petroleum Gases”, 1992 edition. Cost 32.25.

(viii) NFPA 52 “The Compressed Natural Gas Vehicular Fuel Systems,” 1992 edition. Cost $13.00.

(ix) NFPA 59A “Production, Storage And Handling Of Liquefied Natural Gas,” 1990 edition. Cost $18.00.

(3) Compressed Gas Association Standard CGA C7 “Guide To The Preparation Of Precautionary Labeling And Marking Of Compressed Gas Containers,” 2000 edition, which is adopted by reference in these rules and is available from Global Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, Colorado, 80112, USA, telephone number: 1-800-854-7179 or via the internet at web-site: http://global.ihs.com at a cost as of the time of adoption of these amendments of $294.00

(4) The provisions of 49 C.F.R. Parts 186-199, are adopted by reference in these rules and are available from The Superintendent of Documents, P.O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, 15250-7954, USA, telephone number: 1-866-512-1800 or via the internet at web-site: http://bookstore.gpo.gov at a cost as of the time of adoption of these amendments of $2.00; or at the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, MIOSHA Standards Division, 7150 Harris Drive, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan, 48909-8143.

(5) Michigan Construction Safety Standard Part 22 'Signals, Signs, Tags And Barricades,' being R 480.42201 et seq. which is referenced in R 408.41861, R 408.41863, R 408.41864, and R 408.41869, is available for inspection and distribution at no charge from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, MIOSHA Standards Division, 7150 Harris Drive, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan, 48908-8143, or via the internet at website: www.michigan.gov/cis

R 408.41836 Definitions; A to C.

Rule 1836. (1) “Approved” means equipment that has been listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory which issues approvals for the equipment.

(2) “Closed container” means a container which is sealed by means of a lid or other device so that neither liquid nor vapor will escape from it at ordinary temperatures.

(3) “Combustible” means capable of burning. (4) “Combustible liquid” means any liquid that has a

flash point at or above 100 degrees Fahrenheit (37.8 degrees Celsius) and below 200 degrees Fahrenheit (93.4 degrees Celsius).

(5) “Container in use” means a container connected for use.

R 408.41837 Definitions; F. Rule 1837. (1) “Fire alarm signaling system” means an

alerting signal which is clearly audible throughout all areas and which would immediately alert employees in case of an emergency.

(2) “Fire fighting equipment” means any of the following:

(a) Portable extinguishers. (b) Fixed fire equipment. (c) Water barrels and pails. (d) Standpipes. (e) Fire hose. (f) Fire alarms. (3) “Fire protection” means to provide fire fighting

equipment, training, and evacuation plans. (4) “Fire resistance” means that quality of a material

which renders it so resistant to fire that, for a specified time and under conditions of a standard heat intensity, the material will not fail structurally and will not permit the side away from the fire to become hotter than a specified temperature. For purposes of this part, fire resistance shall be determined by the fire test of building construction and materials, as prescribed in The National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 251, “Standard Methods Of Fire Testing Of Building Construction And Materials,” 1990 edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802.

(5) “Fixed fire equipment” means a fire extinguishing system that is permanently mounted and portable portions of a system, such as a hose and nozzle attached to a fixed supply of extinguishing agent.

(6) “Flammable” means to ignite easily and burn intensely or means to have a rapid rate of flame spread.

(7) “Flammable liquid” means any liquid which has a flash point below 100 degrees Fahrenheit (37.8 degrees Celsius) and which has vapor pressure of not more than 40 pounds per square inch (absolute) at 100 degrees Fahrenheit (37.8 degrees Celsius).

(8) “Flash point” means the temperature at which a liquid gives off vapor sufficient to form an ignitable mixture with air near the surface of the liquid or within the vessel used, as determined by the following appropriate test procedure and apparatus:

(a) The flash point of liquids having a viscosity less than 45 Saybolt Universal Second(s) at 100 degrees Fahrenheit (37.8 degrees Celsius) and a flash point below 175 degrees Fahrenheit (79.4 degrees Celsius).

(b) The flash point of liquids having a viscosity of 45 Saybolt Universal Second(s) or more at 175 degrees Fahrenheit (79.4 degrees Celsius).

R 408.41838 Definitions; L to V.

Rule 1838. (1) “Liquefied petroleum gas,” “L.P.G.,” or “L.P. gas” means any material which is composed predominately of any of the following hydrocarbons or mixtures of hydrocarbons:

(a) Propane. (b) Propylene. (c) Butane. (d) Isobutene. (e) Butylene. (2) “Means of egress” means a continuous path of

travel from any part within a building to the open air outside at ground level.

(3) “Portable container ---- L.P.G.” means a container designed to be readily moved and transported, either filled or partially filled. The containers shall have all container appurtenances protected so that they can be safely handled as a package.

http://global.ihs.com/

http://bookstore.gpo.gov/

http://www.michigan.gov/cis

3

(4) “Portable tank----flammable and combustible liquid” means a closed container which is made of metal, which has a liquid capacity of more than 60 United States gallons, which is not intended for fixed installation, and which is designed so that it will safely relieve internal pressure when exposed to fire.

(5) “Safety can” means an approved metal or nonmetallic container which has a capacity of not more than 5 gallons, which has a flash-arresting screen, spring closing lid and spout cover, and which is designed so that it will safely relieve internal pressure when exposed to fire.

(6) “Temporary building” means a structure erected or placed for a period not longer than the project construction time.

(7) “Temporary heating device” means a heating unit to provide heat for a period not longer than the project construction time.

(8) “Vapor pressure” means the pressure, measured in pounds per square inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile liquid.

R 408.41841 Employer Responsibility.

Rule 1841. (1) An employer shall be responsible for the development and maintenance of a fire protection and prevention program to be followed during all phases of construction to reduce the chance of fire and injury to employees.

(2) The fire protection portion of the program shall include all of the following:

(a) Establishing and maintaining a means of egress from all areas of the building occupied by employees to provide free and unobstructed egress from all parts of the building or structure at all times when the building or structure is occupied. A lock or fastening that prevents free escape from the inside of any building shall not be installed, except in mental, penal, or corrective institutions where supervisory personnel is continually on duty and effective provisions are made to remove occupants in case of fire or other emergency.

(b) Posting fire rules or, by other means, informing the employees of the evacuation signal, escape routes, and emergency phone numbers. Exits shall be marked by a readily visible sign. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible signs in all cases where the exit or way to reach the exit is not immediately visible to the occupants.

(c) A requirement that means of egress shall be continually maintained free of all obstructions or impediments to full instant use in the case of fire or other emergency.

(3) The fire prevention portion of the program shall include both of the following:

(a) A housekeeping policy designed to keep a means of egress free from the accumulation of stored materials and debris and to reduce the likelihood of fire.

(b) A policy for the storage of combustible and flammable liquids and materials and for the use of proper heating equipment as prescribed in this part.

(4) Fire fighting equipment shall be provided by the employer and meet all of the applicable requirements of this part as to location, accessibility, inspection, testing, and maintenance. Defective equipment shall be immediately replaced.

(5) The requirements of this rule may be satisfied by 1 employer who is designated by all of the employers on the job if an agreement to that effect is reduced to writing and posted for all employees, employers, and representatives of

the department of consumer and industry services to see. The agreement shall include authority for the designated employer to comply with this rule.

(6) An employer shall furnish training to an employee before the employer assigns an employee to perform maintenance on a fixed fire system.

(7) An employer shall ensure that fire walls and exit stairways required for the completed buildings are given construction priority. Fire doors with automatic closing devices shall be hung on openings as soon as practicable.

(8) An employer shall retain existing fire separations in buildings undergoing alterations or demolition until operations necessitate their removal.

R 408.41842 Employee Emergency Action Plans.

Rule 1842. (1) This rule applies to all emergency action plans required by a particular MIOSHA or OSHA safety or health standard. The emergency action plan shall be in writing, except as provided in subrule (6) of this rule, and shall cover the designated actions that employers and employees must take to ensure employee safety from fire and other emergencies.

(2) All of the following elements, at a minimum, shall be included in an employee emergency action plan:

(a) Emergency escape procedures and emergency escape route assignments.

(b) Procedures to be followed by employees who remain to operate critical plant operations before they evacuate.

(c) Procedures to account for all employees after emergency evacuation has been completed.

(d) Rescue and medical duties for those employees who are to perform them.

(e) The preferred means of reporting fires and other emergencies.

(f) Names or regular job titles of persons of departments that can be contacted for further information or an explanation of duties under the plan.

(3) An employer shall establish, in the emergency action plan, the types of evacuation to be used in emergency circumstances.

(4) Before implementing the emergency action plan, an employer shall designate and train a sufficient number of persons to assist in the safe and orderly emergency evacuation of employees.

(5) An employer shall review the plan at the following times with each employee who is covered by the plan:

(a) Initially when the plan is developed. (b) When the employee's responsibilities or designated

actions under the plan change. (c) When the plan is changed. (6) Upon initial assignment, an employer shall review,

with each employee, the parts of the plan that an employee must know to protect the employee in the event of an emergency. The written plan shall be kept at the workplace and made available for employee review. For employers that have 10 or fewer employees, the plan may be communicated orally to employees and the employer need not maintain a written plan.

(7) An employer shall provide, as warranted by the project, a trained and equipped fire fighting organization (fire brigade) to assure adequate protection to life.

R 408.41850 Training.

Rule 1850. (1) If an employer has provided portable fire extinguishers for employee use in the workplace, the employer shall also provide an education program to familiarize employees with the general principles of fire

4 extinguisher use and the hazards involved with incipient stage fire fighting.

(2) An employer shall provide the education required in this rule upon initial employment and at least annually thereafter.

R 408.41851 Portable Fire Extinguishing Equipment;

Selection and Installation. Rule 1851. (1) All portable fire extinguishers shall bear an

approved label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. A fire extinguisher or extinguishing device that contains an active agent or propellant which has thermal decomposition products that have a level of vapor toxicity equal to or greater than any of the following listed materials shall not be used, installed for use, or allowed to remain installed for use:

(a) Carbon tetrachloride, CCL4. (b) Chlorobromomethane, CH2 BrCL. (c) Azeotropic chlormethane, CM7. (d) Dibromodifluoromethane, CBr2F2. (e) 1, 2-dibromo-2-chloro-1, 1, 2-trifluoroethane, Cbr-F2,

CBrCLf. (f) 1, 2-dibromo-2, 2-difluoroethane, CH2BrCbrF2. (g) Methylbromide, CH3Br. (h) Ethylene dibromide, CH2BrCH2Br. (i) Hydrogen bromide, HBr. (j) Methylene bromide, CH2Br2. (k) Bromodifluoromethane, CHBrF2. (2) A portable fire extinguisher that has a rating of not

less than 2A shall be provided for each 3,000 square feet of the protected building area at each floor level and along the means of egress to facilitate the evacuation of employees, unless otherwise required by this part. The travel distance to the nearest fire extinguisher shall be not more than 100 feet. In multistory buildings, at least 1 fire extinguisher shall be located adjacent to a stairway.

(3) Fire fighting equipment shall be located where it will be readily seen and accessible along normal paths of travel in the protected area.

(4) One 55-gallon open drum of water and 2 fire pails may be substituted for a fire extinguisher that has a 2A rating. The water shall be protected from freezing.

(5) A 1/2 inch or larger interior diameter garden hose which is not more than 100 feet in length and which is equipped with a nozzle may be substituted for a 2A fire extinguisher if it is capable of reaching all points in the area that would be covered by the replaced extinguisher and is capable of discharging not less than 5 gallons per minute with a horizontal hose stream of not less than 30 feet. The hose line shall be mounted on a rack or reel. Not more than 1/2 of the total number of required fire extinguishers may be replaced by the hose.

(6) In addition to the general requirements of this rule, fire extinguishers shall be supplied as follows:

(a) Not less than 1 portable fire extinguisher that has a rating of not less than 20 BC units shall be located as follows: (i) Outside of, but not more than 10 feet from, a

door opening to a room used for the storage of flammable or combustible liquids.

(ii) Not less than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet, from an outside storage area.

(iii) On each tank truck or other vehicle used to transport or dispense flammable or combustible liquids.

(b) Each service or fueling area shall have at least 1 portable fire extinguisher which has not less than a 20 BC unit rating and which is located within 75 feet of each pump, dispenser, underground fill opening, and lubricating or service area.

(c) Storage locations for liquefied petroleum gas (L.P.G.) shall be provided with at least 1 approved portable fire extinguisher that has a rating of not less than 20 BC.

(d) Each site of a hazardous process shall be provided with a portable fire extinguisher of an appropriate size and type. Other means for safety or control may be provided if approved or required by the process.

(7) Table 1 may be used in selecting and providing an extinguisher.


TABLE 1

HAZARD DESCRIPTION

EXTINGUISHER TYPE AND CONTENTS

Class "A" Fire Combustible Material Loaded stream, Multipurpose dry chemical, Pressure-operated

water, Water pump tanks, Water mist, Halon 1211.

Class "B" Fire Flammable Liquids, Gas, Or

Grease Carbon dioxide, Dry chemical, Foam, Loaded stream,

Multipurpose dry chemical, Halon 1211.

Class "C" Fire Electrical Equipment Carbon dioxide with plastic horn only, Dry chemical, Multipurpose

dry chemical, Water mist, Halon 1211.

Class "D" Fire Combustible Metal Extinguishing agent listed for use on a specific combustible metal

hazard. R 408.41852 Portable Fire Extinguishing Equipment;

Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance. Rule 1852. (1) An extinguisher shall be inspected

monthly, or at more frequent intervals when circumstances require. Inspections shall check for all of the following:

(a) That the extinguisher is in its designated place. (b) That the extinguisher has not been actuated or

tampered with. (c) That the extinguisher does not have obvious

damage, physical damage, external corrosion, or other impairment.

(2) An extinguisher that shows defects which could possibly affect its operation shall be removed from service and given a complete check. An employer shall attach a tag to an extinguisher or keep a record documenting extinguisher maintenance or discharge dates and the initials or signature of the person who performed the service. Records shall be readable, kept on file or in an electronic system (for example, bar coding), and shall be available for inspection by a representative of the department of consumer and industry services. An employer shall keep a record of extinguisher maintenance or recharge dates and the initials or signature of the person who performed the service.

5

(3) An extinguisher shall receive a thorough inspection at least once a year to ensure operability. An extinguisher that requires recharging or weighing shall be maintained at least annually.

(4) An extinguisher that shows evidence of corrosion or mechanical damage shall be subjected to an approved hydrostatic test as prescribed in subrule (6) of this rule or shall be replaced.

(5) An extinguisher shall be given an approved hydrostatic test every 5 years, except for the following extinguishers, which shall be tested every 12 year:

(a) A dry chemical extinguisher that has a brazedbrass, aluminum, or mild steel shell.

(b) An extinguisher that used bromotrifluoromethane. (c) A dry powder extinguisher that is for metal fires.

The hydrostatic test date shall be recorded on a suitable metallized decal or on an equally durable material which has been affixed by a heatless process to the shell of the extinguisher and which shows the date of the test, the test pressure, and the name of the person or agency making the test. An extinguisher tested after the effective date of this part shall have a label that will not retain its original condition when removal from an extinguisher is attempted. An extinguisher manufactured under the department of transportation specifications adopted by reference in subrule (7) of this rule may have the inspection date and serviceman's or firm's name, initials, or symbol stamped into the cylinder.

(6) A nitrogen cylinder or other cylinder for inert gas, such as found on a wheeled extinguisher, shall be hydrostatically tested at not more than 5-year intervals.

(7) An extinguisher, cylinder, or cartridge which is used for the storage of a compressed gas and which is manufactured as prescribed in department of transportation specifications shall by hydrostatically tested in accordance with the provisions of C.F.R. 49 Parts 186- 199, which are adopted by reference in R 408.41802.

(8) The hose and couplings on an extinguisher equipped with a shutoff nozzle at the outlet end of the hose shall have a hydrostatic test without the nozzle at the test intervals prescribed for the unit on which the hose is installed.

(9) A dry chemical and dry powder hose assembly that requires a hydrostatic test shall be at a test pressure of 300 pounds per square inch for 1 minute.

(10) An extinguisher subjected to an original factory test pressure of 350 pounds per square inch or more shall be tested at 75% of the factory test pressure, but not less than 300 pounds per square inch. See table 2.

(11) An extinguisher shall be suitable for use within a temperature range from plus 40 degrees to plus 120 degrees Fahrenheit. An extinguisher installed at a location subject to temperature extremes shall be of a type listed for the temperature to which it will be exposed or shall be placed in an enclosure capable of maintaining the temperature.


TABLE 2

HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS -NON-ICC SHELLS

SHELLS NOT SPECIFIED IN UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION REGULATIONS

(formerly Interstate Commerce Commission)

EXTINGUISHER TYPE ORIGINAL FACTORY

TEST PRESSURE REQUIRES HYDROSTATIC

TEST PRESSURE

400 psi or greater 75% of factory test pressure All dry chemical and Dry powder

350-399 psi below 350 psi 300 psi 75% of factory test pressure

Foam - 500 psi factory test 500 375

Foam - 350 psi factory test 350 300

400 psi or greater 75% of factory test pressure Stored-pressure or cartridge-operated water-type, including antifreeze

And loaded stream 350-399 psi below 350 300 psi 75% of factory test pressure

R 408.41853 Fixed Fire Equipment.

Rule 1853. (1) If the structure being constructed includes the installation of an automatic sprinkler or standpipe and hose system, then the installation shall be made during the construction of each story or section and shall be placed in service for each story or section that is completed. The standpipes shall be provided with Siamese fire department connections which shall be on the outside of the structure, at street level, conspicuously marked, and free from obstruction.

(2) During demolition or alterations, an existing sprinkler or standpipe system shall be maintained in service in any portion of a structure that is not subject to demolition or alteration. The operation of a sprinkler control valve shall be permitted only by a properly authorized person. Modification

of a sprinkler system to permit alterations or additional demolition shall be expedited so that the automatic protection may be returned to service as quickly as possible. Sprinkler control valves shall be checked daily at the close of work to ascertain whether the protection is in service. When the sprinkler or standpipe system is out of service for other than routine maintenance, the local fire department and the building manager or designated representative shall be notified. A sign shall be posted on each fire department connection that is out of service and the balance of the service shall be tested and resealed in operable condition, where required, and both the fire department and the building manager or designated representative shall be advised that the system is again in service.

6

(3) A standpipe and hose system shall have not less than 1 outlet per story.

(4) An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed and maintained as prescribed in The National Fire Protection Association Standards NFPA 13 “Installation of Sprinkler Systems,” 1991 edition; NFPA 14 “Standard For The Installation Of Standpipe, Private Hydrants And Hose Systems,” 2000 edition; and NFPA 25 “Inspection, Testing, And Maintenance Of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems,” 1998 edition. The standards are adopted by reference in R 408.41802. R 408.41854 Water Supply.

Rule 1854. (1) A water supply shall be available to maintain a fire protection system at full rated capacity when combustible materials are present.

(2) Where an underground water main is to provide water for fire protection equipment, the main shall be installed, completed, and made available for use as soon as practicable.

R 408.41855 Fire Hose and Connections.

Rule 1855. (1) One-hundred feet or less of 1-1/ 2 inch hose, with a nozzle capable of discharging water at 25 gallons or more per minute supplied from an approved standpipe system may be substituted for a fire extinguisher rated not more than 2A in the designated area provided that the hose line can reach all points in the area.

(2) An approved hose valve shall be provided at each outlet for attachment of hose.

(3) The employer shall contact the local fire fighting organization to assure that fire hose connections on the jobsite are compatible with their fire fighting equipment. If a connection is not compatible, the employer shall install an adapter, or equivalent, to permit connection of local fire fighting equipment.

(4) During demolition involving combustible materials, charged hose lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall be made available.

R 408.41856 Fire Alarms.

Rule 1856. An alarm system shall be established whereby all employees on the site can be alerted for an emergency. The signaling device shall be audible throughout the structure.

R 408.41861 Ignition Hazards.

Rule 1861. (1) Internal combustion engine powered equipment shall be so located that the exhaust piping is at a distance away from flammable and combustible materials to prevent ignition. When the exhaust is piped to outside the building under construction, a clearance of not less than 6 inches shall be maintained between the piping and flammable and combustible material.

(2) Smoking shall be prohibited within 25 feet of flammable material. The area shall be posted with a sign “No Smoking or Open Flame.” The sign shall be as prescribed in the construction safety standard, Part 22 'Signals, Signs, Tags and Barricades,' being R 408.42201 et seq., which is referenced in R 408.41802.

(3) Electrical wiring equipment and portable batterypowered lighting equipment used in connection with the storage, handling, or use of flammable material shall be of the type approved for the hazardous location.

(4) The nozzle of an air, inert gas, and steam line or hose, when used in the cleaning or ventilation of tanks and vessels that contain flammable gases or vapors, shall be bonded to the tank or vessel shell.

(5) When a hazardous concentration of flammable gas or vapor exists in the area outside of the tank or vessel, the external bonding connection shall be made to the tank or vessel with the non-sparking device. The final bonding connection shall be made outside the hazardous concentration.

R 408.41862 Transportation of Flammable and

Combustible Liquids. Rule 1862. (1) A container used for the transportation of

a flammable and combustible liquid shall be of substantial construction or be substantially packed so they will not be readily broken or punctured during transportation or handling.

(2) A container shall be of sound metal or nonmetallic construction, having a tight closure with a screwed or spring cover.

(3) A safety can shall be used for the transportation of a flammable liquid in a quantity greater than 1 gallon, except that this requirement shall not apply to those flammable liquid materials which are highly viscid (extremely hard to pour), which may be stored and transported in original shipping containers.

(4) Only the original container or a safety can shall be used for transportation of flammable liquid in quantities of 1 gallon or less.

(5) A container used for the transportation of a flammable or combustible liquid shall be tightly closed to prevent the escape of liquid or vapor.

R 408.41863 Flammable and Combustible Liquids;

Inside Storage. Rule 1863. (1) Not more than 25 gallons of flammable or

combustible liquid shall be stored within a room outside of an approved wood or metal cabinet.

(2) Not more than 60 gallons of flammable liquids or 120 gallons of combustible liquids shall be stored in any 1 storage cabinet. Not more than 3 such cabinets shall be located in a single storage area. Quantities of more than 60 gallons of flammable liquids or 12 gallons of combustible liquids shall be stored in an inside storage room as prescribed in R 408.41864.

(3) A wood cabinet, when used to store flammable or combustible liquids, shall have the bottom, back, sides, and top constructed of not less than 1-inch exterior plywood which shall not break down or delaminate under fire test conditions. All joints shall be rabbeted and secured in 2 directions by flathead wood screws. When more than 1 door is provided, there shall be a rabbeted overlap of not less than 1 inch. Steel hinges shall be mounted so that the holding capacity is not lost due to loosening or burnout of the screws. The cabinet shall be painted inside and out with a fire-retardant paint.

(4) A cabinet used to store flammable and combustible liquids shall be labeled with conspicuous lettering, “Flammable----Keep Fire Away,” as prescribed in the construction safety standard, Part 22 'Signals, Signs, Tags and Barricades,' being R 408.42201 et seq. which is referenced in R 408.41802.

(5) A flammable or combustible liquid shall not be stored in a building in an area used as a means of egress.

R 408.41864 Inside Storage Room.

Rule 1864. (1) An inside storage room shall be constructed to meet the required fire resistance rating for its use. The construction shall meet the test specifications in The National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 251 “Standard Methods of Fire Testing of Building Construction and Materials,” 1990 edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802.

7

(2) Either an opening from an inside storage room to another room or building shall be provided with noncombustible liquid-tight raised sill or ramp not less than 6 inches in height or else the floor in the storage area shall be not less than 6 inches below the surrounding floor. The opening shall be provided with an approved self-closing fire door that is labeled with the words “Flammable ---- Keep Fire Away” in conspicuous lettering as prescribed in the construction safety standard, Part 22 'Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades,' being R 408.42201 et seq. which is referenced in R 408.41802.

(3) If wood shelving, racks, dunnage, or floor overlay is used in the room, it shall be not less than 1 inch nominal thickness.

(4) If another portion of the building or another building is exposed and a window covers an opening, the window shall be of a type approved for the hazard exposure.

(5) A material that will react with water to create a fire hazard shall not be stored in the same room with a flammable or combustible liquid.

(6) Quantities of flammable and combustible liquids stored in an inside storage room shall be limited in accordance with the criteria prescribed in table 3.

(7) Every inside storage room shall be provided with a mechanical ventilating system and meet all of the following provisions:

(a) A switch located outside of the door of the inside storage room shall control the mechanical exhausting system and any lighting fixtures.

(b) An electric pilot light shall be installed adjacent to the switch if flammable liquids are dispensed within the room.

(c) The ventilation system shall commence not more than 12 inches above the floor and be designed to provide for a complete change of air within the room not less than 6 times per hour when flammable and combustible liquids are stored in the room.

(d) The exhausting outlet from the room shall be on the exterior of the building in which the room is located and away from any source of ignition.

(8) An inside storage room shall have at least 1 aisle which shall be not less than 3 feet in width and which shall be maintained free of obstructions.

(9) Containers that have more than a 30-gallon capacity shall not be stacked one upon another.


TABLE 3

INSIDE STORAGE ROOM

Fixed Fire Protection Provided

Fire Resistance Rating of Room

Maximum Size Of Storage Area

Total Allowable Quantities Gallons/Square Foot/Floor Area

Yes 2 hours 500 square feet 10

No 2 hours 500 square feet 4

Yes 1 hour 150 square feet 5

No 1 hour 150 square feet 2

R 408.41865 Flammables and Combustibles; Outside

Storage. Rule 1865. (1) Containers of flammable and combustible

liquids with not more than 60 gallons in each container shall not be stored in excess of 1,100 gallons in any outside storage area.

(2) Portable tanks stored outside shall not be closer than 20 feet from any building. Two or more portable tanks, grouped together, having a combined capacity in excess of 2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5-foot clear area.

(3) Within 200 feet of each portable tank, there shall be a 12-foot wide access way to permit approach of fire control apparatus.

(4) A flammable and combustible liquid in an out door storage area shall be stored not less than 20 feet from a building.

(5) Within 200 feet of each pile or group of flammable or combustible containers, a 12-foot wide access way shall be maintained to permit the approach of fire control equipment.

(6) An outside storage area for flammable and combustible liquids shall be graded in a manner to divert a possible spill away from a building or other hazard, or shall be surrounded by a curb or earth dike not less than 12 inches high. When a curb or dike is used, provisions shall be made to drain off accumulations of water or a spill of a flammable or combustible liquid in such a manner that the spill cannot create another hazard.

(7) An outside storage area for flammable or combustible liquid shall be kept free of weeds, papers, debris, and other combustibles not necessary to the storage.

(8) An above ground tank or loading operation shall not be installed closer than 25 feet plus 1 inch per 1,000 volts, measured horizontally, from the center line of electric power lines, or under an electric power line, except that service entrance and service lines may be closer than 25 feet but not over the tanks or loading area. This prohibition shall not apply to a fuel oil tank with up to a 275-gallon individual capacity or a 550-gallon aggregate capacity that is used for heating purposes.

(9) A flammable or combustible liquid outdoor storage area shall not occupy any area used as a means of egress.

R 408.41866 Emergency Venting of Outside Portable

Tanks. Rule 1866. A portable tank that has a capacity of 660

gallons or less of flammable or combustible liquid shall be in compliance with the provisions of chapters III, IV, and V of The National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 30, “Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code,” 1996 edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802. A portable tank and its piping system that has a capacity of more than 660 gallons of flammable or combustible liquid shall be designed, constructed, and tested as prescribed in chapters II and III of The National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 30, “Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code,” 1996 edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802.

8 R 408.41867 Flammable and Combustible Liquids;

Dispensing. Rule 1867. (1) An area where a flammable or

combustible liquid is transferred at one time, in a quantity of more than 5 gallons from one tank or container to another tank or container, shall be separate from other operations or a building by a distance of 25 feet or by a wall not less than 5 feet high having a fire resistance of not less than 1 hour.

(2) Provisions shall be made to neutralize spills of flammable and combustible liquids. Natural or mechanical ventilation shall be capable of maintaining vapor below 10% of the lower explosive limit.

(3) Transfer of a flammable and combustible liquid from one container to another shall be done only when the containers are electrically bonded.

(4) A flammable or combustible liquid shall be transferred from or drawn into containers by 1 of the following:

(a) Through a closed piping system. (b) From a safety can. (c) By a device drawing through the top from a closed

container or portable tank, by gravity or a pump, through a self-closing valve. Air pressure shall not be used.

(5) A dispensing device, hose, and nozzle shall be an approved type and the dispensing unit shall be protected from collision damage. The nozzle shall be an automatic closing-type without a latch open device.


Handling At Point Of Use. Rule 1868. (1) Not more than 1 day's supply, but not to

exceed 25 gallons, of flammable or combustible liquid shall be permitted to stand outside a cabinet at a place of usage.

(2) A flammable or combustible liquid shall not be used where there is an open flame or source of ignition within 50 feet of the liquid.

(3) Leakage or spillage of a flammable or combustible liquid shall be disposed of without creating another hazard.

(4) An open container containing a flammable liquid shall be equipped with a cover that has a fused link which will automatically close if the liquid is ignited.

(5) Natural or mechanical ventilation capable of maintaining the vapor below 10% of the lower explosive limit shall be provided and used when a flammable liquid is used or handled.

(6) Flammable liquids shall be kept in closed containers when not in use.


Service and Refueling Areas. Rule 1869. (1) A tank truck shall be designed,

constructed, and maintained as prescribed in The National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 385 “Standard For Tank Vehicles For Flammable And Combustible Liquids,” 1990 edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802.

(2) An emergency switch that is clearly identified and accessible shall be available to shut off all power to all dispensing devices in an emergency and shall be in a location that is remote from the dispensing device.

(3) Sources of ignition, such as smoking, open flame, cutting and welding, frictional heat, sparks, and heating equipment, shall not be permitted within 25 feet in any direction of where an internal combustion engine is fueled or where a flammable or combustible liquid is dispensed. A warning sign shall be posted as prescribed in construction safety standard Part 22 'Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades,' being R 408.42201 et seq. which is referenced in R 408.41802. The motor of any equipment being fueled shall be shut off during the fueling operation.

R 408.41871 Liquefied Petroleum Gas. Rule 1871. (1) The storage and handling of L.P.G. shall

be as prescribed in The National Fire Protection Association Standards, NFPA 58 “Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases,” 1992 edition; NFPA 52 “The Compressed Natural Gas Vehicular Fuel Systems,” 1992 edition; and NFPA 59A “Production, Storage and Handling of Liquefied Natural Gas,” 1990 edition. The standards are adopted by reference in R 408.41802.

(2) An employer shall also contact the Michigan Department Of Environmental Quality, Storage Tank Division, for additional rules concerning the installation, use, and storage of liquefied petroleum gases. The Storage Tank Division can be reached at The Town Center, 333 South Capital, Lansing, Michigan, 48909-7657 or via website: www.michigan.gov/deq

R 408.41872 L. P. Pipe, Fittings, and Hose.

Rule 1872. (1) Piping, pipe and tubing fittings, and valves used to supply utilization equipment within the scope of this standard shall be acceptable for services as approved by the manufacture of the equipment.

(2) Pipe shall be wrought iron, steel, brass, or copper. (3) Aluminum piping or tubing is prohibited. (4) Fittings shall be steel, brass, copper, malleable iron,

or ductile iron. Cast iron fittings shall not be used. (5) Tubing shall be steel, brass, or copper. (6) Hose, hose connections, and flexible connections

shall be fabricated of approved materials resistant to the action of L. P. gas, both as a liquid and vapor.

(7) Hose, hose connections, and flexible connectors shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 350 psig and shall be as short as practical.

(8) Fittings at pressures higher than container pressures shall be suitable for a working pressure of 350 psig.

(9) Fittings used at operating pressures over 125 psig shall be suitable for a working pressure of 250 psig.

(10) Fittings used with vapor at pressure not exceeding 125 psig shall be suitable for a working pressure of 125 pisg.

R 408.41873 L. P. Safety Devices.

Rule 1873. (1) Every container and every vaporizer shall be provided with 1 or more approved safety relief valves or devices. These valves shall be arranged to afford free vent to the outer air with discharge not less than 5 feet away, horizontally, from any opening into a building which is below such a discharge.

(2) Shutoff valves shall not be installed between the safety relief device and the container, or the equipment or piping to which the safety relief device is connected, except that a shutoff valve may be used where the arrangement of this valve is such that the full required capacity flow through the safety relief device is always afforded.

(3) Container safety relief devices and regulator relief vents shall be located not less than 5 feet in any direction from air openings into sealed combustion system appliances or mechanical ventilation air intakes.

R 408.41874 L. P. Gas Appliances.

Rule 1874. (1) L. P. gas consuming appliances shall be approved types, which have been manufactured for L. P. gas, or if an appliance is converted or adapted to L. P. gas service, the appliance shall be tested for performance by a knowledgeable employee or outside service before use.

(2) Each system shall have containers, valves, connectors, manifold valve assemblies, and regulators of an approved type.

http://www.michigan.gov/deq

9 R 408.41875 L.P. Containers and Equipment.

Rule 1875. (1) Containers in use shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions:

(a) Each system shall have containers, valves, connectors, manifold valve assemblies, and regulators of an approved type.

(b) Containers of more than 2 1/2 pounds water capacity shall be equipped with a shutoff valve and excess flow valve.

(c) Valves on containers shall be protected against physical damage.

(d) Containers that have a water capacity of more than 2 1/2 pounds shall stand on a firm and substantially level surface. If necessary, the containers shall be secured in an upright position.

(e) Regulators, if used, shall be suitable for use with L.P. gas. Manifolds and fittings connecting containers to pressure regulator inlets shall be designed for not less than 250 psig service pressure.

(f) Piping, fittings, and hose shall be in compliance with R 408.41872.

(g) Filling of fuel containers for trucks or motor vehicles from bulk storage containers shall be performed not less than 10 feet from the nearest masonry-walled building, or not less than 25 feet from the nearest building or other construction and, in any event, not less than 25 feet from any building opening.

(h) Filling of portable containers or containers mounted on skids from storage containers shall be performed not less than 50 feet from the nearest building.

(i) The maximum water capacity of individual containers shall be 245 pounds (nominal 100 pounds L.P. gas capacity).

(j) All of the following provisions apply to multiple container systems: (i) Valves in the assembly of multiple container

systems shall be arranged so that replacement of containers can be made without shutting off the flow of gas in the system. This provision shall not be construed as requiring an automatic changeover device.

(ii) Heaters shall be equipped with an approved regulator in the supply line between the fuel cylinder and the heater unit. Cylinder connectors shall be provided with an excess flow valve to minimize the flow of gas in the event the fuel line becomes ruptured.

(iii) Regulators and low-pressure relief devices shall be rigidly attached to the cylinder valves, cylinders, supporting standards, the building walls, or otherwise rigidly secured, and shall be so installed or protected from the elements.

(2) Containers may be used in unoccupied portions of a building during the hours of the day that the public normally is in the building in accordance with all of the following provisions:

(a) The maximum water capacity of individual containers shall be 50 pounds (nominal 20 pounds L.P. gas capacity) and the number of containers in the building shall not exceed the number of workmen assigned to using L.P. gas.

(b) Containers that have a water capacity of more than 2 1/2 pounds (nominal 1 pound L.P. gas capacity) shall not be left unattended.

(c) During the hours of the day when the building is not open to the public, containers may be used as prescribed in subrule (1) of this rule; however,

containers that have a water capacity of more than 2 1/2 pounds shall not be left unattended.

R 408.41876 Piping Liquid or Vapor L.P. Gas Into

Buildings and Structures. Rule 1876. The piping of liquid or vapor L.P. gas into

buildings that are under construction or major renovation shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions:

(a) Piping used at pressures higher than container pressure shall be suitable for a working pressure of not less than 350 psig.

(b) Liquid piped at container pressure or lower shall be suitable for a working pressure of not less than 250 psig.

(c) Vapor L.P. gas that has an operating pressure of more than 125 psig shall be suitable for a working pressure of not less than 250 psig.

(d) Vapor piped at a pressure of not more than 125 psig shall be suitable for a working pressure of not less than 125 psig.

(e) Metallic pipe joints may be threaded, flanged, welded, or brazed.

(f) Joints shall be made with a material that has a melting point of 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit.

(g) When joints are threaded or threaded and back welded for vapors of liquid at pressures of more than 125 psig, schedule 80 or heavier pipe shall be used; however, at pressures of less than 125 psig, schedule 40 or heavier pipe may be used.

(h) Piping, if welded, shall be made with a suitable type of welding fittings and shall be at least schedule 40 pipe.

(i) Piping shall not be more than 3/4-inch pipe interior diameter. Type K or L copper tubing which is in compliance with section 232 of The National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 58, “Storage And Handling Of Liquefied Petroleum Gases,” 1992 edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802, and which has a maximum 3/4-inch pipe outside diameter may be used.

(j) Piping shall be securely fastened to walls or other surfaces, protected against physical damage, and located to avoid high temperatures.

(k) A shutoff valve shall be located at each branch line where it leaves the main line. A second shutoff valve shall be located at the appliance end of the branch and upstream of any flexible appliance connector.

(l) Excess flow valves shall be installed where pipe size is reduced.

(m) Hydrostatic relief valves shall be installed in liquid lines between shutoff valves.

(n) All piping and fittings shall be in compliance R 408.41872.

R 408.41877 Storage of Portable Containers.

Rule 1877. (1) This rule applies to the storage of portable containers whether filled or empty if they have been in service.

(2) Storage of L.P. gas within buildings is prohibited. (3) Storage outside of buildings, for containers awaiting

use, shall be located away from the nearest building or group of buildings as specified in table 4.


10

TABLE 4 QUANTITY OF L.P.

GAS STORED DISTANCE (FEET) FROM

A BUILDING 500 lbs. or less 0

501 to 6,000 lbs. 10

6,001 to 10,000 lbs. 20

over 10,000 lbs. 25

(5) Containers shall be stored within a suitable ventilated enclosure or otherwise protected against tampering, and located as specified in table 4.

(6) When L.P. gas and 1 or more other gases are stored or used in the same area, the containers shall be marked to identify their content. Marking shall be in compliance with The Compressed Gas Association Standard CGA C7 “Guide To The Preparation Of Precautionary Labeling And Marking Of Compressed Gas Containers,” 2000 edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802.

R 408.41878 Location of Containers.

Rule 1878. (1) Located as to minimize exposure to excessive temperature rise, physical damage, or tampering.

(2) Containers having greater than 2 1/ 2 pounds water capacity shall be positioned so that the safety relief valve is in direct communication with the vapor space of the container.

(3) Containers not connected for use shall not be stored on roofs.

(4) Provisions shall be made to prohibit containers from falling over the edge of openings or roofs.

(5) Containers with a maximum water capacity of 2 1/ 2 pounds may be used in the buildings as a part of an approved self-contained torch assembly.

R 408.41879 Container Valve Protection.

Rule 1879. Screw-on-type caps or collars shall be securely in place on all stored containers regardless of whether they are full, partially full, or empty and container outlets shall be closed.

R 408.41881 Temporary Buildings.

Rule 1881. (1) A temporary building shall not be erected where it will adversely affect a means of egress.

(2) A temporary building erected within another building shall be constructed of noncombustible material or material having a fire resistance rating of not less than 1 hour.

(3) A temporary building, except an enclosure used to house a hoist operator, located outside another building shall be located not less than 10 feet from a building or structure. A group of temporary buildings not exceeding 2,000 square feet in aggregate shall, for the purposes of this part, be considered a single temporary building. R 408.41882 Open Yard Storage; Combustible Materials.

Rule 1882. (1) Combustible materials stored in an open yard shall be in piles not more than 20 feet high and located not less than 10 feet from a building or structure.

(2) A driveway in combustible material storage area shall be spaced so that a grid system unit of not more than 50 by 150 feet is produced. A driveway between piles of combustible material shall be not less than 15 feet wide.

(3) Housekeeping in an open yard storage area shall include keeping rubbish, weeds, and scrap material picked up.

(4) Piling of combustible material in an open yard is prohibited where a danger of underground fire exists.

R 408.41883 Indoor Storage.

Rule 1883. (1) A path of travel to an exit shall not be blocked by the storage of material.

(2) Incompatible materials shall be separated by a distance of not less than 50 feet or a barrier having fire resistance of not less than 1 hour.

(3) Aisle width shall be maintained to safely accommodate the widest vehicle that may be used within that part of the structure for fire fighting purposes.

(4) Unless separated by a barrier, a clearance around the path of travel of a fire door shall be not less than 2 feet. Material shall not be stored within 36 inches of a fire door opening.

(5) Material shall be piled in a manner so as to prevent the spread of fire and to permit access for fire fighting.

(6) A clearance of not less than 3 feet shall be maintained between stored material and sprinklers.

(7) Clearance shall be maintained around lights and heating units to prevent ignition of a flammable or combustible material and liquids.

(8) Materials shall be stored, handled, and piled with due regard to their fire characteristics.

R 408.41884 Heating Devices.

Rule 1884. (1) A temporary heating device shall not produce combustion products that will increase the air contaminants above the maximum allowable limits established by the occupational health division of the Michigan department of consumer and industry services.

(2) A heating device, including a temporary heating device, shall be located at a distance sufficient to prevent ignition of any material in its proximity or the material shall be insulated.

(3) A temporary heating device shall not be located less than 50 feet from a point where a flammable or combustible liquid is used or dispensed.

(4) A temporary heating device that is set on a combustible floor shall be separated from the floor by an insulating material or 1 inch of concrete. The insulating material shall extend not less than 2 feet beyond the heater in all directions.

(5) A temporary heating device shall be located not less than 10 feet from a combustible covering, such as, but not limited to, canvas or tarpaulins, unless the covering is fastened to prevent its dislodgement due to wind action.

(6) A temporary heating device using L.P. gas, other than in an integral heater-container unit, shall be located not less than 6 feet from any L.P. gas container.

(7) Integral heaters may be used if designed and installed so as to prevent direct or radiant heat application to the container.

(8) Blower-and radiant-type units shall not be directed toward any L.P. gas container that is less than 20 feet away.

(9) If 2 or more heater units are located within the same unpartitioned area, then the containers of each unit shall be separated from the containers of any such other unit by not less than 20 feet.

(10) If containers are manifolded together and serve 1 heater on the same floor, then the total water capacity of the containers shall not be more than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds L.P. gas capacity). If more than 1 such manifold is used they shall be separated by not less than 20 feet.

11

(11) On floors on which no heaters are connected for use, containers may be manifolded together if the total water capacity is not more than 2,450 pounds (nominal 1,000 pounds L.P. gas capacity). Manifolds of more than 735 pounds water capacity shall be separated by not less than 50 feet.

(12) Heating devices, including portable heaters and salamanders using a liquid flammable fuel such as, but not limited to, fuel oil or kerosene, shall be equipped with an approved automatic shutoff safety control device which will, in the event of flame failure, shut off the flow of fuel to the main burner and pilot if used. The device shall not be relit while the combustion chamber is hot.

(13) Portable heaters including salamanders that have inputs above 50,000 British thermal unit's (B.T.U.) per hour, shall be equipped with either a pilot, that is lighted and proved before the main burner can be turned on, or an electric ignition system, except the provisions of this rule do not apply to any of the following:

(a) Tar kettles, hand torches, melting pots, or portable heaters of less than 7,500 British thermal unit's (B.T.U.), if used with 2 1/2 pound containers.

(b) Manufactured tent heaters, as utilized by, and in applications common to, public utilities or telecommunication companies, with 12,000 British Thermal Unit's (B.T.U.) input or less, when used out-of-doors and if constantly attended.

(14) A temporary heating device shall be installed horizontally level.

(15) A solid fuel salamander shall not be used in a building or on a scaffold.

(16) L.P. gas containers valves, connectors, regulators and manifolds, piping, and tubing shall not be used as structural supports for heaters and shall be located to minimize exposure to high temperatures or physical damage.

(17) A heating device, including a temporary heating device, designed for barometric or gravity oil feed shall be used only with an integral tank.

(18) Heaters specifically designed and approved for use with separate supply tanks may be connected for gravity feed, or an automatic pump, from a supply tank.

(19) L.P. containers may be used in buildings for temporary emergency heating as provided in this rule and the equipment shall not be left unattended.

TOTAL COPIES PRINTED: 1,000 TOTAL PRINTING COST: TOTAL COST PER COPY:

GUARDING OF

WALKS AND WORKSITE

8




Filed with the Secretary of State on January 20, 1982 (as amended March 21, 1983)

(as amended November 15, 1989) (as amended on July 8, 1993) (as amended September 3, 1996)




R 408.42101, R 408.42121, R 408.42122, R 408.42123, R 408.42145, R 408.42150, and R 408.42160 of the Michigan Administrative Code are effective as of the date of this amendment.

R 408.42131 is added to read as hereinafter set forth.

R 480.42140, R 408.42141, R 408.42142, R 408.42143, R 408.42144, R 408.42146, R 408.42147, R 408.42148, R

408.42151, R 408.42152, R 408.42153, and R 408.42158 are rescinded.


PART 21. GUARDING OF WALKING AND WORKING AREAS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL PROVISIONS ..................................................... 1 R 408.42101 Scope .............................................................. 1 R 408.42121 Definitions; H to N ........................................... 1 R 408.42122 Definitions; P, R............................................... 2 R 408.42123 Definitions; S, W.............................................. 2 R 408.42127 Access to other elevations............................... 2 R 408.42129 Stairways; landings; installation; rise height and

tread depth; metal pan landings and metal pan treads; guardrail systems required .................. 2

R 408.42130 Training requirements ..................................... 2 R 408.42131 Roof work ........................................................ 2

R 408.42145 Hatchway and chute-floor openings.................2 R 408.42149 Stairways .........................................................3 R 408.42150 Guardrail specifications for scaffolding and

catch platforms.................................................3 R 408.42154 Runway and ramp specifications .....................3 R 408.42155 Specifications for stair rail ................................3 R 408.42156 Handrail specifications .....................................4 R 408.42157 Temporary stairways........................................4 R 408.42159 Maintenance ....................................................5 R 408.42160 Catch platform specifications ...........................5

GENERAL PROVISIONS

R 408.42101 Scope Rule 2101. This part pertains to the construction and use

of guardrails, stairways, ramps, and runways for the protection of employees during construction operations. It also applies to all stairways that are used in the construction, alteration, repair, including painting and decorating, and demolition of workplaces and when stairways are required to be provided.

R 408.42121 Definitions; H to N

Rule 2121. (1) “Handrail” means a lengthwise member which is supported by brackets and which is suspended from a wall or partition on a stairway or ramp to furnish a handhold.

(2) “Lower levels” means those areas to which an employee can fall from a stairway, including any of the following: (a) Ground levels. (b) Floors. (c) Roofs (d) Ramps. (e) Runways. (f) Excavations. (g) Pits. (h) Tanks. (i) Material. (j) Water. (k) Equipment. (l) Similar surfaces.

It does not include the surface from which the employee falls.


2

(3) “Nosing” means that portion of a tread projecting beyond the face of the riser immediately below it.

R 408.42122 Definitions; P, R

Rule 2122. (1) “Point of access” means all areas used by employees for work-related passage from one area or level to another, including all of the following: (a) Doorways. (b) Passageways. (c) Stairway openings. (d) Studded walls. (e) Other permanent or temporary openings used

for work related passage from one area or level to another.

(2) “Ramp” means an inclined runway used to allow employees to move, or allow equipment to be moved, from one level to another.

(3) “Rise” means the vertical distance from the top of a tread to the top of the next higher tread.

(4) “Runway,” sometimes called a walkway, means a passageway that is above floor or ground level, such as a footwalk between 2 structures.

R 408.42123 Definitions; S, W

Rule 2123. (1) “Spiral stairway” means a series of steps attached to a vertical pole and progressing upward in a winding fashion within a cylindrical space.

(2) “Stair platform” means a landing that breaks a continuous run of stairs.

(3) “Stair railing” means a vertical barrier that is erected on an exposed side of a stairway to prevent employees from falling to lower levels. The top surface of a stair rail system may also be a handrail.

(4) “Tread depth” means the horizontal distance from the front to the back of a tread, excluding nosing, if any.

R 408.42127 Access to other elevations

Rule 2127. (1) A means of access, such as a stairway, ladder, or ramp, shall be provided at all personnel points of access where there is a break in elevation of 19 inches (48cm) or more and a runway, sloped embankment, or personnel hoist is not provided.

(2) When a building or structure has only 1 point of access between levels, that point of access shall be kept clear to permit the free passage of employees. When work must be performed or equipment must be used such that the free passage of employees at that point of access is restricted, a second point of access shall be provided and used.

(3) When a building or structure has 2 or more points of access between levels, at least 1 point of access shall be kept clear to permit the free passage of employees.

(4) Employees shall not use any spiral stairways that will not be a permanent part of the structure on which construction work is being performed.

R 408.42128 Stairway protection systems

Rule 2128. Employers shall provide and install all stairway fall protection systems required by this part and shall comply with all other pertinent requirements of this part before employees begin the work that necessitates the installation and use of stairways and their fall protection systems.

R 408.42129 Stairways; landings; installation; rise height and tread depth; metal pan landings and metal pan treads; guardrail systems required

Rule 2129. (1) Stairways that will not be a permanent part of the structure on which construction work is being performed shall have landings that are not less than 30 inches (76cm) in the direction of travel and extend not less than 22 inches (56cm) in width at every 12 feet (3.7m) or less of vertical rise.

(2) Stairs shall be installed between 30 degrees and 50 degrees from horizontal.

(3) Riser height and tread depth shall be uniform within each flight of stairs, including any foundation structure used as one tread depth shall not be more than 1/4 of an inch (0.6cm) in any stairway system.

(4) Metal pan landings and metal pan treads, when used, shall be secured in place before filling with concrete or other material.

(5) Unprotected sides and edges of stairway landings shall be provided with guardrail systems.

R 408.42130 Training requirements

Rule 2130. (1) An employer shall provide a training program for each employee who uses stairways, as necessary. The program shall enable each employee to recognize hazards related to stairways and shall train each employee in the procedures to be followed to minimize these hazards.

(2) An employer shall ensure that each employee has been trained by a competent person in the following areas, as applicable: (a) The nature of fall hazards in the work area. (b) The rules contained in this part.

(3) Retraining shall be provided for each employee as necessary so that the employee maintains the understanding and knowledge acquired through compliance with the provisions of this rule.

R 408.42131 Roof work

Rule 2131. (1) An employer working on a high-pitched roof shall be provided with and use either roofing brackets and a working plank or a crawling board, regardless of the ground-to-eave height.

(2) An employer shall protect employees working on a dome-type roof as prescribed in Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(3) The portion of a roof where employees are working shall be kept free of ice, snow, or other slippery conditions.

R 408.42145 Hatchway and chute-floor openings

Rule 2145. (1) A hatchway or chute-floor opening that is less than 39 inches above the floor shall be guarded by either of the following: (a) A hinged cover and a fixed guardrail on not

less than 2 sides. When the opening is not in use, the cover shall be closed or a removable guardrail shall guard the exposed side.

(b) A removable guardrail on 2 sides and fixed guardrail on the other 2 sides. The removable guardrail shall be kept in place when the opening is not in use.

3

(2) When dumping from mechanical equipment or a wheelbarrow, the exposed edge of the hatchway, chute opening, or open-sided floor shall be protected by a bumper. The bumper shall be not less than 6 inches nominal size and shall be secured to the floor.

R 408.42149 Stairways

Rule 2149. (1) A stairway shall be equipped with a stair railing or handrail as follows: (a) A stairway which is not more than 44 inches

wide and which has enclosed sides shall have a handrail on the right descending side.

(b) A stairway which is not more than 44 inches wide and which has 1 open side shall have a stair railing on the open side.

(c) A stairway which is not more than 44 inches wide and which has 2 open sides shall have a stair railing on each side.

(d) A stairway that is more than 44 inches wide shall have 1 handrail on each enclosed side and 1 stair rail on each open side.

(e) A stairway that is 88 or more inches wide shall have 1 handrail on each enclosed side, 1 stair rail on each open side, and 1 intermediate stair rail located in the middle of the stairway.

(2) Where a door or gate opens directly on a stairway more than 6 feet in height and is used as a required means of egress, a stair landing shall be provided. The swing of the door shall not reduce the landing which leads to the stairway to less than 20 inches unless specified in another code.

(3) Debris and other loose material shall not be permitted on a stairway.

R 408.42150 Guardrail specifications for scaffolding and

catch platforms Rule 2150. (1) A guardrail shall consist of a top rail,

intermediate rail, and supporting posts. The top rail shall have a smooth surface and shall be located not less than 36, nor more than 42, inches above the floor, ramp, platform, or runway. The intermediate rail shall be located halfway between the top rail and the floor, ramp, platform, or runway. The top rail shall not overrun the terminal posts unless such a projection does not constitute a hazard.

(2) A top rail and its supporting posts shall be constructed of wood which is not less than 2- by 4- inch nominal size with a 1- by 6-inch or 2- by 4- inch nominal size intermediate rail. The construction and fastenings shall produce a guardrail capable of withstanding a 200-pound capability. A guardrail that is subject to additional loads shall be constructed of heavier stock and the supporting post shall be more closely spaced.

(3) Vertical supporting posts shall be placed not more than 8 feet apart.

(4) Banding steel shall not be used for guardrail construction.

(5) Welded resteel members shall not be used for guardrail construction.

R 408.42154 Runway and ramp specifications

Rule 2154. (1) A ramp or runway that is used exclusively by employees as a means of access to or egress from a walking or working surface shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions:

(a) Be capable of supporting not less than 2 times the maximum intended load.

(b) Consist of a minimum of two 2-inch by 10-inch nominal size planks placed side by side or other material of equal width that provides equivalent strength if guardrails are not required.

(c) Consist of a minimum of three 2-inch by 10-inch nominal size planks placed side by side or other material of equal width that provides equivalent strength if guardrails are required.

(d) Not be constructed steeper than the ratio of 1 foot of vertical rise to 2 feet of horizontal run.

(e) Have a slip-resistant surface or have cleats which are not more than 2 inches by 4 inches nominal size and which are uniformly spaced not more than 24 inches apart.

(f) Be constructed to avoid excessive deflection and springing action.

(g) Be secured at each end to prevent displacement.

(h) Not be used for the storage of materials or equipment.

(i) Be maintained free of debris, other loose materials, and slip or trip hazards.

(2) A ramp or runway used by employees with wheelbarrows shall be in compliance with both of the following provisions: (a) Be constructed and used as prescribed in

subrule (1)(a), (d), (e), (f), (g), (h), and (i) of this rule.

(b) Consist of three 2-inch by 10-inch nominal size planks placed side by side or other material of equal width that provides equivalent strength.

(3) A ramp or runway used by concrete buggies, fork lift trucks, or other motorized material handling equipment shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions: (a) Be capable of supporting not less than 4

times the maximum intended load. (b) Be not less than 5 feet wide. (c) Be constructed and used as prescribed in

subrule (1)(a), (d), (f), (g), (h), and (i) of this rule.

(4) A ramp or runway constructed of 2 or more planks placed side by side shall have the planks securely fastened together.

R 408.42155 Specifications for stair rail

Rule 2155. (1) A stair railing shall consist of a stair rail, a vertical support, and an intermediate rail or its equivalent to prevent an employee from falling through the opening between the stair rail and the stairs. The stair rail shall parallel the slope of the stairway.

(2) A stair rail shall be smooth, made of 2- by 4-inch nominal-sized lumber, and constructed in a manner to withstand a side thrust of not less than 200 pounds. The height of a stair rail shall be as follows: (a) A stair rail that is installed after March 15,

1991, shall be not less than 36 inches (91.5cm) from the upper surface of the stair rail system to the surface of the tread and in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread.

4

(b) A stair rail that is installed before March 15, 1991, shall be not less than 30 inches (76cm) nor more than 34 inches (86cm) from the upper surface of the stair rail system to the surface of the tread and in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread.

(3) The vertical post shall be constructed of not less than 2- by 4-inch nominal-sized lumber and shall be spaced not more than 6 feet apart.

(4) An intermediate rail or midrail shall be constructed of not less than 1- by 6-inch or 2- by 4-inch nominal-sized lumber and shall be installed midway between the stair rail and the treads.

(5) Screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or equivalent intermediate structural members shall be provided between the top rail of the stair rail system and the stairway steps.

(6) Screens or mesh, when used, shall extend from the top rail to the stairway step and along the entire opening between the top rail supports.

(7) When intermediate vertical members, such as balusters, are used between posts, they shall be not more than 19 inches (48cm) apart.

(8) Other structural members, when used, shall be installed such that there are no openings in the stair rail system that are more than 19 inches (48cm) wide.

(9) A stair rail shall not have protruding nails or rough or sharp corners and shall not constitute a projection hazard.

(10) Other material may be used if the stair railing meets the 200-pound side thrust requirement.

(11) A stairway that has 4 or more risers or rises more than 30 inches (76cm), whichever is less, shall be equipped with at least 1 handrail and at least 1 stair rail system along each unprotected side or edge. When the top edge of a stair rail system also serves as a handrail, the provisions of R 408.42156(3) of these rules apply.

(12) Winding and spiral stairways shall be equipped with a handrail that is sufficiently offset to prevent walking on those portions of the stairways where the tread width is less than 6 inches (15cm).

R 408.42156 Handrail specifications

Rule 2156. (1) A handrail shall be of a configuration that provides a handhold when grasped to avoid a fall and shall follow the slope of the stairway.

(2) A handrail shall be vertically installed not more than 37, nor less than 30, inches above the front edge of the treads.

(3) When the top edge of a stair rail system also serves as a handrail, the height of the top edge shall be not more than 37 inches (94cm) nor less than 36 inches (91.5cm) from the upper surface of the stair rail system to the surface of the tread and in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread.

(4) A handrail shall be supported by brackets to a distance of not less than 1 1/2 inches from any object. The assembly of handrail and brackets shall withstand a load of not less than 200 pounds applied in any direction.

(5) A handrail shall have a smooth surface along the top and sides and the ends shall not present a projection hazard.

(6) Handrails that will not be a permanent part of the structure being built shall have a minimum

clearance of 3 inches (3cm) between the handrail and walls, stair rail systems, and other objects.

(7) The ends of stair rail systems and handrails shall be constructed so as not to constitute a projection hazard.

R 408.42157 Temporary stairways

Rule 2157. (1) All wooden components that are necessary to construct and guard a temporary stairway shall be of construction-grade lumber.

(2) The minimum size of stringers shall be 2 by 8 inches unless notched. If notched, the stringers shall have a plate or equivalent means which provides the same strength that an uncut 2-inch by 8-inch stringer provides.

(3) The minimum width of a temporary stairway shall be 22 inches.

(4) Each tread shall rest on 2-inch by 4-inch cleats or be notched into the stringer, to provide a bearing surface for the full width of the tread.

(5) For a temporary stairway between 22 and 36 inches wide, a minimum of a 2-inch by 6-inch plank shall be used for a tread.

(6) For a temporary stairway between 36 and 54 inches wide, a minimum of a 2-inch by 8-inch plank shall be used for a tread.

(7) For a temporary stairway over 54 inches wide, a 2-inch by 10-inch plank shall be used for a tread.

(8) If the width of a temporary stairway is more than 88 inches, an additional notched stringer shall be provided at the middle of the stairway.

(9) The total vertical rise of a temporary stairway shall not be more than 12 feet, unless stair platforms are provided.

(10) The rise shall be not less than 6 inches nor more than 8 inches.

(11) The ratio of rise to tread width shall be uniform for all sets of stairs.

(12) Each tread shall be constructed and maintained of solid, 1-piece lumber and repairs shall be made with solid 1-piece lumber.

(13) The sides of a temporary stairway shall be guarded as required by the provisions of R 408.42155 and R 408.42156, except that a stairway used as access to material storage trailers is required to be guarded on only 1 side.

(14) If used during construction, permanent steel or other metal stairways and landings with hollow pan-type treads that are to be filled with concrete or other materials shall be filled to the level of the nosing with solid material. This requirement shall not apply during the period of actual construction of the stairways. Metal landings shall be secured in place before filling. Such temporary treads and landings shall be replaced when worn below the level of the top edge of the pan.

(15) A stairway shall be free of hazardous projections, such as nails, sharp top rails, and handrail projections.

(16) A stairway shall have a minimum vertical clearance of 7 feet from any overhead object, unless the overhead object is padded and caution signs or paint is used on the object, as prescribed in Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades, being R 408.42201 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(17) Except during stairway construction, foot traffic is prohibited on skeleton metal stairs where

5

permanent treads or landings are to be installed at a later date, unless the stairs are fitted with secured temporary treads and landings long enough to cover the entire tread or landing area.

(18) Treads for temporary service shall be made of wood or other solid material and shall be installed the full width and depth of the stair.

R 408.42159 Maintenance

Rule 2159. (1) A floor, platform, stair tread, or landing shall be maintained free of tripping or slipping hazards.

(2) Material used to repair floors, platforms, stair treads, or landings shall meet the design strength of the original component.

(3) A floor, platform, stair, runway, or ramp shall be free of hazardous projections.

R 408.42160 Catch platform specifications Rule 2160. If a catch platform is installed as a means of

fall protection for an employee or employees working on a roof, the catch platform shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions: (a) Consist of a minimum of three 2-inch by 10-

inch nominal size planks placed side by side or other material of equal width that provides equal strength.

(b) Be installed a maximum of 18 inches beneath the eave line of the roof.

(c) Have a guardrail that meets the requirements of R 408.42150 installed on the outer exposed edge and each end. An additional intermediate rail, solid material, or a screen shall be installed between the catch platform and the midrail.





FALL PROTECTION

9


DEPARTMENT OF LABOR & ECONOMIC GROWTH DIRECTOR’S OFFICE

CONSTRUCTION SAFETY STANDARDS Filed with the Secretary of State on September 3, 1996


(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 19 and 21 of Act 154 of the Public Acts of 1974, as amended, and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, being §§408.1019 and

408.1021, and 445.2001 of the Michigan Compiled Laws)


PART 45. FALL PROTECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page PageR 408.44501 Scope .........................................................1 R 408.44502 Adoption by reference of federal standard ..2 1926.500 Fall Protection ..................................................2 (a) Scope and application ................................................2 (b) Definitions ...................................................................2 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection ...............................4 (a) General .......................................................................4 (b) Unprotected sides and edges......................................4 (c) Protection from falling objects .....................................6 1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria and practices ...6 (a) General .......................................................................6 (b) Guardrail systems........................................................6 (c) Safety net systems ......................................................7 (d) Personal fall arrest systems ........................................7 (e) Positioning device systems..........................................9

(f) Warning line systems................................................... 9 (g) Controlled access zones .......................................... 10 (h) Safety monitoring systems........................................ 10 (i) Covers........................................................................ 11 (j) Protection from falling objects.................................... 11 (k) Fall protection plan.................................................... 11 1926.503 Training Requirements .................................. 12 (a) Training program ...................................................... 12 (b) Certification of training ............................................. 12 (c) Retraining ................................................................. 12 Appendix A Determining Roof Widths .......................... 12 Appendix B Guardrail Systems..................................... 14 Appendix C Personal Fall Arrest Systems ................... 14 Appendix D Positioning Device Systems ...................... 19 Appendix E Sample Fall Protection Plan ..................... 19

R 408.44501 Scope. Rule 4501. (1) This part sets forth the minimum requirements and criteria for fall protection in construction workplaces, their applications, and definitions that are applicable to these rules. (2) These rules do not apply where an employee is making an inspection, an investigation, or an assessment of workplace conditions before the actual start of construction work or after all construction work has been completed. (3) The provisions of 29 C.F.R. §1926.501 are adopted by reference in these rules. The provisions set forth the workplaces, conditions, operations, and circumstances for which fall protection is required, except for the following modifications: (a) The specifications for fall protection requirements

for an employee working on a scaffold are contained in construction safety standard Part 12. Scaffolds, being R 408.41201 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(b) The specifications for fall protection requirements for an employee working on certain types of cranes and derricks are contained in construction safety standards Part 10. Lifting and Digging, being R 408.41001a, of the Michigan Administrative Code, and Part 32. Aerial Lift Platforms, being R 408.43201 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(c) The specifications for fall protection requirements for an employee performing steel erection work on buildings are contained in construction safety standard Part 26. Steel and Precast Erection, being R 408.42601 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(d) The specifications for fall protection requirements for an employee working on certain types of equipment used in tunneling operations are contained in construction safety standard Part 14. Tunnels, Shafts, Cofferdams, and Caissons, being R 408.41401 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.


2 (e) The specifications for fall protection requirements

for an employee engaged in the construction of electric transmission and distribution lines and equipment are contained in construction safety standard Part 16. Power Transmission and Distribution, being R 408.41601 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(f) The specifications for fall protection requirements for an employee working on stairways and ladders are contained in construction safety standard Part 11. Fixed and Portable Ladders, being 408.41101 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(4) The provisions of 29 C.F.R. §1926.502 are adopted in these rules by reference. The provisions of 29 C.F.R. §1926.502 set forth the requirements for the installation, construction, and proper use of fall protection, except for the following modifications: (a) The performance requirements for a guardrail

system and for the performance requirements for falling object protection used on scaffolds are contained in construction safety standard Part 12. Scaffolds, being R 408.41201 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(b) The performance requirements for stairways, stair rail systems, and handrails are contained in construction safety standards Part 11. Fixed and Portable Ladders and Part 21. Guarding of Walking and Working Areas, being R 408.41101 and R 408.42101 et seq., respectively, of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(c) Additional performance requirements for personal climbing equipment, lineman’s body belts, safety straps, and lanyards are contained in construction safety standard Part 6. Personal Protective Equipment, being R 408.10601 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.

(5) The provisions of 29 C.F.R. §1926.503 are adopted by reference in these rules. The provisions of 29 C.F.R. §1926.503 set forth the requirements for training in the installation and use of fall protection systems. R 408.44502. Adoption by reference of federal

standard. Rule 4502. The provisions of 29 C.F.R. §§1926.500 through 1926.503 are adopted in these rules by reference. The adopted regulations are available from the United States Department of Labor, 801 South Waverly, Room 306, Lansing, Michigan 48917, or from the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, Safety Standards Division, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, MI 48909, at no charge as of the time of adoption of these rules. 1926.500 Fall Protection. (a) “Scope and application.” (1) This subpart sets forth requirements and criteria for fall protection in construction workplaces covered under 29 CFR Part 1926. Exception: The provisions of this subpart do not apply when employees are making an inspection, investigation, or assessment of workplace conditions prior to the actual start of construction work or after all construction work has

been completed. (2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those workplaces, conditions, operations, and circumstances for which fall protection shall be provided except as follows: (i) Requirements relating to fall protection for

employees working on scaffolds are provided in subpart L of this part.

(ii) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on certain cranes and derricks are provided in subpart N of this part.

(iii) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees performing steel erection work in buildings are provided in subpart R of this part.

(iv) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on certain types of equipment used in tunneling operations are provided in subpart S of this part.

(v) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees engaged in the construction of electric transmission and distribution lines and equipment are provided in subpart V of this part.

(vi) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on stairways and ladders are provided in subpart X of this part.

(3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the requirements for the installation, construction, and proper use of fall protection required by part 1926, except as follows:

(i) Performance requirements for guardrail systems used on scaffolds and performance requirements for falling object protection used on scaffolds are provided in subpart L of this part.

(ii) Performance requirements for stairways, stairrail systems, and handrails are provided in subpart X of this part.

(iii) Additional performance requirements for personal climbing equipment, lineman’s body belts, safety straps, and lanyards are provided in Subpart V of this part.

(4) Section 1926.503 sets forth requirements for training in the installation and use of fall protection systems. (b) Definitions. “Anchorage” means a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices. “Body belt (safety belt)” means a strap with means both for securing it about the waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device. “Body harness” means straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest system. “Buckle” means any device for holding the body belt or body harness closed around the employee’s body. “Connector” means a device which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall arrest system and positioning device systems together. It may be an

3independent component of the system, such as a carabiner, or it may be an integral component of part of the system (such as a buckle or dee-ring sewn into a body belt or body harness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard). “Controlled access zone (CAZ)” means an area in which certain work (e.g., overhand bricklaying) may take place without the use of guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, or safety net systems and access to the zone is controlled. “Dangerous equipment” means equipment (such as pickling or galvanizing tanks, degreasing units, machinery, electrical equipment, and other units) which, as a result of form or function, may be hazardous to employees who fall onto or into such equipment. “Deceleration device” means any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyards, automatic selfretracting lifelines/lanyards, etc., which serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest. “Deceleration distance” means the additional vertical distance a falling employee travels, excluding lifeline elongation and free fall distance, before stopping, from the point at which the deceleration device begins to operate. It is measured as the distance between the location of an employee’s body belt or body harness attachment point at the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration device during a fall, and the location of that attachment point after the employee comes to a full stop. “Equivalent” means alternative designs, materials, or methods to protect against a hazard which the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the methods, materials or designs specified in the standard. “Failure” means load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is the point where the ultimate strength is exceeded. “Free fall” means the act of falling before a personal fall arrest system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. “Free fall distance” means the vertical displacement of the fall arrest attachment point on the employee’s body belt or body harness between onset of the fall and just before the system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. This distance excludes deceleration distance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they operate and fall arrest forces occur. “Guardrail system” means a barrier erected to prevent employees from falling to lower levels. “Hole” means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 cm) or more in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or other walking/working surface. “Infeasible” means that it is impossible to perform the construction work using a conventional fall protection system (i.e., guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system) or that it is technologically impossible to use any one of these systems to provide fall protection.

“Lanyard” means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap which generally has a connector at each end for connecting the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, or anchorage. “Leading edge” means the edge of a floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or other walking/working surface (such as the deck) which changes locations as additional floor, roof, decking, or formwork sections are placed, formed, or constructed. A leading edge is considered to be an “unprotected side and edge” during periods when it is not actively and continuously under construction. “Lifeline” means a component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage. “Low-slope roof” means a roof having a slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal). “Lower levels” means those areas or surfaces to which an employee can fall. Such areas or surfaces include, but are not limited to, ground levels, floors, platforms, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks, material, water, equipment, structures, or portions thereof. “Mechanical equipment” means all motor or human propelled wheeled equipment used for roofing work, except wheelbarrows and mopcarts. “Opening” means a gap or void 30 inches (76 cm) or more high and 18 inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall or partition, through which employees can fall to a lower level. “Overhand bricklaying and related work” means the process of laying bricks and masonry units such that the surface of the wall to be jointed is on the opposite side of the wall from the mason, requiring the mason to lean over the wall to complete the work. Related work includes mason tending and electrical installation incorporated into the brick wall during the overhand bricklaying process. “Personal fall arrest system” means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, a body belt or body harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of these. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt for fall arrest is prohibited. “Positioning device system” means a body belt or body harness system rigged to allow an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, and work with both hands free while leaning. “Rope grab” means a deceleration device which travels on a lifeline and automatically, by friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of inertial locking, cam/level locking, or both. “Roof” means the exterior surface on the top of a building. This does not include floors or formwork which, because a building has not been completed, temporarily become the top surface of a building. “Roofing work” means the hoisting, storage, application, and removal of roofing materials and equipment, including related insulation, sheet metal, and vapor barrier work, but not including the construction of the roof deck.

4 “Safety-monitoring system” means a safety system in which a competent person is responsible for recognizing and warning employees of fall hazards. “Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard” means a deceleration device containing a drum-wound line which can be slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal employee movement, and which, after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall. “Snaphook” means a connector comprised of a hookshaped member with a normally closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the hook to receive an object and, when released, automatically closes to retain the object. Snaphooks are generally one of two types:

(1) The locking type with a self-closing, self-locking keeper which remains closed and locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection or disconnection; or

(2) The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains closed until pressed open for connection or disconnection. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a non-locking snaphook as part of personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems is prohibited.

“Steep roof” means a roof having a slope greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).

“Toeboard” means a low protective barrier that will prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower levels and provide protection from falls for personnel. “Unprotected sides and edges” means any side or edge (except at entrances to points of access) of a walking/working surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or runway where there is no wall or guardrail system at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high. “Walking/working surface” means any surface, whether horizontal or vertical on which an employee walks or works, including, but not limited to, floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, formwork and concrete reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which employees must be located in order to perform their job duties. “Warning line system” means a barrier erected on a roof to warn employees that they are approaching an unprotected roof side or edge without the use of guardrail, body belt, or safety net systems to protect employees in the area. “Work area” means that portion of a walking/working surface where job duties are being performed. *[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6. 1979, as amended at 45 FR 75625, Nov. 14, 1980; 55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995] 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection. (a) “General.” (1) This section sets forth requirements for employers to provide fall protection systems. All fall protection required by this section shall conform to the criteria set forth in 1926.502 of this subpart.

(2) The employer shall determine if the walking/working surfaces on which its employees are to work have the strength and structural integrity to support employees safely. Employees shall be allowed to work on those surfaces only when the surfaces have the requisite strength and structural integrity.

(b)(1) “Unprotected sides and edges.” Each employee on a walking/working surface (horizontal and vertical surface) with an unprotected side or edge which is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a lower level shall be protected from falling by the use of guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.

(2) “Leading Edges.” (i) Each employee who is constructing a leading edge 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems. Exception: When the employer can demonstrate that it is infeasible or creates a greater hazard to use these systems, the employer shall develop and implement a fall protection plan which meets the requirements of paragraph (k) of 1926.502.

Note: There is a presumption that it is feasible and will not create a greater hazard to implement at least one of the above-listed fall protection systems. Accordingly, the employer has the burden of establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protection plan which complies with 1926.502(k) for a particular workplace situation, in lieu of implementing any of those systems.

(ii) Each employee on a walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a lower level where leading edges are under construction, but who is not engaged in the leading edge work, shall be protected from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system. If a guardrail system is chosen to provide the fall protection, and a controlled access zone has already been established for leading edge work, the control line may be used in lieu of a guardrail along the edge that parallels the leading edge.

(3) “Hoist areas.” Each employee in a hoist area shall be protected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower levels by guardrail systems or personal fall arrest systems. If guardrail systems, [or chain, gate, or guardrail] or portions thereof, are removed to facilitate the hoisting operation (e.g., during landing of materials), and an employee must lean through the access opening or out over the edge of the access opening (to receive or guide equipment and materials, for example), that employee shall be protected from fall hazards by a personal fall arrest system.

(4) “Holes.” (i) Each employee on walking/working surfaces shall be protected from falling through holes (including skylights) more than 6 feet (1.8 m) above lower levels, by personal fall arrest systems,

5covers, or guardrail systems erected around such holes.

(ii) Each employee on a walking/working surface shall be protected from tripping in or stepping into or through holes (including skylights) by covers.

(iii) Each employee on a walking/working surface shall be protected from objects falling through holes (including skylights) by covers.

(5) “Formwork and reinforcing steel.” Each employee on the face of formwork or reinforcing steel shall be protected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower levels by personal fall arrest systems, safety net systems, or positioning device systems.

(6) “Ramps, runways, and other walkways.” Each employee on ramps, runways, and other walkways shall be protected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower levels by guardrail systems.

(7) “Excavations.” (i) Each employee at the edge of an excavation 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, fences, or barricades when the excavations are not readily seen because of plant growth or other visual barrier;

(ii) Each employee at the edge of a well, pit, shaft, and similar excavation 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, fences, barricades, or covers.

(8) “Dangerous equipment.” (i) Each employee less than 6 feet (1.8 m) above dangerous equipment shall be protected from falling into or onto the dangerous equipment by guardrail systems or by equipment guards.

(ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above dangerous equipment shall be protected from fall hazards by guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, or safety net systems.

(9) “Overhand bricklaying and related work.” (i) Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each employee performing overhand bricklaying and related work 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels, shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems, or shall work in a controlled access zone.

(ii) Each employee reaching more than 10 inches (25 cm) below the level of the walking/working surface on which they are working, shall be protected from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system.

Note: Bricklaying operations performed on scaffolds are regulated by subpart L – Scaffolds of this part.

(10) “Roofing work on low-slope roofs.” Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each employee engaged in roofing activities on low-slope roofs, with unprotected sides and edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be

protected from falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems, or a combination of warning line system and guardrail system, warning line system and safety net system, or warning line system and personal fall arrest system, or warning line system and safety monitoring system. Or, on roofs 50-feet (15.25 m) or less in width (see Appendix A to subpart M of this part), the use of a safety monitoring system alone [i.e. without the warning line system] is permitted.

(11) “Steep roofs.” Each employee on a steep roof with unprotected sides and edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems with toeboards, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.

(12) “Precast concrete erection.” Each employee engaged in the erection of precast concrete members (including, but not limited to the erection of wall panels, columns, beams, and floor and roof “tees”) and related operations such as grouting of precast concrete members, who is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems, unless another provision in paragraph (b) of this section provides for an alternative fall protection measure. Exception: When the employer can demonstrate that it is infeasible or creates a greater hazard to use these systems, the employer shall develop and implement a fall protection plan which meets the requirements of paragraph (k) of 1926.502.


(13) “Residential construction.” Each employee engaged in residential construction activities 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be protected by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest system unless another provision in paragraph (b) of this section provides for an alternative fall protection measure. Exception: When the employer can demonstrate that it is infeasible or creates a greater hazard to use these systems, the employer shall develop and implement a fall protection plan which meets the requirements of paragraph (k) of 1926.502.


(14) “Wall openings.” Each employee working on, at,

6above, or near wall openings (including those with chutes attached) where the outside bottom edge of the wall opening is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels and the inside bottom edge of the wall opening is less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/working surface, shall be protected from falling by the use of a guardrail system, a safety net system, or a personal fall arrest system.

(15) “Walking/working surfaces not otherwise addressed.” Except as provided in 1926.500(a)(2) or in 1926.501 (b)(1) through (b)(14), each employee on a walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system.

(c) “Protection from falling objects.” When an employee is exposed to falling objects, the employer shall have each employee wear a hard hat and shall implement one of the following measures: (1) Erect toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems to

prevent objects from falling from higher levels; or, (2) Erect a canopy structure and keep potential fall

objects far enough from the edge of the higher level so that those objects would not go over the edge if they were accidentally displaced; or,

(3) Barricade the area to which objects could fall, prohibit employees from entering the barricaded area, and keep objects that may fall far enough away from the edge of a higher level so that those objects would not go over the edge if they were accidentally displaced.

*[59 FR 40732, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995] 1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria and practices. (a) “General.” (1) Fall protection systems required by this part shall comply with the applicable provisions of this section. (2) Employers shall provide and install all fall

protection systems required by this subpart for an employee, and shall comply with all other pertinent requirements of this subpart before that employee begins the work that necessitates the fall protection.

(b) “Guardrail systems.” Guardrail systems and their use shall comply with the following provisions: (1) Top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail

system members, shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/working level. When conditions warrant, the height of the top edge may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the guardrail system meets all other criteria of this paragraph.

Note: When employees are using stilts, the top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent member, shall be increased an amount equal to the height of the stilts.

(2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or equivalent intermediate structural members shall be installed between the top edge

of the guardrail system and the walking/working surface when there is no wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches (53 cm) high.

(i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/ working level.

(ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall extend from the top rail to the walking/working level and along the entire opening between top rail supports.

(iii) Intermediate members (such as balusters), when used between posts, shall not be more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.

(iv) Other structural members (such as additional midrails and architectural panels) shall be installed such that there are no openings in the guardrail system that are more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide.

(3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any outward or downward direction, at any point along the top edge.

(4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section is applied in a downward direction, the top edge of the guardrail shall not deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/working level. Guardrail system components selected and constructed in accordance with the Appendix B to subpart M of this part will be deemed to meet this requirement.

(5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and equivalent structural members shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the midrail or other member.

(6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced as to prevent injury to an employee from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing.

(7) The ends of all top rails and midrails shall not overhang the terminal posts, except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard.

(8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall not be used as top rails or midrails.

(9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations. If wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be flagged at not more than 6-foot intervals with high-visibility material.

(10) When guardrail systems are used at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or removable guardrail section shall be placed across the access opening between guardrail sections when hoisting operations are not taking place.

(11) When guardrail systems are used at holes, they shall be erected on all unprotected sides or edges of the hole.

(12) When guardrail systems are used around holes used for the passage of materials, the hole shall

7have not more than two sides provided with removable guardrail sections to allow the passage of materials. When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed over with a cover, or a guardrail system shall be provided along with unprotected sides or edges.

(13) When guardrail systems are used around holes which are used as points of access (such as ladderways), they shall be provided with a gate, or be so offset that a person cannot walk directly into the hole.

(14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and runways shall be erected along each unprotected side or edge.

(15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being used for top rails or midrails shall be inspected as frequently as necessary to ensure that it continues to meet the strength requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section.

(c) “Safety net systems.” Safety net systems and their use shall comply with the following provisions: (1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as

practicable under the walking/working surface on which employees are working, but in no case more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When nets are used on bridges, the potential fall area from the walking/working surface to the net shall be unobstructed.

(2) Safety nets shall extend outward from the outermost projection of the work surface as follows:

Vertical distance from working level to

horizontal plane of net

Minimum required horizontal distance of outer edge of net from the edge of

the working surface Up to 5 feet

More than 5 feet up to 10 feet

More than 10 feet

8 feet

10 feet 13 feet

(3) Safety nets shall be installed with sufficient clearance under them to prevent contact with the surface or structures below when subjected to an impact force equal to the drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.

(4) Safety nets and their installations shall be capable of absorbing an impact force equal to that produced by the drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section.

(i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section, safety nets and safety net installations shall be drop-tested at the jobsite after initial installation and before being used as a fall protection system, whenever relocated, after major repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one place. The drop-test shall consist of a 400 pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 + or - 2 inches (76 + or - 5 cm) in diameter dropped into the net from the highest walking/working surface at which

employees are exposed to fall hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level.

(ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is unreasonable to perform the drop-test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the employer (or a designated competent person) shall certify that the net and net installation is in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (c)(3) and (c)(4)(i) of this section by preparing a certification record prior to the net being used as a fall protection system. The certification record must include an identification of the net and net installation for which the certification record is being prepared; the date that it was determined that the identified net and net installation were in compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section and the signature of the person making the determination and certification. The most recent certification record for each net and net installation shall be available at the jobsite for inspection.

(5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety nets shall be inspected at least once a week for wear, damage, and other deterioration. Defective components shall be removed from service. Safety nets shall also be inspected after any occurrence which could affect the integrity of the safety net system.

(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and tools which have fallen into the safety net shall be removed as soon as possible from the net and at least before the next work shift.

(7) The maximum size of each safety net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 square inches (230 cm) nor be longer than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side, and the opening, measured center-to-center of mesh ropes or webbing, shall not be longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh crossings shall be secured to prevent enlargement of the mesh opening.

(8) Each safety net (or section of it) shall have a border rope for webbing with a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).

(9) Connections between safety net panels shall be as strong as integral net components and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart.

(d) “Personal fall arrest systems.” Personal fall arrest systems and their use shall comply with the provisions set forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, body belts are not acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest system. Note: The use of a body belt in a positioning device system is acceptable and is regulated under paragraph (e) of this section. (1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or

formed steel, or made of equivalent materials. (2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish,

and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the system.

8 (3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a minimum

tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to

a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent deformation.

(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member, or shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by the connected member. Effective January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall be used.

(6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed for the following connections, snaphooks shall not be engaged:

(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (ii) to each other; (iii) to a dee-ring to which another snaphook or

other connector is attached; (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or (v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or

dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could occur by the connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper and release itself.

(7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work platforms with horizontal lifelines which may become vertical lifelines, the devices used to connect to a horizontal lifeline shall be capable of locking in both directions on the lifeline.

(8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, and used, under the supervision of a qualified person, as part of a complete personal fall arrest system, which maintains a safety factor of at least two.

(9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).

(10) (i)Except as provided in paragraph (d)(10)(ii) of this section, when vertical lifelines are used, each employee shall be attached to a separate lifeline.

(ii) During the construction of elevator shafts, two employees may be attached to the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided both employees are working atop a false car that is equipped with guardrails; the strength of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 pounds per employee attached] (44.4 kN); and all other criteria specified in this paragraph for lifelines have been met.

(11) Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or braded.

(12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN)

applied to the device with the lifeline or -lanyard in the fully extended position.

(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tearing and deforming lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position.

(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lanyards, lifelines, and strength components of body belts and body harnesses shall be made from synthetic fibers.

(15) Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached, or shall be designed, installed, and used as follows:

(i) as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of at least two; and

(ii) under the supervision of a qualified person. (16) Personal fall arrest systems, when stopping a fall,

shall: (i) limit maximum arresting force on an

employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used with a body belt;

(ii) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used with a body harness;

(iii) be rigged such that an employee can neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m),nor contact any lower level;

(iv) bring an employee to complete stop and limit maximum deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and

(v) have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy of an employee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall distance permitted by the systems, whichever is less.

Note: If the personal fall arrest system meets the criteria and protocols contained in Appendix C to subpart M, and if the system is being used by an employee having a combined person and tool weight of less than 310 pounds (140 kg), the system will be considered to be in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If the system is used by an employee having a combined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140 kg) or more, then the employer must appropriately modify the criteria and protocols of the Appendix to provide proper protection for such heavier weights, or the system will not be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this section.

(17) The attachment point of the body belt shall be located in the center of the wearer’s back. The attachment point of the body harness shall be located in the center of the wearer’s back near shoulder level, or above the wearer’s head.

9 (18) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be

used only for employee protection (as part of a personal fall arrest system or positioning device system) and not to hoist materials.

(19) Personal fall arrest systems and components subjected to impact loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee protection until inspected and determined by a competent person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse.

(20) The employer shall provide for prompt rescue of employees in the event of a fall or shall assure that employees are able to rescue themselves.

(21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected prior to each use for wear, damage and other deterioration, and defective components shall be removed from service.

(22) Body belts shall be at least one and five-eighths (1 5/8) inches (4.1 cm) wide. (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not be attached

to guardrail systems, nor shall they be attached to hoists except as specified in other subparts of this Part.

(24) When a personal fall arrest system is used at hoist areas, it shall be rigged to allow the movement of the employee only as far as the edge of the walking/working surface.

(e) “Positioning device systems.” Positioning device systems and their use shall conform to the following provisions: (1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such that an

employee cannot free fall more than 2 feet (.9 m). (2) Positioning devices shall be secured to an

anchorage capable of supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater.

(3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of equivalent materials.

(4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of this system.

(5) Connecting assemblies shall have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).

(6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent deformation.

(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member, or shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by the connected member. As of January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall be used.

(8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed for the following connections, snaphooks shall not be engaged:

(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (ii) to each other; (iii) to a dee-ring to which another snaphook or

other connector is attached; (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or (v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or

dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could occur by the connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper and release itself.

(9) Positioning device systems shall be inspected prior to each use for wear, damage, and other deterioration, and defective components shall be removed from service.

(10) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be used only for employee protection (as part of a personal fall arrest system or positioning device system) and not to hoist materials.

(f) “Warning line systems.” Warning line systems [See 1926.501(b)(10)] and their use shall comply with the following provisions: (1) The warning line shall be erected around all sides of the roof work area. (i) When mechanical equipment is not being

used, the warning line shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge.

(ii) When mechanical equipment is being used, the warning line shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge which is parallel to the direction of mechanical equipment operation, and not less than 10 feet (3.1 m) from the roof edge which is perpendicular to the direction of mechanical equipment operation.

(iii) Points of access, materials handling areas, storage areas, and hoisting areas shall be connected to the work area by an access path formed by two warning lines.

(iv) When the path to a point of access is not in use, a rope, wire, chain, or other barricade, equivalent in strength and height to the warning line, shall be placed across the path at the point where the path shall be offset such that a person cannot walk directly into the work area.

(2) Warning lines shall consist of ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting stanchions erected as follows:

(i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-visibility material;

(ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest point (including sag) is no less than 34 inches (.9 m) from the walking/working surface and its highest point is no more than 39 inches (1.0 m) from the walking/working surface;

(iii) After being erected, with the rope, wire, or chain attached, stanchions shall be capable

10of resisting, without tipping over, a force of at least 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8 m) above the walking/working surface, perpendicular to the warning line, and in the direction of the floor, roof, or platform edge;

(iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall have a minimum tensile strength of 500 pounds (2.22 kN), and after being attached to the stanchions, shall be capable of supporting, without breaking, the loads applied to the stanchions as prescribed in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section; and

(v) The line shall be attached at each stanchion in such a way that pulling on one section of the line between stanchions will not result in slack being taken up in adjacent sections before the stanchion tips over.

(3) No employee shall be allowed in the area between a roof edge and a warning line unless the employee is performing roofing work in that area.

(4) Mechanical equipment on roofs shall be used or stored only in areas where employees are protected by a warning line system, guardrail system, or personal fall arrest system.

(g) “Controlled access zones.” Controlled access zones [See 1926.501(b)(9) and 1926.502(k)] and their use shall conform to the following provisions. (1) When used to control access to areas where leading edge and other operations are taking place the controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line or by any other means that restricts access. (i) When control lines are used, they shall be

erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 25 feet (7.7 m) from the unprotected or leading edge, except when erecting precast concrete members.

(ii) When erecting precast concrete members, the control line shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the member being erected, whichever is less, from the leading edge.

(iii) The control line shall extend along the entire length of the unprotected or leading edge and shall be approximately parallel to the unprotected or leading edge.

(iv) The control line shall be connected on each side to a guardrail system or wall.

(2) When used to control access to areas where overhand bricklaying and related work are taking place:

(i) The controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line erected not less than 10 feet (3.1 m) nor more than 15 feet (4.5 m) from the working edge.

(ii) The control line shall extend for a distance sufficient for the controlled access zone to enclose all employees performing overhand bricklaying and related work at the working edge and shall be approximately parallel to

the working edge. (iii) Additional control lines shall be erected at

each end to enclose the controlled access zone.

(iv) Only employees engaged in overhand bricklaying or related work shall be permitted in the controlled access zone.

(3) Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and supporting stanchions as follows:

(i) Each line shall be flagged or otherwise clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-visibility material.

(ii) Each line shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest point (including sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from the walking/working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) [50 inches (1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying operations are being performed] from the walking/working surface.

(iii) Each line shall have a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN).

(4) On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are not in place prior to the beginning of overhand bricklaying operations, controlled access zones shall be enlarged, as necessary, to enclose all points of access, material handling areas, and storage areas.

(5) On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are in place, but need to be removed to allow overhand bricklaying work or leading edge work to take place, only that portion of the guardrail necessary to accomplish the day’s work shall be removed.

(h) “Safety monitoring systems.” Safety monitoring systems [See 1926.501(b)(10) and 1926.502(k)] and their use shall comply with the following provisions: (1) The employer shall designate a competent person

to monitor the safety of other employees and the employer shall ensure that the safety monitor complies with the following requirements:

(i) The safety monitor shall be competent to recognize fall hazards;

(ii) The safety monitor shall warn the employee when it appears that the employee is unaware of a fall hazard or is acting in an unsafe manner;

(iii) The safety monitor shall be on the same walking/working surface and within visual sighting distance of the employee being monitored;

(iv) The safety monitor shall be close enough to communicate orally with the employee; and

(v) The safety monitor shall not have other responsibilities which could take the monitor’s attention from the monitoring function.

(2) Mechanical equipment shall not be used or stored in areas where safety monitoring systems are being used to monitor employees engaged in roof operations on low-slope roofs.

11 (3) No employee, other than an employee engaged in

roofing work [on low-sloped roofs] or an employee covered by a fall protection plan, shall be allowed in an area where an employee is being protected by a safety monitoring system.

(4) Each employee working in a controlled access zone shall be directed to comply promptly with fall hazard warnings from safety monitors.

(i) “Covers.” Covers for holes in floors, roofs, and other walking/working surfaces shall meet the following requirements: (1) Covers located in roadways and vehicular aisles

shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least twice the maximum axle load of the largest vehicle expected to cross over the cover.

(2) All other covers shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least twice the weight of employees, equipment, and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time.

(3) All covers shall be secured when installed so as to prevent accidental displacement by the wind, equipment, or employees.

(4) All covers shall be color coded or they shall be marked with the word “HOLE” or “COVER” to provide warning of the hazard.

Note: This provision does not apply to cast iron manhole covers or steel grates used on streets or roadways.

(j) “Protection from falling objects.” Falling object protection shall comply with the following provisions: (1) Toeboards, when used as falling object protection,

shall be erected along the edge of the overhead walking/working surface for a distance sufficient to protect employees below.

(2) Toeboards shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the toeboard.

(3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of 3 ½ inches (9 cm) in vertical height from their top edge to the level of the walking/working surface. They shall have not more than 1/4inch (0.6 cm) clearance above the walking/working surface. They shall be solid or have openings not over 1 inch (2.5 cm) in greatest dimension.

(4) Where tools, equipment, or materials are piled higher than the top edge of a toeboard, paneling or screening shall be erected from the walking/ working surface or toeboard to the top of a guardrail system’s top rail or midrail, for a distance sufficient to protect employees below.

(5) Guardrail systems, when used as falling object protection, shall have all openings small enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects.

(6) During the performance of overhand bricklaying and related work:

(i) No materials or equipment except masonry and mortar shall be stored within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working edge.

(ii) Excess mortar, broken or scattered masonry units, and all other materials and debris shall be kept clear from the work area by removal at regular intervals.

(7) During the performance of roofing work: (i) Materials and equipment shall not be stored

within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a roof edge unless guardrails are erected at the edge.

(ii) Materials which are piled, grouped, or stacked near a roof edge shall be stable and self-supporting.

(8) Canopies, when used as falling object protection, shall be strong enough to prevent collapse and to prevent penetration by any objects which may fall onto the canopy.

(k) “Fall protection plan.” This option is available only to employees engaged in leading edge work, precast concrete erection work, or residential construction work (See 1926.501(b)(2), (b)(12), and (b)(13)) who can demonstrate that it is infeasible or it creates a greater hazard to use conventional fall protection equipment. The fall protection plan must conform to the following provisions: (1) The fall protection plan shall be prepared by a

qualified person and developed specifically for the site where the leading edge work is done, precast concrete work, or residential construction work is being performed and the plan must be maintained up to date.

(2) Any changes to the fall protection plan shall be approved by a qualified person.

(3) A copy of the fall protection plan with all approved changes shall be maintained at the job site.

(4) The implementation of the fall protection plan shall be under the supervision of a competent person.

(5) The fall protection plan shall document the reasons why the use of conventional fall protection systems (guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, or safety nets systems) are infeasible or why their use would create a greater hazard.

(6) The fall protection plan shall include a written discussion of other measures that will be taken to reduce or eliminate the fall hazard for workers who cannot be provided with protection from the conventional fall protection systems. For example, the employer shall discuss the extent to which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle mounted work platforms can be used to provide a safer working surface and thereby reduce the hazard of falling.

(7) The fall protection plan shall identify each location where conventional fall protection methods cannot be used. These locations shall then be classified as controlled access zones and the employer must comply with the criteria in paragraph (g) of this section.

(8) Where no other alternative measure has been implemented, the employer shall implement a safety monitoring system in conformance with 1926.502(h).

(9) The fall protection plan must include a statement

12which provides the name or other method of identification for each employee who is designated to work in controlled access zones. No other employees may enter controlled access zones.

(10) In the event an employee falls, or some other related, serious incident occurs, (e.g., a near miss) the employer shall investigate the circumstances of the fall or other incident to determine if the fall protection plan needs to be changed (e.g., new practices, procedures, or training) and shall implement those changes to prevent similar types of falls or incidents.

*[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 45 FR 75626, Nov. 14, 1980; 55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 59 FR 40733, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995] 1926.503 Training requirements The following training provisions supplement and clarify the requirements of 1926.21 regarding the hazards addressed in subpart M of this part. (a) “Training program.” (1) The employer shall provide a training program for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. The program shall enable each employee to recognize the hazards of falling and shall train each employee in the procedures to be followed in order to minimize these hazards. (2) The employer shall assure that each employee has been trained, as necessary, by a competent person qualified in the following areas: (i) The nature of fall hazards in the work area; (ii) The correct procedures for erecting,

maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the fall protection systems to be used;

(iii) The use and operation of guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, safety net systems, warning line systems, safety monitoring systems, controlled access zones, and other protection to be used;

(iv) The role of each employee in the safety monitoring system when this system is used;

(v) The limitations on the use of mechanical equipment during the performance of roofing work on low-sloped roofs;

(vi) The correct procedures for the handling and storage of equipment and materials and the erection of overhead protection; and

(vii) The role of employees in fall protection plans; (viii) The standards contained in this subpart. (b) “Certification of training.” (1) The employer shall verify compliance with paragraph (a) of this section by preparing a written certification record. The written certification record shall contain the name or other identity of the employee trained, the date(s) of the training, and the signature of the person who conducted the training or the signature of the employer. If the employer relies on training conducted by another employer or completed prior to the effective date of this section, the certification record shall indicate the date the employer determined the prior training

was adequate rather than the date of actual training. (2) The latest training certification shall be maintained. (c) “Retraining.” When the employer has reason to believe that any affected employee who has already been trained does not have the understanding and skill required by paragraph (a) of this section, the employer shall retrain each such employee. Circumstances where retraining is required include, but are not limited to, situations where: (1) Changes in the workplace render previous training

obsolete; or (2) Changes in the types of fall protection systems or

equipment to be used render previous training obsolete; or

(3) Inadequacies in an affected employee’s knowledge or use of fall protection systems or equipment indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill.

APPENDIX A

Determining Roof Widths – Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying with 1926.501(b)(10) (1) This appendix serves as a guideline to assist

employers complying with the requirements of 1926.501(b)(10). Section 1910.501(b)(10) allows the use of a safety monitoring system alone as a means of providing fall protection during the performance of roofing operations on low-sloped roofs 50 feet (15.25 m) or less in width. Each example in the appendix shows a roof plan or plans and indicates where each roof or roof area is to be measured to determine its width. Section views or elevation views are shown where appropriate. Some examples show “correct” and “incorrect” subdivisions of irregularly shaped roofs divided into smaller, regularly shaped areas. In all examples, the dimension selected to be the width of an area is the lesser of the two primary dimensions of the area, as viewed from above. Example A shows that on a simple rectangular roof, width is the lesser of the two primary overall dimensions. This is also the case with roofs which are sloped toward or away from the roof center, as shown in Example B.

(2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles. Such roofs may be broken down into subareas as shown in Example C. The process of dividing a roof area can produce many different configurations. Example C gives the general rule of using dividing lines of minimum length to minimize the size and number of areas which are potentially less than 50 feet (15.25 m) wide. The intent is to minimize the number of roof areas where safety monitoring systems alone are sufficient protection.

(3) Roofs which are comprised of several separate, non-contiguous roof areas, as in Example D, may be considered as a series of individual roofs. Some roofs have penthouses, additional floors, courtyard openings, or similar architectural features. Example E shows how the rule for

13dividing roofs into subareas is applied to such configurations. Irregular, non- rectangular roofs must be considered on an individual basis, as shown in Example F.

Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas by using dividing lines of minimum length to minimize the size and number of areas which are potentially less than or equal to 50 feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit the size of the roof areas where the safety monitoring system alone can be used (1926.502(b)(10)). Dotted lines are used in the examples to show the location of dividing lines.

denotes incorrect measurements of width.

EXAMPLE C IRREGULARLY SHAPED ROOFS WITH RECTANGLUAR SHAPED SECTIONS

14EXAMPLE E.

ROOFS WITH PENTHOUSES, OPEN COURTYARDS, ADDITIONAL FLOORS, ETC.

EXAMPLE F.

IRREGULAR, NON-RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS

APPENDIX B Guardrail Systems – Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with 1926.502(b) The standard requires guardrail systems and components to be designed and built to meet the

requirements of 1926.502(b)(3), (4), and (5). This Appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers in complying with these requirements. An employer may use these guidelines as a starting point for designing guardrail systems. However, the guidelines do not provide all the information necessary to build a complete system, and the employer is still responsible for designing and assembling these components in such a way that the completed system will meet the requirements of 1926.502(b)(3), (4), and (5). Components for which no specific guidelines are given in this Appendix (e.g., joints, base connections, components made with other materials, and components with other dimensions) must also be designed and constructed in such a way that the completed system meets the requirements of 1926.502. (1) For wood railings: Wood components shall be

minimum 1500 lb-ft/in(2) fiber (stress grade) construction grade lumber; the posts shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm x 10 cm) lumber spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers; the top rail shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm x 10 cm) lumber, the intermediate rail shall be at least 1-inch by 6-inch (2.5 cm x 15 cm) lumber. All lumber dimensions are nominal sizes as provided by the American Softwood Lumber Standards, dated January 1970.

(2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and intermediate railings shall be at least one and one-half inches nominal diameter (schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers.

(3) For structural steel railings: posts, top rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least 2-inch by 2-inch (5 cm x 10 cm) by 3.8 inch (1.1 cm) angles, with posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers.

*[59 FR 40743, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995]

APPENDIX C Personal Fall Arrest Systems – Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with 1926.502(d) I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems – (a) “General.” This appendix serves as a nonmandatory guideline to assist employers in complying with the requirements in 1926.502(d). Paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this Appendix describe test procedures which may be used to determine compliance with the requirements in 1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in Appendix D of this subpart, the test methods listed here in Appendix C can also be used to assist employers in complying with the requirements in 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) for positioning device systems. (b) “General conditions for all tests in the Appendix to 1926.502(d).” (1) Lifelines, lanyards and deceleration devices should

be attached to an anchorage and connected to the body-belt or body harness in the same manner as they would be when used to protect employees.

15(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and should not

have a deflection greater than 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied.

(3) The frequency response of the load measuring instrumentation should be 500 Hz.

(4) The test weight used in the strength and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cylindrical or torsoshaped object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).

(5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create the free fall distance should be supplied with the system, or in its absence, the least elastic lanyard or lifeline available to be used with the system.

(6) The test weight for each test should be hoisted to the required level and should be quickly released without having any appreciable motion imparted to it.

(7) The system’s performance should be evaluated taking into account the range of environmental conditions for which it is designed to be used.

(8) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further operation.

(c) “Strength test.” (1) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 5 pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this section.) (2) The test consists of dropping the test weight once.

A new unused system should be used for each test.

(3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or body harness.

(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the length of the lifeline above the centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the lifeline’s anchorage point should not exceed 2 feet (0.61 m).

(5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which do not automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, and for systems with deceleration devices which have a connection distance in excess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness), the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is 1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to its hanging location (6 feet below the anchorage). The test weight should fall without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test. In some cases a non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length may need to be added to the system (for test purposes) to create the necessary free fall distance.

(6) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 m).

(7) Any weight which detaches from the belt or harness has failed the strength test.

(d) “Force test” – (1) “General.” The test consists of dropping the respective test weight once as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) of this section. A new, unused system should be used for each test. (2) “For lanyard systems.” (i) A test weight of 220

pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix).

(ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or body harness.

(iii) The test weight should free fall from the anchorage level to its hanging location (a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test.

(3) “For all other systems.” (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix)

(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the test should be the maximum fall distance physically permitted by the system during normal use conditions, up to a maximum free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet (1.83 m), except as follows:

(A) For deceleration systems which have a connection link or lanyard, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to the connection distance (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness).

(B) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to that permitted by the system in normal use. (For example, to test a system with a self-retracting lifeline or lanyard, the test weight should be supported and the system allowed to retract the lifeline or lanyard as it would in normal use. The test weight would then be released and the force and deceleration distance measured).

(4) A system fails the force test if the recorded maximum arresting force exceeds 1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a body harness.

(5) The maximum elongation and deceleration distance should be recorded during the force test. (e) “Deceleration device tests.” (1) “General.” The device should be evaluated or tested under the environmental conditions, (such as rain, ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for which the device is designed.

16 (2) “Rope-grab-type deceleration devices.” (i) Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000

times over the same length of line a distance of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the mechanism should lock each time.

(ii) Unless the device is permanently marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline which must be used, several types (different diameters and different materials), of lifelines should be used to test the device.

(3) “Other self-activating-type deceleration devices.” The locking mechanisms of other selfactivating-type-deceleration devices designed for more than one arrest should lock each of 1,000 times as they would in normal service.

II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for personal fall arrest systems. The following information constitutes additional guidelines for use in complying with requirements for a personal fall arrest system. (a) “Selection and use considerations.” (1) The kind of personal fall arrest system selected should match the particular work situation, and any possible free fall distance should be kept to a minimum. Consideration should be given to the particular work environment. For example, the presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on the system, should it be evaluated. Hot or cold environments may also have an adverse effect on the system. Wire rope should not be used where an electrical hazard is anticipated. As required by the standard, the employer must plan to have means available to promptly rescue an employee should a fall occur, since the suspended employee may not be able to reach a work level independently. (2) Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines are

subject to damage by work operations such as welding, chemical cleaning, and sandblasting, the component should be protected, or other securing systems should be used. The employer should fully evaluate the work conditions and environment (including seasonal weather changes) before selecting the appropriate personal fall protection system. Once in use, the system’s effectiveness should be monitored. In some cases, a program for cleaning and maintenance of the system may be necessary.

(b) “Testing considerations.” Before purchasing or putting into use a personal fall arrest system, an employer should obtain from the supplier information about the system based on its performance during testing so that the employer can know if the system meets this standard. Testing should be done using recognized test methods. This Appendix contains test methods recognized for evaluating the performance of fall arrest systems. Not all systems may need to be individually tested; the performance of some systems may be based on data and calculations derived from testing of similar systems provided that enough information is available to demonstrate similarity of function and design. (c) “Component compatibility considerations.” Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is designed, tested,

and supplied as a complete system. However, it is common practice for lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration devices, body belts and body harnesses to be interchanged since some components wear out before others. The employer and employee should realize that not all components are interchangeable. For instance, a lanyard should not be connected between a body belt (or harness) and a deceleration device of the selfretracting type since this can result in additional free fall for which the system was not designed. Any substitution or change to a personal fall arrest system should be fully evaluated or tested by a competent person to determine that it meets the standard, before the modified system is put in use. (d) “Employee training considerations.” Thorough employee training in the selection and use of personal fall arrest systems is imperative. Employees must be trained in the safe use of the system. This should include the following: application limits; proper anchoring and tie-off techniques; estimation of free fall distance, including determination of deceleration distance, and total fall distance to prevent striking a lower level; methods of use; and inspection and storage of the system. Careless or improper use of the equipment can result in serious injury or death. Employers and employees should become familiar with the material in this Appendix, as well as manufacturer’s recommendations, before a system is used. Of uppermost importance is the reduction in strength caused by certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum permitted free fall distance. Also, to be stressed are the importance of inspections prior to use, the limitations of the equipment, and unique conditions at the worksite which may be important in determining the type of system to use. (e) “Instruction considerations.” Employers should obtain comprehensive instructions from the supplier as to the system’s proper use and application, including, where applicable: (1) The force measured during the sample force test; (2) The maximum elongation measured for lanyards

during the force test; (3) The deceleration distance measured for

deceleration devices during the force test; (4) Caution statements on critical use limitations; (5) Application limits; (6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques,

including the proper dee-ring or other attachment point to use on the body belt and harness for fall arrest;

(7) Proper climbing techniques; (8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, and storage;

and (9) Specific lifelines which may be used. This information should be provided to employees during training. (f) “Rescue considerations.” As required by 1926.502(d)(20), when personal fall arrest systems are used, the employer must assure that employees can be promptly rescued or can rescue themselves should a fall occur. The availability of rescue personnel, ladders or other rescue equipment should be evaluated. In some situations, equipment which allows employees to rescue themselves

17after the fall has been arrested may be desirable, such as devices which have descent capability. (g) “Inspection considerations.” As required by 1926.502(d)(21), personal fall arrest systems must be regularly inspected. Any component with any significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; alterations or additions which might affect its efficiency; damage due to corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty look springs; tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or damaged mountings; non-functioning parts; or wearing or internal deterioration in the ropes must be withdrawn from service immediately, and should be tagged or marked as unusable, or destroyed. (h) “Tie-off considerations.” (1) One of the most important aspects of personal fall protection systems is fully planning the system before it is put into use. Probably the most overlooked component is planning for suitable anchorage points. Such planning should ideally be done before the structure or building is constructed so that anchorage points can be incorporated during construction for use later for window cleaning or other building maintenance. If properly planned, these anchorage points may be used during construction, as well as afterwards. (i) Properly planned anchorages should be used

if they are available. In some cases, anchorages must be installed immediately prior to use. In some cases, a registered professional engineer with experience in designing fall protection systems, or another qualified person with appropriate education and experience should design an anchor point to be installed.

(ii) In some cases, the Agency recognizes that there will be a need to devise an anchor point from existing structures. Examples of what might be appropriate anchor points are steel members or I-beams if an acceptable strap is available for the connection (do not use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto itself); large eye-bolts made of an appropriate grade steel; guardrails or railings if they have been designed for use as an anchor point; or masonry or wood members only if the attachment point is substantial and precautions have been taken to assure that bolts or other connectors will not pull through. A qualified person should be used to evaluate the suitability of these “make shift” anchorages with a focus on proper strength.

(2) Employers and employees should at all times be aware that the strength of a personal fall arrest system is based on its being attached to an anchoring system which does not reduce the strength of the system (such as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap-hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of attachment is used that will reduce the strength of the system, that component should be replaced by a stronger one, but one that will also maintain the appropriate maximum arrest force characteristics.

(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or lifeline (at any location) can reduce the lifeline or lanyard strength by 50 percent or more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or lifeline should be used to compensate for the weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard length should be reduced (or the tie-off location raised) to minimize free fall distance, or the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by one which has an appropriately incorporated connector to eliminate the need for a knot.

(4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline around an “H” or “I” beam or similar support can reduce its strength as much as 70 percent due to the cutting action of the beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline should be protected from the edge; or free fall distance should be greatly minimized.

(5) Tie-off where the line passes over or around rough or sharp surfaces reduces strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging should be used. Such alternatives may include use of a snaphook/dee ring connection, wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap around or over the problem surface.

(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected to greater loads than the impact load imposed by an attached component. When the angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 degrees, the impact force imparted to the lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly amplified. For example, with a sag angle of 15 degrees, the force amplification is about 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. Depending on the angle of the sag, and the line’s elasticity, the strength of the horizontal lifeline and the anchorages to which it is attached should be increased a number of times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in considering a horizontal lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to a horizontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement of the falling employee and the horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall may cause other employees to fall also. Horizontal lifeline and anchorage strength should be increased for each additional employee to be tied off. For these and other reasons, the design of systems using horizontal lifelines must be done by qualified persons. Testing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to use is recommended.

(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the axis of the bolt and its strength is greatly reduced if the force is applied at an angle to this axis (in the direction of shear). Also, care should be exercised in selecting the proper diameter of the eye to avoid accidental disengagement of snap-hooks not designed to be compatible for the connection.

(8) Due to the significant reduction in the strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some cases, as much as a

1870 percent reduction), the sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be used for lifeline/ lanyard connections except in emergency situations where no other available system is practical. The “one-and-one” sliding hitch knot should never be used because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The “two-and-two,” or “three-and- three” knot (preferable) may be used in emergency situations; however, care should be taken to limit free fall distance to a minimum because of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength.

(i) “Vertical lifeline considerations.” As required by the standard, each employee must have a separate lifeline [except employees engaged in constructing elevator shafts who are permitted to have two employees on one lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical. The reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement of the lifeline during the arrest of the fall may pull other employees’ lanyards, causing them to fall as well. (j) “Snap-hook considerations.” (1) Although not required by this standard for all connections until January 1, 1998, locking snaphooks designed for connection to suitable objects (of sufficient strength) are highly recommended in lieu of the nonlocking type. Locking snaphooks incorporate a positive locking mechanism in addition to the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow the keeper to open under moderate pressure without someone first releasing the mechanism. Such a feature, properly designed, effectively prevents roll-out from occurring. (2) As required by 1926.502(d)(6), the following

connections must be avoided (unless properly designed locking snaphooks are used) because they are conditions which can result in roll-out when a nonlocking snaphook is used:

(i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a horizontal lifeline.

(ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to one dee-ring.

(iii) Two snaphooks connected to each other. (iv) A snaphook connected back on its integral

lanyard. (v) A snaphook connected to a webbing loop or

webbing lanyard. (vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring, rebar,

or other connection point in relation to the snaphook dimensions which would allow the snaphook keeper to be depressed by a turning motion of the snaphook.

(k) “Free fall considerations.” The employer and employee should at all times be aware that a system’s maximum arresting force is evaluated under normal use conditions established by the manufacturer, and in no case using a free fall distance in excess of 6 feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can significantly increase the arresting force on the employee, possibly to the point of causing injury. Because of this, the free fall distance should be kept at a minimum, and, as required by the standard, in no case greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or anchor should be located at or above the connection point of the fall arrest equipment

to belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional free fall distance is added to the length of the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attaching to the working surface will often result in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used, the total free fall distance will be the distance from the working level to the body belt (or harness) attachment point plus the 6 feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another important consideration is that the arresting force which the fall system must withstand also goes up with greater distances of free fall, possibly exceeding the strength of the system. (l) “Elongation and deceleration distance considerations.” Other factors involved in a proper tieoff are elongation and deceleration distance. During the arresting of a fall, a lanyard will experience a length of stretching or elongation, whereas activation of a deceleration device will result in a certain stopping distance. These distances should be available with the lanyard or device’s instructions and must be added to the free fall distance to arrive at the total fall distance before and employee is fully stopped. The additional stopping distance may be very significant if the lanyard or deceleration device is attached near or at the end of a long lifeline, which may itself add considerable distance due to its own elongation. As required by the standard, sufficient distance to allow for all of these factors must also be maintained between the employee and obstructions below, to prevent an injury due to impact before the system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should be allowed below the securing point of a rope grab type deceleration device, and the end terminated to prevent the device from sliding off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline should extend to the ground or the next working level below. These measures are suggested to prevent the worker from inadvertently moving past the end of the lifeline and having the rope grab become disengaged from the lifeline. (m) “Obstruction considerations.” The location of the tie-off should also consider the hazard of obstructions in the potential fall path of the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the possibilities of exaggerated swinging should be considered. In addition, when a body belt is used, the employee’s body will go through a horizontal position to a jack-knifed position during the arrest of all falls. Thus, obstructions which might interfere with this motion should be avoided or a severe injury could occur. (n) “Other considerations.” Because of the design of some personal fall arrest systems, additional considerations may be required for proper tie-off. For example, heavy deceleration devices of the self-retracting type should be secured overhead in order to avoid the weight of the device having to be supported by the employee. Also, if self-retracting equipment is connected to a horizontal lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be minimized to prevent the device from sliding down the lifeline to a position which creates a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all cases, manufacturer’s instructions should be followed. *[59 FR 40743, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995]

19APPENDIX D

Positioning Device Systems – Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with 1926.502(e) I. Testing Methods for Positioning Device Systems This appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers in complying with the requirements for positioning device systems in 1926.502(e). Paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of Appendix C of subpart M relating to 1926.502(d) – Personal Fall Arrest Systems – set forth test procedures which may be used, along with the procedures listed below, to determine compliance with the requirements for positioning device systems in 1926.502(e)(3) and (4) of Subpart M. (a) “General.” (1) Single strap positioning devices shall have one end attached to a fixed anchorage and the other end connected to a body belt or harness in the same manner as they would be used to protect employees. Double strap positioning devices, similar to window cleaner’s belts, shall have one end of the strap attached to a fixed anchorage and the other end shall hang free. The body belt or harness shall be attached to the strap in the same manner as it would be used to protect employees. The two strap ends shall be adjusted to their maximum span.

(2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and shall not have a deflection greater than .04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied.

(3) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used. The weight shall be a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).

(4) Each test shall consist of dropping the specified weight one time without failure of the system being tested. A new system shall be used for each test.

(5) The test weight for each test shall be hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its “at rest” position), and shall be dropped so as to permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m).

(6) The test is failed whenever any breakage or slippage occurs which permits the weight to fall free of the system.

(7) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further operation; however, all such incapacities shall be readily apparent.

II. Inspection Considerations. As required in 1926.502(e)(5), positioning device systems must be regularly inspected. Any component with any significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; alterations or additions which might affect its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives; distorted hooks or fault hook springs; tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckets; loose or damaged mountings; non-functioning parts; or wearing or internal deterioration in the ropes must be withdrawn from service immediately, and should be tagged or marked as unusable, or destroyed. *[59 FR 40746, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995]

APPENDIX E Sample Fall Protection Plan – Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with 1926.502(k) Employers engaged in leading edge work, precast concrete construction work and residential construction work who can demonstrate that it is infeasible or creates a greater hazard to use conventional fall protection systems must develop and follow a fall protection plan. Below are sample fall protection plans developed for precast concrete construction and residential work that could be tailored to be site specific for other precast concrete or residential jobsite. This sample plan can be modified to be used for other work involving leading edge work. The sample plan outlines the elements that must be addressed in any protection plan. The reasons outlined in this sample fall protection plan are for illustrative purposes only and are not necessarily a valid, acceptable rationale (unless the conditions at the job site are the same as those covered by these sample plans) for not using conventional fall protection systems for a particular precast concrete or residential construction worksite. However, the sample plans provide guidance to employers on the type of information that is required to be discussed in fall protection plans. Sample Fall Protection Plans Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress Concrete Structures This fall protection plan is specific for the following project: Location of job Erecting company Date plan prepared or modified Plan prepared by Plan approved by Plan supervised by The following fall protection plan is a sample program prepared for the prevention of injuries associated with falls. A fall protection plan must be developed and evaluated on a site by site basis. It is recommended that erectors discuss the written fall protection plan with their OSHA area office prior to going on a jobsite. I. Statement of Company Policy (Company Name) is dedicated to the protection of its employees from on-the-job injuries. All employees of (Company Name) have the responsibility to work safely on the job. The purpose of this plan is: (a) To supplement our standard safety policy by providing safety standards specifically designed to cover fall protection on this job and; (b) to ensure that each employee is trained and made aware of the safety provisions which are to be implemented by this plan prior to the start of erection. This fall protection plan addresses the use of other than conventional fall protection at a number of areas on the project, as well as identifying specific activities that require non-conventional means of fall protection. These areas include: a. Connecting activity (point of erection). b. Leading edge work.

20 c. Unprotected sides or edge. d. Grouting. This plan is designed to enable employers and employees to recognize the fall hazards on this job and to establish the procedures that are to be followed in order to prevent falls to lower levels or through holes and openings in walking/working surfaces. Each employee will be trained in these procedures and strictly adhere to them except when doing so would expose the employee to a greater hazard. If, in the employee’s opinion, this is the case, the employee is to notify the foreman of the concern and the concern addressed before proceeding. Safety policy and procedure on any one project cannot be administered, implemented, monitored and enforced by any one individual. The total objective of a safe, accident free work environment can only be accomplished by a dedicated, concerted effort by every individual involved with the project from management down to the last employee. Each employee must understand their value to the company; the costs of accident, both monetary, physical, and emotional; the objective of the safety policy and procedures; the safety rules that apply to the safety policy and procedures; and what their individual role is in administering, implementing, monitoring, and compliance of their safety policy and procedures. This allows for a more personal approach to compliance through planning, training, understanding and cooperative effort, rather than by strict enforcement. If for any reason an unsafe act persists, strict enforcement will be implemented. It is the responsibility of (name of competent person) to implement this fall protection plan. (Name of competent person) is responsible for continual observational safety checks of their work operations and to enforce the safety policy and procedures. The foreman also is responsible to correct any unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is the responsibility of the employee to understand and adhere to the procedures of this plan and to follow the instructions of the foreman. It is also the responsibility of the employee to bring to management’s attention any unsafe or hazardous conditions or acts that may cause injury to either themselves or any other employees. Any changes to this fall protection plan must be approved by (name of Qualified Person). II. Fall Protection Systems to Be Used on This Project Where conventional fall protection is infeasible or creates a greater hazard at the leading edge and during initial connecting activity, we plan to do this work using a safety monitoring system and expose only a minimum number of employees for the time necessary to actually accomplish the job. The maximum number of workers to be monitored by one safety monitor is six (6). We are designating the following trained employees as designated erectors and they are permitted to enter the controlled access zones and work without the use of conventional fall protection. Safety monitor: Designated erector: Designated erector: Designated erector: Designated erector:

Designated erector: Designated erector: The safety monitor shall be identified by wearing an orange hard hat. The designated erectors will be identified by one of the following methods: 1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, or 2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, or 3. They will wear a blue colored vest. Only individuals with the appropriate experience, skills, and training will be working as designated erectors. All employees that will be working as designated erectors under the safety monitoring system shall have been trained and instructed in the following areas: 1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the work area (at

the leading edge and when making initial connections-point of erection).

2. Avoidance of fall hazards using established work practices which have been made known to the employees.

3. Recognition of unsafe practices or working conditions that could lead to a fall, such as windy conditions.

4. The function, use, and operation of safety monitoring systems, guardrail systems, body belt/harness systems, control zones and other protection to be used.

5. The correct procedure for erecting, maintaining, disassembling and inspecting the system(s) to be used.

6. Knowledge of construction sequence or the erection plan.

A conference will take place prior to starting work involving all members of the erection crew, crane crew and supervisors of any other concerned contractors. This conference will be conducted by the precast concrete erection supervisor in charge of the project. During the pre-work conference, erection procedures and sequences to this job will be thoroughly discussed and safety practices to be used throughout the project will be specified. Further, all personnel will be informed that the controlled access zones are off limits to all personnel other than those designated erectors specifically trained to work in that area. Safety Monitoring System A safety monitoring system means a fall protection system in which a competent person is responsible for recognizing and warning employees of fall hazards. The duties of the safety monitor are to: 1. Warn by voice when approaching the open edge in

an unsafe manner. 2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous situation

developing which cannot be seen by another person involved with product placement, such as a member getting out of control.

3. Make the designated erectors aware they are in a dangerous area.

4. Be competent in recognizing fall hazards. 5. Warn employees when they appear to be unaware

of a fall hazard or are acting in an unsafe manner. 6. Be on the same walking/working surface as the

monitored employees and within visual sighting distance of the monitored employees.

21 7. Be close enough to communicate orally with the

employees. 8. Not allow other responsibilities to encumber

monitoring. If the safety monitor shall (1) stop the erection process; and (2) turn over other responsibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn over the safety monitoring function to another designated, competent person. The safety monitoring system shall not be used when the wind is strong enough to cause loads with large surface areas to swing out of radius, or result in loss of control of the load, or when weather conditions cause the walking-working surfaces to become icy or slippery.

Control Zone System A controlled access zone means an area designated and clearly marked, in which leading edge work may take place without the use of guardrail, safety net or personal fall arrest systems to protect the employees in the area. Control zone systems shall comply with the following provisions: 1. When used to control access to areas where

leading edge and other operations are taking place the controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line or by any other means that restricts access. When control files are used, they shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the member being erected, whichever is less, from the leading edge.

2. The control line shall extend along the entire length of the unprotected or leading edge and shall be approximately parallel to the unprotected or leading edge.

3. The control line shall be connected on each side to a guardrail system or wall.

4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and supporting stanchions as follows:

5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-visibility material.

6. Each line shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest point (including sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from the walking/ working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from the walking/working surface.

7. Each line shall have a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN).

Holes – All openings greater than 12 in. x 12 in. will have perimeter guarding or covering. All predetermined holes will have the plywood covers made in the precasters’ yard and shipped with the member to the jobsite. Prior to cutting holes on the job, proper protection for the hole must be provided to protect the workers. Perimeter guarding or covers will not be removed without the approval of the erection foreman. Precast concrete column erection through the existing deck requires that many holes be provided through this deck. These are to be covered and protected. Except for the opening being currently used to erect a column, all

opening protection is left undisturbed. The opening being uncovered to erect a column will become part of the point of erection and will be addressed as part of this fall protection plan. This uncovering is to be done at the erection foreman’s direction and will only occur immediately prior to “feeding” the column through the opening. Once the end of the column is through the slab opening, there will no longer exist a fall hazard at this location. III. Implementation of Fall Protection Plan The structure being erected is a multistory total precast concrete building consisting of columns, beams, wall panels and hollow core slabs and double tee floor and roof members. The following is a list of the products and erection situations on this job: Columns – For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees disconnecting crane hooks from columns will work from a ladder and wear a body belt/harness with lanyard and be tied off when both hands are needed to disconnect. For tying off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to the lifting eye at the top of the column, prior to lifting, to be used with a manually operated or mobile rope grab. For columns too high for the use of a ladder, 36 ft and higher, an added cable will be used to reduce the height of the disconnecting point so that a ladder can be used. This cable will be left in place until a point in erection that it can be removed safely. In some cases, columns will be unhooked from the crane by using an erection tube or shackle with a pull pin which is released from the ground after the column is stabilized. The column will be adequately connected and/or braced to safely support the weight of the ladder with an employee on it. Inverted Tee Beams – Employees erecting inverted tee beams, at a height of 6 to 40 ft, will erect the beam, make initial connections, and final alignment from a ladder. If the employee needs to reach over the side of the beam to bar or make an adjustment to the alignment of the beam, they will mount the beam and be tied off to the lifting device in the beam after ensuring the load has been stabilized on its bearing. To disconnect the crane from the beam an employee will stand a ladder against the beam. Because the use of ladders is not practical at heights above 40 ft, beams will be initially placed with the use of tag lines and their final alignment made by a person on a manlift or similar employee positioning systems. Spandrel Beams – Spandrel beams at the exterior of the building will be aligned as closely as possible with the use of tag lines with the final placement of the spandrel beam made from a ladder at the open end of the structure. A ladder will be used to make the initial connections and a ladder will be used to disconnect the crane. The other end of the beam will be placed by the designated erector from the double tee deck under the observation of the safety monitor. The beams will be adequately connected and/or braced to safely support the weight of a ladder with an employee on it. Floor and Roof Members – During installation of the precast concrete floor and/or roof members, the work deck continuously increases in area as more and more units are

22being erected and positioned. Thus, the unprotected floor/roof perimeter is constantly modified with the leading edge changing location as each member is installed. The fall protection for workers at the leading edge shall be assured by properly constructed and maintained control zone lines not more than 60 ft away from the leading edge supplemented by a safety monitoring system to ensure the safety of all designated erectors working within the area defined by the control zone lines. The hollow core slabs erected on the masonry portion of the building will be erected and grouted using the safety monitoring system. Grout will be placed in the space between the end of the slab and face shell of the concrete masonry by dumping from a wheelbarrow. The grout in the keyways between the slabs will be dumped from a wheelbarrow and then spread with long handled tools, allowing the worker to stand erect facing toward the unprotected edge and back from any work deck edge. Whenever possible, the designated erectors will approach the incoming member at the leading edge only after it is below waist height so that the member itself provides protection against falls. Except for the situations described below, when the arriving floor or roof member is within 2 to 3 inches of its final position, the designated erectors can then proceed to their position of erection at each end of the member under control of the safety monitor. Crane hooks will be unhooked from double tee members by designated erectors under the direction and supervision of the safety monitor. Designated erectors, while waiting for the next floor or roof member, will be constantly under the control of the safety monitor for fall protection and are directed to stay a minimum of six (6) ft from the edge. In the event a designated erector must move from one end of a member, which has just been placed at the leading edge, they must first move away from the leading edge a minimum of six (6) ft and then progress to the other end while maintaining the minimum distance of six (6) ft at all times. Erection of double tees, where conditions require bearing of one end into a closed pocket and the other end on a beam ledge, restricting the tee legs from going directly into the pockets, require special considerations. The tee legs that are to bear in the closed pocket must hang lower than those at the beam bearing. The double tee will be “two-lined” in order to elevate one end higher than the other to allow for the low end to be ducked into the closed pocket using the following procedure. The double tee will be rigged with a standard fourway spreader off of the main load line. An additional choker will be attached to the married point of the twolegged spreader at the end of the tee that is to be elevated. The double tee will be hoisted with the main load line and swung into a position and stabilized, the whip line load block will be lowered to just above the tee deck. At this time, two erectors will walk out on the suspended tee deck at midspan of the tee member and pull the load block to the end of the tee to be elevated and attach the additional choker to the load block. The possibility of entanglement with the crane lines and other obstacles during this two lining process while raising and lowering the crane block on that second line could be hazardous to an encumbered

employee. Therefore, the designated erectors will not tie off during any part of this process. While the designated erectors are on the double tee, the safety monitoring system will be used. After attaching the choker, the two erectors then step back on the previously erected tee deck and signal the crane operator to hoist the load with the whip line to the elevation that will allow for enough clearance to let the low end tee legs slide into the pockets when the main load line is lowered. The erector, who is handling the lowered end of the tee at the closed pocket bearing, will step out on the suspended tee. An erection bar will then be placed between the end of the tee leg and the inside face of the pocketed spandrel member. The tee is barred away from the pocketed member to reduce the friction and lateral force against the pocketed member. As the tee is being lowered, the other erector remains on the tee which was previously erected to handle the other end. At this point the tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a point where the tee legs can freely slide into the pockets. The erector working the lowered end of the tee must keep pressure on the bar between the tee and the face of the pocketed spandrel member to very gradually let the tee legs slide into the pocket to its proper bearing dimension. The tee is then slowly lowered into its final erected position. The designated erector should be allowed onto the suspended double tee, otherwise there is no control over the horizontal movement of the double tee and this movement could knock the spandrell off of its bearing or the column out of plumb. The control necessary to prevent hitting the spandrel can only be done safely from the top of the double tee being erected. Loadbearing Wall Panels – The erection of the loadbearing wall panels on the elevated decks requires the use of a safety monitor and a controlled access zone that is a minimum of 25 ft and a maximum of ½ the length of the wall panels away from the unprotected edge, so that designated erectors can move freely and unencumbered when receiving the panels. Bracing, if required for stability, will be installed by ladder. After the braces are secured, the crane will be disconnected from the wall by using a ladder. The wall to wall connections will also be performed from a ladder. Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding) – The locating of survey lines, panel layout and other installation prerequisites (prewelding, etc.) for non-loadbearing panels (cladding) will not commence until floor perimeter and floor openings have been protected. In some areas, it is necessary because of panel configuration to remove the perimeter protection as the cladding is being installed. Removal of perimeter protection will be performed on a bay to bay basis, just ahead of cladding erection to minimize temporarily unprotected floor edges. Those workers within 6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning the cladding when the perimeter protection is removed shall be tied off. Detailing – Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or more to lower levels, who are not actively engaged in leading edge work or connecting activity, such as welding, bolting, cutting, bracing, guying, patching, painting or other operations, and who are working less than six (6) ft. from an unprotected edge will be tied off at all times or guardrails will be installed. Employees engaged in these

23activities but who are more than six (6) ft. from an unprotected edge as defined by the control zone lines, do not require fall protection but a warning line or control lines must be erected to remind employees they are approaching an area where fall protection is required. IV. Conventional Fall Protection Considered for the Point of Erection or Leading Edge Erection Operations A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems In this particular erection sequence and procedure, personal fall arrest systems requiring body belt/harness systems, lifelines and lanyards will not reduce possible hazards to workers and will create offsetting hazards during their usage at the leading edge of precast/prestressed concrete construction. Leading edge erection and initial connections are conducted by employees who are specifically trained to do this type of work and are trained to recognize the fall hazards. The nature of such work normally exposes the employee to the fall hazard for a short period of time and installation of fall protection systems for a short duration is not feasible because it exposes the installers of the system to the same fall hazard, but for a longer period of time. 1. It is necessary that the employee be able to move

freely without encumbrance in order to guide the sections of precast concrete into their final position without having lifelines attached which will restrict the employee’s ability to move about at the point of erection.

2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more workers to maneuver around each other as a concrete member is positioned to fit into the structure. If they are each attached to a lifeline, part of their attention must be diverted from their main task of positioning a member weighing several tons to the task of avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if these workers are attached to lanyards, more fall potential would result than from not using such a device. In this specific erection sequence and procedure, retractable lifelines do not solve the problem of two workers becoming tangled. In fact, such a tangle could prevent the lifeline from retracting as the worker moved, thus potentially exposing the worker to a fall greater than 6 ft. Also, a worker crossing over the lifeline of another worker can create a hazard because the movement of one person can unbalance the other. In the event of a fall by one person there is a likelihood that the other person will be caused to fall as well. In addition, if contamination such as grout (during hollow core grouting) enters the retractable housing it can cause excessive wear and damage to the device and could clog the retracting mechanism as the lanyard is dragged across the deck. Obstructing the cable orifice can defeat the device’s shock absorbing function, produce cable slack and damage, and adversely affect cable extraction and retraction.

3. Employees tied to a lifeline can be trapped and crushed by moving structural members if the employee becomes restrained by the lanyard or retractable lifeline and cannot get out of the path of the moving load. The sudden movement of a precast concrete member being raised by a crane can be caused by a number of factors. When this happens, a connector may immediately have to move a considerable distance to avoid injury. If a tied off body belt/harness is being used, the connector could be trapped. Therefore, there is a greater risk of injury if the connector is tied to the structure for this specific erection sequence and procedure. When necessary to move away from a retractable device, the worker cannot move at a rate greater than the device locking speed typically 3.5 to 4.5 ft/sec. When moving toward the device it is necessary to move at a rate which does not permit cable slack to build up. This slack may cause cable retraction acceleration and cause a worker to lose their balance by applying a higher than normal jerking force on the body when the cable suddenly becomes taut after building up momentum. This slack can also cause damage to the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven coiling of cable on the drum, and possible cable damage. The factors causing sudden movements for this location include:

(a) Cranes (1) Operator error. (2) Site conditions (soft or unstable ground). (3) Mechanical failure. (4) Structural failure. (5) Rigging failure.

(6) Crane signal/radio communication failure. (b) Weather Conditions (1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting) –

particularly a problem with the large surface areas of precast concrete members.

(2) Snow/rain (visibility). (3) Fog (visibility). (4) Cold – causing slowed reactions or

mechanical problems. (c) Structure/Product Conditions (1) Lifting Eye failure. (2) Bearing failure or slippage. (3) Structure shifting. (4) Bracing failure. (5) Product failure. (d) Human error

(1) Incorrect tag line procedure. (2) Tag line hang-up. (3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane signals.

(4) Misjudged elevation of member. (5) Misjudged speed of member. (6) Misjudged angle of member. 4. Anchorages or special attachment points could be

cast into the precast concrete members if sufficient preplanning and consideration of erectors’ position

24is done before the members are cast. Any hole or other attachment must be approved by the engineer who designed the member. It is possible that some design restrictions will not allow a member to be weakened by an additional hole; however, it is anticipated that such situations would be the exception, not the rule. Attachment points, other than on the deck surface, will require removal and/or patching. In order to remove and/or patch these points, requires the employee to be exposed to an additional fall hazard at an unprotected perimeter. The fact that attachment points could be available anywhere on the structure does not eliminate the hazards of using these points for tying off as discussed above. A logical point for tying off on double tees would be using the lifting loops, except that they must be cut off to eliminate a tripping hazard at an appropriate time.

5. Providing attachment at a point above the walking/working surface would also create fall exposures for employees installing their devices. Final positioning of a precast concrete member requires it to be moved in such a way that it must pass through the area that would be occupied by the lifeline and the lanyards attached to the point above. Resulting entanglements of lifelines and lanyards on a moving member could pull employees from the work surface. Also, the structure is being created and, in most cases, there is no structure above the members being placed.

(a) Temporary structural supports, installed to provide attaching points for lifelines limit the space which is essential for orderly positioning, alignment and placement of the precast concrete members. To keep the lanyards a reasonable and manageable length, lifeline supports would necessarily need to be in proximity to the positioning process. A sudden shift of the precast concrete member being positioned because of wind pressure or crane movement could make it strike the temporary supporting structure, moving it suddenly and causing tied off employees to fall.

(b) The time in manhours which would be expended in placing and maintaining temporary structural supports for lifeline attaching points could exceed the expended manhours involved in placing the precast concrete members. No protection could be provided for the employees erecting the temporary structural supports and these supports would have to be moved for each successive step in the construction process, thus greatly increasing the employee’s exposure to the fall hazard.

(c) The use of a cable strung horizontally between two columns to provide tie off lines for erecting or walking a beam for connecting

work is not feasible and creates a greater hazard on this multi-story building for the following reasons:

(1) If a connector is to use such a line, it must be installed between the two columns. To perform this installation requires an erector to have more fall exposure time attaching the cable to the columns than would be spent to make the beam to column connection itself.

(2) If such a line is to be installed so that an erector can walk along a beam, it must be overhead or below him. For example, if a connector must walk along a 24 in. wide beam, the presence of a line next to the connector at waist level, attached directly to the columns, would prevent the connector from centering their weight over the beam and balancing themselves. Installing the line above the connector might be possible on the first level of a two-story column; however, the column may extend only a few feet above the floor level at the second level or be flush with the floor level. Attaching the line to the side of the beam could be a solution; however, it would require the connector to attach the lanyard below foot level which would most likely extend a fall farther than 6 ft.

(3) When lines are strung over every beam, it becomes more and more difficult for the crane operator to lower a precast concrete member into position without the member becoming fouled. Should the member become entangled, it could easily dislodge the line from a column. If a worker is tied to it at the time, a fall could be caused.

6. The ANSI A10.14-1991 American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations – Requirements for Safety Belts, Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines for Construction and Demolition Use, states that the anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration device should, if possible, be located above the wearer’s belt or harness attachment. ANSI A10.14 also states that a suitable anchorage point is one which is located as high as possible to prevent contact with an obstruction below should the worker fall. Most manufacturers also warn in the user’s handbook that the safety block/retractable lifeline must be positioned above the D-ring (above the work space of the intended user) and OSHA recommends that fall arrest and restraint equipment be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Attachment of a retractable device to a horizontal cable near floor level or using the inserts in the floor or roof members may result in increased free fall due to the dorsal D-ring of the fullbody harness riding higher than the attachment point of the snaphook

25to the cable or insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker with a dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above the floor or surface, reduces the working length to only one foot, by placing the anchorage five feet away from the fall hazard). In addition, impact loads may exceed maximum fall arrest forces (MAF) because the fall arrest D-ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the safety block/retractable lifeline anchored to the walking-working surface; and the potential for swing hazards is increased. Manufacturers also require that workers not work at a level where the point of snaphook attachment to the body harness is above the device because this will increase the free fall distance and the deceleration distance and will cause higher forces on the body in the event of an accidental fall. Manufacturers recommend an anchorage for the retractable lifeline which is immovably fixed in space and is independent of the user’s support systems. A moveable anchorage is one which can be moved around (such as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which can deflect substantially under shock loading (such as a horizontal cable or very flexible beam). In the case of a very flexible anchorage, a shock load applied to the anchorage during fall arrest can cause oscillation of the flexible anchorage such that the retractable brake mechanism may undergo one or more cycles of locking/unlocking/locking (ratchet effect) until the anchorage deflection is dampened. Therefore, use of a moveable anchorage involves critical engineering and safety factors and should only be considered after fixed anchorage has been determined to be not feasible. Horizontal cables used as an anchorage present an additional hazard due to amplification of the horizontal component of maximum arrest force (of a fall) transmitted to the points where the horizontal cable is attached to the structure. This amplification is due to the angle of sag of a horizontal cable and is most severe for small angles of sag. For a cable sag angle of 2 degrees the horizontal force on the points of cable attachment can be amplified by a factor of 15. It is also necessary to install the retractable device vertically overhead to minimize swing falls. If an object is in the worker’s swing path (or that of the cable) hazardous situations exist: (1) due to the swing, horizontal speed of the user may be high enough to cause injury when an obstacle in the swing fall path is struck by either the user or the cable; (2) the total vertical fall distance of the user may be much greater than if the user had fallen only vertically without a swing fall path. With retractable lines, overconfidence may cause the worker to engage in inappropriate behavior, such as approaching the perimeter of a floor or roof at a distance appreciably greater than the shortest distance between the anchorage point and the leading edge. Though the retractable lifeline may arrest a worker’s fall before he or she

has fallen a few feet, the lifeline may drag along the edge of the floor or beam and swing the worker like a pendulum until the line has moved to a position where the distance between the anchorage point and floor edge is the shortest distance between those two points. Accompanying this pendulum swing is a lowering of the worker, with the attendant danger that he or she may violently impact the floor or some obstruction below. The risk of a cable breaking is increased if a lifeline is dragged sideways across the rough surface or edge of a concrete member at the same moment that the lifeline is being subjected to a maximum impact loading during a fall. The typical 3/16 in. cable in a retractable lifeline has a breaking strength of from 3000 to 3700 lbs.

7. The competent person, who can take into account the specialized operations being performed on this project, should determine when and where a designated erector cannot use a personal fall arrest system.

B. Safety Net Systems The nature of this particular precast concrete erection worksite precludes the safe use of safety nets where point of erection or leading edge work must take place. 1. To install safety nets in the interior high bay of the

single story portion of the building poses rigging attachment problems. Structural members do not exist to which supporting devices for nets can be attached in the area where protection is required. As the erection operation advances, the location of point of erection or leading edge work changes constantly as each member is attached to the structure. Due to this constant change it is not feasible to set net sections and build separate structures to support the nets.

2. The nature of the erection process for the precast concrete members is such that an installed net would protect workers as they position and secure only one structural member. After each member is stabilized the net would have to be moved to a new location (this could mean a move of 8 to 10 ft or the possibility of a move to a different level or area of the structure) to protect workers placing the next piece in the construction sequence. The result would be the installation and dismantling of safety nets repeatedly throughout the normal work day. As the time necessary to install a net, test, and remove it is significantly greater than the time necessary to position and secure a precast concrete member, the exposure time for the worker installing the safety net would be far longer than for the workers whom the net is intended to protect. The time exposure repeats itself each time the nets and supporting hardware must be moved laterally or upward to provide protection at the point of erection or leading edge.

3. Strict interpretation of 1926.502(c) requires that operations shall not be undertaken until the net is

26in place and has been tested. With the point of erection constantly changing, the time necessary to install and test a safety net significantly exceeds the time necessary to position and secure the concrete member.

4. Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter wall openings and opensided floors, causes attachment points to be left in architectural concrete which must be patched and filled with matching material after the net supporting hardware is removed. In order to patch these openings, additional numbers of employees must be suspended by swing stages, boatswain chairs or other devices, thereby increasing the amount of fall exposure time to employees.

5. Installed safety nets pose an additional hazard at the perimeter of the erected structure where limited space is available in which members can be turned after being lifted from the ground by the crane. There would be a high probability that the member being lifted could become entangled in net hardware, cables, etc.

6. The use of safety nets where structural wall panels are being erected would prevent movement of panels to point of installation. To be effective, nets would necessarily have to provide protection across the area where structural supporting wall panels would be set and plumbed before roof units could be placed.

7. Use of a tower crane for the erection of the high rise portion of the structure poses a particular hazard in that the crane operator cannot see or judge the proximity of the load in relation to the structure or nets. If the signaler is looking through nets and supporting structural devices while giving instructions to the crane operator, it is not possible to judge precise relationships between the load and the structure itself or to nets and supporting structural devices. This could cause the load to become entangled in the net or hit the structure causing potential damage.

C. Guardrail Systems On this particular worksite, guardrails, barricades, ropes, cables or other perimeter guarding devices or methods on the erection floor will pose problems to safe erection procedures. Typically, a floor or roof is erected by placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members next to one another and welding or grouting them together. The perimeter of a floor and roof changes each time a new member is placed into position. It is unreasonable and virtually impossible to erect guardrails and toe boards at the ever changing leading edge of a floor or roof.

1. To position a member safely it is necessary to remove all obstructions extending above the floor level near the point of erection. Such a procedure allows workers to swing a new member across the erected surface as necessary to position it properly without worrying about knocking material off of this surface.

Hollow core slab erection on the masonry wall requires installation of the perimeter protection where the masonry wall has to be constructed. This means the guardrail is installed then subsequently removed to continue the masonry construction. The erector will be exposed to a fall hazard for a longer period of time while installing and removing perimeter protection than while erecting the slabs. In hollow core work, as in other precast concrete erection, others are not typically on the work deck until the precast concrete erection is complete. The deck is not complete until the leveling, aligning, and grouting of the joints is done. It is normal practice to keep others off the deck until at least the next day after the installation is complete to allow the grout to harden.

2. There is not permanent boundary until all structural members have been placed in the floor or roof. At the leading edge, workers are operating at the temporary edge of the structure as they work to position the next member in the sequence. Compliance with the standard would require a guardrail and toe board to be installed along this edge. However, the presence of such a device would prevent a new member from being swung over the erected surface low enough to allow workers to control it safely during the positioning process. Further, these employees would have to work through the guardrail to align the new member and connect it to the structure. The guardrail would not protect an employee who must lean through it to do the necessary work, rather it would hinder the employee to such a degree that a greater hazard is created than if the guardrail were absent.

3. Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at the leading edge of installed floor or roof sections by creating the possibility of employees being caught between guardrails and suspended loads. The lack of a clear work area in which to guide the suspended load into position for placement and welding of members into the existing structure creates still further hazards.

4. Where erection processes require precast concrete stairways or openings to be installed as an integral part of the overall erection process, it must also be recognized that guardrails or handrails must not project above the surface of the erection floor. Such guardrails should be terminated at the level of the erection floor to avoid placing hazardous obstacles in the path of a member being positioned.

V. Other Fall Protection Measures Considered for This Job The following is a list and explanation of other fall protection measures available and an explanation of limitations for use on this particular jobsite. If during the course of erecting the building the employee sees an area

27that could be erected more safely by the use of these fall protection measures, the foreman should be notified. A. Scaffolds are not used because: 1. The leading edge of the building is constantly

changing and the scaffolding would have to be moved at very frequent intervals. Employees erecting and dismantling the scaffolding would be exposed to fall hazards for a greater length of time than they would by merely erecting the precast concrete member.

2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the safe swinging of a load by the crane.

3. Power lines, terrain and site do not allow for the safe use of scaffolding.

B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used because: 1. A vehicle mounted platform will not reach areas on

the deck that are erected over other levels. 2. The leading edge of the building is usually over a

lower level of the building and this lower level will not support the weight of a vehicle mounted platform.

3. A vehicle mounted platform could interfere with the safe swinging of a load by crane, either by the crane swinging the load over or into the equipment.

4. Power lines and surrounding site work do not allow for the safe use of a vehicle mounted platform.

C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are not used because: 1. A second crane close enough to suspend any employee in the working and erecting area could interfere with the safe swinging of a load by the crane hoisting the product to be erected.

2. Power lines and surrounding site work do not allow for the safe use of a second crane on the job.

VI. Enforcement Constant awareness of and respect for fall hazards, and compliance with all safety rules are considered conditions of employment. The jobsite superintendent, as well as individuals in the safety and personnel department, reserve the right to issue disciplinary warnings to employees, up to and including termination, for failure to follow the guidelines of this program. VII. Changes to Plan Any changes to the plan will be approved by (name of the qualified person). This plan shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the job progresses to determine if additional practices, procedures or training needs to be implemented by the competent person to improve or provide additional fall protection. Workers shall be notified and trained, if necessary, in the new procedures. A copy of this plan and all approved changes shall be maintained at the jobsite.

Sample Fall Protection Plan for Residential Construction (Insert Company Name) This fall protection plan is specific for the following project: Location of job Date plan prepared or modified Plan prepared by Plan approved by Plan supervised by The following fall protection plan is a sample program prepared for the prevention of injuries associated with falls. A fall protection plan must be developed and evaluated on a site by site basis. It is recommended that builders discuss the written fall protection plan with their OSHA area office prior to going on a jobsite. I. Statement of Company Policy (Your company name here) is dedicated to the protection of its employees from on-the-job injuries. All employees of (your company name here) have the responsibility to work safely on the job. The purpose of the plan is to supplement our existing safety and health program and to ensure that every employee who works for (your company name here) recognizes workplace fall hazards and takes the appropriate measures to address those hazards. This fall protection plan addresses the use of conventional fall protection at a number of areas on the project, as well as identifies specific activities that require non-conventional means of fall protection. During the construction of residential buildings under 48 feet in height, it is sometimes infeasible or it creates a greater hazard to use conventional fall protection systems at specific areas or for specific tasks. The areas or tasks may include, but are not limited to: a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and rafters; b. Installation of floor sheathing and joists; c. Roof sheathing operations; and d. Erecting exterior walls. In these cases, conventional fall protection systems may not be the safest choice for builders. This plan is designed to enable employers and employees to recognize the fall hazards associated with this job and to establish the safest procedures that are to be followed in order to prevent falls to lower levels or through holes and openings in walking/working surfaces. Each employee will be trained in these procedures and will strictly adhere to them except when doing so would expose the employee to a greater hazard. If, in the employee’s opinion, this is the case, the employee is to notify the competent person of their concern and have the concern addressed before proceeding. It is the responsibility of (name of competent person) to implement this fall protection plan. Continual observational safety checks of work operations and the enforcement of the safety policy and procedures shall be regularly enforced. The crew supervisor or foreman (insert name) is responsible for correcting any unsafe practices or conditions immediately.

28 It is the responsibility of the employer to ensure that all employees understand and adhere to the procedures of this plan and to follow the instructions of the crew supervisor. It is also the responsibility of the employee to bring to management’s attention any unsafe or hazardous conditions or practices that may cause injury to either themselves or any other employees. Any changes to the fall protection plan must be approved by (name of qualified person). II. Fall Protection Systems To Be Used on This Job Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior wall erection, roof sheathing, floor sheathing and joist/truss activities will be conducted by employees who are specifically trained to do this type of work and are trained to recognize fall hazards. The nature of such work normally exposes the employee to the fall hazard for a short period of time. This Plan details how (your company name here) will minimize these standards. Control Access Zones When using the plan to implement the fall protection options available, workers must be protected through limited access to high hazard locations. Before any nonconventional fall protection systems are used as part of the work plan, a controlled access zone (CAZ) shall be clearly defined by the competent person as an area where a recognized hazard exists. The demarcation of the CAZ shall be communicated by the competent person in a recognized manner, either through signs, wires, tapes, ropes or chains. (Your company name here) shall take the following steps to ensure that the CAZ is clearly marked or controlled by the competent person: All access to CAZ must be restricted to authorized entrants; All workers who are permitted in the CAZ shall be listed in the appropriate sections of the Plan (or be visibly identifiable by the competent person) prior to implementation; The competent person shall ensure that all protective elements of the CAZ be implemented prior to the beginning of work. Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and Rafter Erection During the erection and bracing of roof trusses/rafters, conventional fall protection may present a greater hazard to workers. On this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal fall arrest systems will not provide adequate fall protection because the nets will cause the walls to collapse, while there are no suitable attachment or anchorage points for guardrails or personal fall arrest systems. On this job, requiring workers to use a ladder for the entire installation process will cause a greater hazard because the worker must stand with his back or side to the front of the ladder. While erecting the truss or rafter the worker will need both hands to maneuver the truss and therefore cannot hold onto the ladder. In addition, ladders cannot be adequately protected from movement while trusses are being maneuvered into place. Many workers

may experience additional fatigue because of the increase in overhead work with heavy materials, which can also lead to a greater hazard. Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on this job because the ground, after recent backfilling, cannot support the scaffolding. In most cases, the erection and dismantling of the scaffold would expose workers to a greater fall hazard than erection of the trusses/rafters. On all walls eight feet or less, workers will install interior scaffolds along the interior wall below the location where the trusses/rafters will be erected. “Sawhorse” scaffolds constructed of 46 inch sawhorses and 2x10 planks will often allow workers to be elevated high enough to allow for the erection of trusses and rafters without working on the top plate of the wall. In structures that have walls higher than eight feet and where the use of scaffolds and ladders would create a greater hazard, safe working procedures will be utilized when working on the top plate and will be monitored by the crew supervisor. During all stages of truss/rafter erection the stability of the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all times. (Your company name here) shall take the following steps to protect workers who are exposed to fall hazards while working from the top plate installing trusses/rafters: Only the following trained workers will be allowed to work on the top plate during roof truss or rafter installation: Workers shall have no other duties to perform during truss/rafter erection procedures; All trusses/rafters will be adequately braced before any worker can use the truss/rafter as a support; Workers will remain on the top plate using the previously stabilized truss/rafter as a support while other trusses/rafters are being erected; Workers will leave the area of the secured trusses only when it is necessary to secure another truss/rafter; The first two trusses/rafters will be set from ladders leaning on side walls at points where the walls can support the weight of the ladder; and A worker will climb onto the interior top plate via a ladder to secure the peaks of the first two trusses/rafters being set. The workers responsible for detaching trusses from cranes and/or securing trusses at the peaks traditionally are positioned at the peak of the trusses/rafters. There are also situations where workers securing rafters to ridge beams will be positioned on top of the ridge beam. (Your company name here) shall take the following steps to protect workers who are exposed to fall hazards while securing trusses/rafters at the peak of the trusses/ridge beam: Only the following trained workers will be allowed to work at the peak during roof truss or rafter installation: Once truss or rafter installation begins, workers not involved in that activity shall not stand or walk below or adjacent to the roof opening or exterior walls in any area where they could be struck by falling objects; Workers shall have no other duties than securing/bracing the trusses/ridge beam; Workers positioned at the peaks or in the webs of trusses or on top of the ridge beam shall work from a stable

29position, either by sitting on a “ridge seat” or other equivalent surface that provides additional stability or by positioning themselves in previously stabilized trusses/rafters and leaning into and reaching through the trusses/rafters; Workers shall not remain on or in the peak/ridge any longer than necessary to safely complete the task. Roof Sheathing Operations Workers typically install roof sheathing after all trusses/rafters and any permanent truss bracing is in place. Roof structures are unstable until some sheathing is installed, so workers installing roof sheathing cannot be protected from fall hazards by conventional fall protection systems until it is determined that the roofing system can be used as an anchorage point. At that point, employees shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system. Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a worker falls while attached to a single truss with a belt/harness. Nets could also cause collapse, and there is no place to attach guardrails. All workers will ensure that they have secure footing before they attempt to walk on the sheathing, including cleaning shoes/boots of mud or other slip hazards. To minimize the time workers must be exposed to a fall hazard, materials will be staged to allow for the quickest installation of sheathing. (Your company name here) shall take the following steps to protect workers who are exposed to fall hazards while installing roof sheathing: Once roof sheathing installation begins, workers not involved in that activity shall not stand or walk below or adjacent to the roof opening or exterior walls in any area where they could be struck by falling objects; The competent person shall determine the limits of this area, which shall be clearly communicated to workers prior to placement of the first piece of roof sheathing; The competent person may order work on the roof to be suspended for brief periods as necessary to allow other workers to pass through such areas when this would not create a greater hazard; Only qualified workers shall install roof sheathing; The bottom row of roof sheathing may be installed by workers standing in truss webs; After the bottom row of roof sheathing is installed, a slide guard extending the width of the roof shall be securely attached to the roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of no less than nominal 4" height capable of limiting the uncontrolled slide of workers. Workers should install the slide guard while standing in truss webs and leaning over the sheathing; Additional rows of roof sheathing may be installed by workers positioned on previously installed rows of sheathing. A slide guard can be used to assist workers in retaining their footing during successive sheathing operations; Additional slide guards shall be securely attached to the roof at intervals not to exceed 13 feet as successive rows of sheathing are installed. For roofs with pitches in excess of 9-in-12, slide guards will be installed at four-foot intervals.

When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet) are present, roof sheathing operations shall be suspended unless safe footing can be assured for those workers installing sheathing. When strong winds (above 40 miles per hour) are present, roof sheathing operations are to be suspended unless wind breakers are erected. Installation of floor joists and sheathing during the installation of floor sheathing/joists (leading edge construction), the following steps shall be taken to protect workers: Materials for the operations shall be conveniently staged to allow for easy access to workers; The first floor joists or trusses will be rolled into position and secured either from the ground, ladders or sawhorse scaffolds; Each successive floor joist or truss will be rolled into place and secured from a platform created from a sheet of plywood laid over the previously secured floor joists or trusses; Except for the first row of sheathing which will be installed from ladders or the ground, workers shall work from the established deck; and Any workers not assisting in the leading edge construction while leading edges still exist (e.g. cutting the decking for the installers) shall not be permitted within six feet of the leading edge under construction. Erection of Exterior Walls During the construction and erection of exterior walls, employers shall take the following steps to protect workers: Only the following trained workers will be allowed to erect exterior walls: A painted line six feet from the perimeter will be clearly marked prior to any wall erection activities to warn of the approaching unprotected edge; Materials for operations shall be conveniently staged to minimize fall hazards; and Workers constructing exterior walls shall complete as much cutting of materials and other preparation as possible away from the edge of the deck. III. Enforcement Constant awareness of and respect for fall hazards, and compliance with all safety rules are considered conditions of employment. The crew supervisor or foreman, as well as individuals in the safety and personnel department, reserve the right to issue disciplinary warnings to employees, up to and including termination, for failure to follow the guidelines of this program. IV. Accident Investigations All accidents that result in injury to workers, regardless of their nature, shall be investigated and reported. It is an integral part of any safety program that documentation take place as soon as possible so that the cause and means of prevention can be identified to prevent a reoccurrence. In the event that an employee falls or there is some other related, serious incident occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to determine if additional practices, procedures, or training need to be implemented to prevent similar types of falls or incidents from occurring.

30V. Changes to Plan Any changes to the plan will be approved by (name of the qualified person) as the job progresses to determine if additional practices, procedures or training needs to be implemented by the competent person to improve or

provide additional fall protection. Workers shall be notified and trained, if necessary, in the new procedures. A copy of this plan and all approved changes shall be maintained at the jobsite. *[59 FR 40746, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995]



